65800010B-4 - Rev - A Ships Manual

Ship’s Manual
Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.
118 Burlington Road, New Malden, Surrey, KT3 4NR England

Tel: +44 (0) 20 8329 2000 Fax: +44 (0) 20 8329 2415
Part Number: 65800010B-4 Printed in England March 2005

Revision: A
BridgeMaster E Radar
Ship’s Manual Preamble
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
The Radar features, functionality and capability

which are described in this manual are not
necessarily present in all versions or
configurations of the BridgeMaster E.
WARNING: Lethal Voltage Hazard
When access covers are removed, lethal voltages may be exposed. Some capacitors used in
the equipment take several minutes to discharge their stored voltages after switch OFF, this is a
lethal voltage hazard. Always set the supply switch-fuse to OFF and remove the fuses, before
removing the access covers of the equipment.
WARNING: Health Hazard
When cleaning the inside of the equipment, take care not to inhale dust. The dust is a
temporary health hazard, depending on individual allergies.
WARNING: Radiation Hazard
Keep outside the hazard zone around an antenna or open waveguide radiating power. Refer to
the table below for hazard zones. When it is necessary to work on the Scanner Unit, make sure
that radar is switched OFF, and that both the Mains Isolator and the Scanner Control Unit are
turned to the OFF position.
Never look directly into an open waveguide.
Radar and other forms of RF radiation can cause Cardiac Pacemakers to malfunction. If you
use a Cardiac Pacemaker and suspect a malfunction, leave the vicinity of the radar system
immediately and seek medical advice.
Most countries accept that there is no significant radiation hazard at RF power density levels of
up to 10 mW/cm2.
Hazard Zones
Antenna Length 10 mW/cm2 1 mW/cm2
1.2m X-band 1.7m 17m
1.8m X-band 1.05m 10.5m
2.4m X-band 0.75m 7.5m
2.7m S-band 0.73m 7.3m
3.7m S-band 0.55m 5.5m
CAUTION: Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSDs)
The equipment contains ESSDs. Take care not to damage these devices by discharge of
electrostatic voltages.
65800010B (i)
Preamble Ship’s Manual
Intentionally Blank
(ii) 65800010B
REVISION RECORD
Revision No Issue Date Date Incorporated

Incorporated By
65800010B (iii)
Intentionally Blank
(iv) 65800010B
BridgeMaster E:- S-band Scanner Unit (with Integral Transceiver)
BridgeMaster E:- S-band Scanner Unit (for use with Bulkhead Transceiver)
BridgeMaster E:- X-band Scanner Unit (with Integral or Bulkhead Transceiver)
65800010B (v)
BridgeMaster E:- S-band Bulkhead Transceiver
BridgeMaster E:- X-band Bulkhead Transceiver

(vi) 65800010B
BridgeMaster E:- Desk Mounted 180 Display Unit
BridgeMaster E:- Flat Panel Monitors
65800010B (vii)
BridgeMaster E:- 250 Desk Mounted Standard and Extended Display Units
BridgeMaster E:- 250 Display Unit fitted with optional Deck Mounting Kit
(viii) 65800010B
BridgeMaster E:- Desk Mounted 340 Display Unit and Kit 340 CRT Monitor
BridgeMaster E:- Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit
65800010B (ix)
BridgeMaster E:- Kit and Extended Kit Processor Units
Memory Card Interface Trackerball

Joystick
On/Off Switch
Keyboard Monitor Brilliance
BridgeMaster E:- Kit Radar Display Modules
(x) 65800010B
PREFACE
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is intended for use by the Installation Engineer and Radar Operator. The structure
of the manual and the design of its pages can help you to find the information that you need.
Consistent presentation techniques are used throughout the manual. For ease of use, the
manual is divided into chapters as follows:
• Chapter 1 - Technical Specification. This chapter gives a full specification of the

BridgeMaster E Radar Series, both operational and technical.
• Chapter 2 - System Configurations. This chapter details the system configurations

available with the BridgeMaster E Radar Series.
• Chapter 3 - Installation. This chapter gives notes on installation with installation

diagrams and inter-unit cabling information.
• Chapter 4 - Initialisation and Commissioning. This chapter details the Initialisation and
Commissioning procedures for a BridgeMaster E installation.
• Chapter 5 - Operator Tests. This chapter details the operator tests, which are available
at the Display Unit.
• Chapter 6 - Fault Reporting and First Line Servicing. This chapter gives procedures for
fault reporting and details all first line servicing permitted.
• Chapter 7 - Routine Maintenance. This chapter gives procedures for routine

maintenance.
• Chapter 8 - Modifications. This chapter is used for the recording of modifications and
information released after publication.
• Chapter 9 - Additional Features. This chapter gives details of special options for
transceivers and turning units. It covers the specification, installation, commissioning and
servicing.
Operating procedures for the BridgeMaster E series radars are published under separate cover
in the Operator’s User Guide publication reference 65800010A.
NOTICE
Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. have a policy of continuous development. This may
lead to the equipment described in this manual being at variance with equipment manufactured
after its publication.
The document may not be reproduced either in part or in whole without the permission of
65800010B (xi)
Intentionally Blank
(xii) 65800010B
BridgeMaster E Radar Series
Ship’s Manual
OVERALL CONTENTS
Related Documents ...................................................................................................... Preamble
Glossary of Terms ........................................................................................................ Preamble
Software Licence Agreement........................................................................................ Preamble
Declaration of Conformity Certificate ............................................................................ Preamble
Technical Specification................................................................................................. Chapter 1
System Configurations ................................................................................................. Chapter 2
Installation .................................................................................................................... Chapter 3
Initialisation and Commissioning .................................................................................. Chapter 4
Operator Tests.............................................................................................................. Chapter 5
Fault Reporting and First Line Servicing....................................................................... Chapter 6
Routine Maintenance.................................................................................................... Chapter 7
Modifications................................................................................................................. Chapter 8
Additional Features....................................................................................................... Chapter 9
65800010B (xiii)
Intentionally Blank
(xiv) 65800010B
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Other documents in the series:
• Bridge Card...........................................................................(Publications Ref 65800008)
• Bridge Card for Dual Channel Radars ..................................(Publications Ref 65818007)
• User Guide......................................................................... (Publications Ref 65800010A)
• User Guide for Dual Channel Radars ................................ (Publications Ref 65818014A)
• Technical Manual..................................................................(Publications Ref 65800011)
• Ancillary Units & Radar Systems Manual..............................(Publications Ref 65800012)
• BridgeMaster II S-band Supplement .....................................(Publications Ref 65601012)
• BridgeMaster II X-band Supplement .....................................(Publications Ref 65601013)
Note that the BridgeMaster II S-band Supplement, and the BridgeMaster II X-band Supplement,
cover Hybrid Systems containing BridgeMaster II Series Display Units with BridgeMaster E
Series Scanner Units.
Note that for original BridgeMaster, the 180/250 and 340 Display Technical Manuals are
Publications Ref 65600011 and 65626011 respectively.
65800010B (xv)
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Antenna............................. Slotted waveguide array for transmitting and receiving microwave

signals.
Bulkhead Transceiver ....... Transmitter/Receiver mounted below decks with microwave or
co-axial connection to the Turning Unit.
Display Unit ....................... The Display Monitor, Processing Unit and Controls.
Extended Processor.......... This is a larger processor which houses two Radar Processors
and one Display Processor, and is also referred to as a Dual
Channel Processor.
Integral Transceiver .......... Transmitter/Receiver housed in the Turning Unit.
Interswitch Unit.................. Enables radar systems to be connected together so that any
Display Unit may be connected to any Scanner Unit.
Monitor .............................. The viewing unit, which could be a CRT or Flat Panel Monitor
(also known as FPD or LCD).
Performance Monitor......... A unit, which warns the operator of reduced radar performance.
May be integral with the Turning Unit (X-Band) or separate (S-
Band).
Scanner Unit ..................... Comprises the Antenna and Turning Unit.
Scanner Control Unit......... A unit which switches power to the S-Band Turning Unit, under
the control of the Display.
Turning Unit ...................... Contains the Antenna rotation motor, the microwave rotary joint,
and may contain an integral Transceiver.
A........................................ Ampere
AC ..................................... Alternating Current
AFC................................... Automatic Frequency Control
ARPA ................................ Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
ATA ................................... Automatic Tracking Aid
BIST .................................. Built in Self-Test
CRT................................... Cathode Ray Tube
dB...................................... decibel
DC..................................... Direct Current
EMC .................................. Electromagnetic Compatibility

EPA................................... Electronic Plotting Aid
ft ........................................ foot or feet

FPD................................... Flat Panel Display
GMT .................................. Greenwich Mean Time

GPS .................................. Global Positioning System
Hz...................................... Hertz (unit of Frequency)
I/O ..................................... Input/Output
Km..................................... Kilometre
(xvi) 65800010B
GLOSSARY OF TERMS (continued)
Kt ....................................... Knot
kW ..................................... Kilowatt
LCD ................................... Liquid Crystal Display

LED ................................... Light Emitting Diode
LNFE ................................. Low Noise Front End
m ....................................... metre
nm ..................................... nautical mile
NMEA ................................ National Marine Electronic Association

NNF ................................... Not Normally Fitted
PCB ................................... Printed Circuit Board

PPI..................................... Plan Position Indicator
PRF ................................... Pulse Repetition Frequency
PRI .................................... Pulse Repetition Interval
PSU ................................... Power Supply Unit
RFI..................................... Radio Frequency Interference

rpm .................................... revolutions per minute
SART................................. Search and Rescue Transponder

sm...................................... statute mile
TX/RX................................ Transmitter/Receiver (Transceiver)
UTC ................................... Universal Time Constant
V ........................................ Volt
VMS................................... Voyage Management System
65800010B (xvii)
SOFTWARE LICENCE AGREEMENT
When you receive your radar, it will include factory installed software, the use of which is
subject to the following Licence Agreement below.
* * * IMPORTANT * * *
READ THE LICENCE TERMS PRINTED BELOW BEFORE USING
THE EQUIPMENT. USE OF THE EQUIPMENT INDICATES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS OF THE LICENCE AGREEMENT.
LICENCE AGREEMENT
This legal document is an agreement between you ("the Customer") and Northrop Grumman
Sperry Marine B.V. ("the Company").
BY USING THE BRIDGEMASTER E HARDWARE PRODUCT SYSTEM UPON WHICH THE

COMPANY HAS INSTALLED THE SOFTWARE THE CUSTOMER IS AGREEING TO
BECOME BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS AGREEMENT WILL INVALIDATE THE WARRANTY OF

THE BRIDGEMASTER E PRODUCT SYSTEM UPON WHICH THE COMPANY HAS
INSTALLED THE SOFTWARE ("THE SOFTWARE") AND MAY RESULT IN LEGAL
PROCEEDINGS BEING TAKEN AGAINST THE CUSTOMER.
THIS LICENCE AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED CONSTRUED AND SHALL TAKE

EFFECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF ENGLAND AND SHALL BE SUBJECT TO
THE EXCLUSIVE JURISDICTION OF THE ENGLISH COURTS TO WHICH THE CUSTOMER
AND THE COMPANY BY AGREEMENT IRREVOCABLY SUBMIT.
THE CUSTOMER IS AUTHORISED TO USE THE SOFTWARE ON THE BRIDGEMASTER E

HARDWARE PRODUCT SYSTEM UPON WHICH IT WAS INSTALLED BY THE COMPANY.
THE SOFTWARE MAY NOT BE COPIED OR TRANSFERRED FOR USE ON ANY
BRIDGEMASTER HARDWARE PRODUCT SYSTEM OTHER THAN THAT ON WHICH IT
WAS INSTALLED BY THE COMPANY.
The software is supplied to the Customer. The Company grants the Customer a world-wide
royalty-free licence to use the Software provided that:
1. The Customer shall only operate the Software in conjunction with the BridgeMaster E
hardware product system upon which it was installed by the company. No other use is
authorised, and in particular the Customer may not transfer use of the Software to any
other BridgeMaster hardware product system owned or used by the Customer.
2. The Customer shall not reverse assemble, modify or decompile the Software except only
to the extent expressly permitted by the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents
Act 1988.
3. The Customer shall not make copies of the Software. (Continued…)
(xviii) 65800010B
4. The Customer shall not have any title to or ownership of the Software or copyright or any
other intellectual property right in the Software, but shall have ownership of the physical
media.
5. The Customer acknowledges that the Software may in part have been developed by any
third party software supplier(s) named in the copyright notice(s) included with the Software
and agrees where this is the case that the third party supplier(s) (or the Company on
behalf of the third party supplier) shall be entitled to enforce the provisions of this
Agreement to the extent reasonably necessary to protect its interest as owner of such third
party software.
6. The Customer shall not rectify or have rectified any defect in the Software. The Customer
shall give the Company full details in writing of any serious defect and the Company shall
use reasonable endeavours to issue any correction necessary to rectify the defect as soon
as reasonably practicable thereafter, at no cost to the Customer.
7. The Customer shall not sublicense the Software to third parties or supply transfer or
assign the Software to third parties.
8. The Software may be enhanced or corrected from time to time by the Company or by any
such third party software supplier referred to above. All such corrections and
enhancements shall be subject to the restrictions set out in this Licence Agreement. Any
such enhancements shall be supplied at the Company's current rates prevailing at the
date of invoice.
9. The Company may revoke the licence granted to the Customer if the Customer shall go
into receivership liquidation, administration, or any other insolvency process, or shall fail to
comply with any of these conditions provided that (in the case of any breach capable of
remedy) the Customer has been requested by notice in writing to cure the failure and has
failed to do so within thirty (30) days of such notice.
10. The Customer shall ensure the security of the Software and shall not disclose the Software
or any parts thereof to any third party not approved beforehand by the Company. Insofar
as it is necessary to disclose the Software or aspects thereof to employees or to third
parties dealing with Customer in relation to matters for which the Software is used, such
disclosure is permitted only to the extent necessary for such purpose and only to the
employee or other persons who require to know the same.
MARINE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
See certificate on next page.
65800010B (xix)
(xx) 65800010B
BridgeMaster E Radar Chapter 1
Ship’s Manual Technical Specification
CHAPTER 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Contents
1 Radar System Performance ...............................................................................5

2 Antenna Specification (X-Band) ........................................................................6
3 Antenna Specification (S-Band) ........................................................................7
4 Transceiver Specification...................................................................................8
4.1 Mounting Arrangements............................................................................................8
4.2 Transmitter................................................................................................................8
4.3 Receiver....................................................................................................................8
4.4 Performance Monitor ................................................................................................8
4.5 Options......................................................................................................................9
4.5.1 High Pulse Repetition Frequency ..............................................................................9
4.5.2 Antenna Rotation in Standby .....................................................................................9
4.5.3 Additional Features ....................................................................................................9
5 Radar Display Specification.............................................................................11

5.1 Monitors ..................................................................................................................11
5.1.1 BridgeMaster E CRT Monitors .................................................................................11
5.1.2 BridgeMaster E Flat Panel Monitors ........................................................................11
5.1.3 Non-BridgeMaster E CRT Monitors .........................................................................11
5.2 Video Processing ....................................................................................................12
5.3 Range Scales..........................................................................................................12
5.4 Azimuth Stabilisation...............................................................................................13
5.5 Stabilisation Modes.................................................................................................13
5.6 Speed Inputs...........................................................................................................13
5.7 Presentation Modes ................................................................................................14
5.7.1 Relative Motion (Relative Trails) ..............................................................................14
5.7.2 True Motion, and Relative Motion (True Trails) .......................................................14
5.7.3 True Motion (TM) – Sea Stabilised ..........................................................................14
5.7.4 True Motion (TM) – Ground Stabilised ....................................................................14
5.7.5 Relative Motion (True Trails) – RM(T) – Sea Stabilised ..........................................15
5.7.6 Relative Motion (True Trails) – RM(T) – Ground Stabilised ....................................15
5.8 Range and Bearing Measurement ..........................................................................15
5.8.1 Variable Range Marker (VRM).................................................................................15
5.8.2 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)..................................................................................16
5.8.3 Electronic Range and Bearing Line (ERBL) ............................................................16
65800010B 1-1
5.9 Cursor Position Display .......................................................................................... 16
5.10 Heading/Stern Marker Line .................................................................................... 16
5.11 Trails....................................................................................................................... 17
5.12 Guard Zones (EPA)................................................................................................ 17
5.13 Auto-acquisition Zones (ATA/ARPA)...................................................................... 18
5.13.1 Annular Auto-acquisition Zones.............................................................................. 18
5.13.2 Polygonal Auto-acquisition Zones .......................................................................... 18
5.14 Sector Blanking ...................................................................................................... 19
5.15 Off-centre Display................................................................................................... 19
5.16 Max View Ahead .................................................................................................... 19
5.17 Marks...................................................................................................................... 19
5.18 Index Lines ............................................................................................................. 19
5.19 Rotating Parallel Cursor ......................................................................................... 19
5.20 Constant Radius Turn ............................................................................................ 20
5.21 Own Ship’s Profile .................................................................................................. 20
5.22 Serial Interfacing .................................................................................................... 20
5.23 Alarm/Watch Alarm ................................................................................................ 21
5.24 Interface Expansion for standard Radars (not for EPA(L))..................................... 21
5.25 Manual Target Plotting (EPA)................................................................................. 21
5.26 Tracking & AIS (ATA/ARPA) .................................................................................. 22
5.27 Multi-Target Tote (ATA/ARPA)............................................................................... 22
5.28 Track Table Outputs (ATA/ARPA).......................................................................... 23
5.29 Past Positions (ARPA) ........................................................................................... 24
5.30 Trial Manoeuvres (ARPA) ...................................................................................... 24
5.31 Degauss ................................................................................................................. 24
5.32 Nav Lines Interface ................................................................................................ 24
6 Radar Control Panels ....................................................................................... 25

7 Radar Maps ....................................................................................................... 26
7.1 Maps....................................................................................................................... 26
7.2 Guard Lines............................................................................................................ 26
7.3 History Tracks ........................................................................................................ 27
7.4 Position Input.......................................................................................................... 27
8 Power Requirements........................................................................................ 28
8.1 Power Requirements and Unit Characteristics (AC) .............................................. 28
8.2 Power Requirements and Unit Characteristics (DC) .............................................. 29
9 Mechanical Specification................................................................................. 30
9.1 Weights and Dimensions........................................................................................ 30
9.2 Display Mounting Options ...................................................................................... 31
65800010B 1-2
10 Compass Safe Distance ...................................................................................32
11 International Specifications .............................................................................33
65800010B 1-3
This page has been left blank

intentionally
65800010B 1-4
1 Radar System Performance

Parameter Detail
Minimum Range Less than 35m using 10m2 target, measured with short
pulse, 4.5m antenna height, on 0.25 and 0.5nm range
scales.
Range Discrimination Better than 35m on 0.75nm range.
Bearing Discrimination 2.0° with 4 ft antenna (X-Band).
(Typical figures) 1.3° with 6 ft antenna (X-Band).
1.0° with 8 ft antenna (X-Band).
2.8° with 9 ft antenna (S-Band).
2.0° with 12 ft antenna (S-Band)
on 1.5 nm range using 10 m2 reflector at a range of 1.0 nm.
Range Ring Accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 25m
whichever is the greater.
Variable Range Marker 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 25m
Accuracy whichever is the greater.
65800010B 1-5
2 Antenna Specification (X-Band)

Operating frequency:9410MHz ± 30MHz
Aperture Size
Specification
1.2m (4ft) 1.8m (6ft) 2.4m (8ft)
Horizontal Beam Width, -3dB (maximum) 2.0° 1.3° 1.0°
Vertical Beam Width, -3dB (nominal) 24° 24° 24°
Sidelobes within 10° of Beam (minimum) -23dB -23dB -23dB
Sidelobes outside 10° of Beam (minimum) -30dB -30dB -30dB
Gain (nominal) 29dB 30dB 31dB
Polarisation Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Limiting Relative Wind Speed 100kt 100kt 100kt
The rotational speeds given below apply to all sizes of X-Band antenna.
Rotational Speed rpm
Standard 28rpm
High 45rpm
65800010B 1-6
3 Antenna Specification (S-Band)

Operating frequency:3050MHz ± 10MHz
Aperture Size
Specification
2.7m (9ft)* 3.7m (12ft)
Horizontal Beam Width, -3dB (maximum) 2.8° 2.0°
Vertical Beam Width, -3dB (nominal) 30° 30°
Sidelobes within 10° of Beam (minimum) - -23dB
Sidelobes within 15° of Beam (minimum) -23dB -
Sidelobes outside 10° of Beam (minimum) - -30dB
Sidelobes outside 15° of Beam (minimum) -28dB -
Gain (nominal) 25dB 26dB
Polarisation Horizontal Horizontal
Limiting Relative Wind Speed 100kt 100kt
*The 2.7m (9ft) antenna is only Type Approved for use in High Speed craft
The rotational speeds given below apply to all sizes of S-Band antenna.
Mains Supply Frequency 50Hz 60Hz
Rotation Speed (standard) 25rpm 30rpm
Rotation Speed (high) 48rpm 50rpm
65800010B 1-7
4 Transceiver Specification
The following specification applies equally to X-Band and S-Band Transceivers
(except where shown).
4.1 Mounting Arrangements

Option X-Band S-Band
Masthead Aloft within Turning Unit
Bulkhead Waveguide feed to Turning Unit Co-axial feed to Turning Unit
4.2 Transmitter
Parameter X-Band S-Band
Magnetron Frequency 9410MHz ± 30MHz 3050MHz ± 10MHz
Magnetron Peak Power 10kW or 25kW 30kW
(nominal)
Pulse Length/PRF 0.05µs/1800Hz (Short Pulse)
(nominal) 0.05µs/3000Hz (Short Pulse option for X-Band only)
0.25µs/1800Hz (Medium Pulse)
0.75µs/785Hz (Long Pulse)
Pulse Generator Solid State with pulse forming network driving the
magnetron.
4.3 Receiver
Parameter Detail
Type Logarithmic, with Low Noise Front End (LNFE)
Tuning AFC/Manual
IF (Intermediate Frequency) Centred at 60MHz
IF Bandwidth (nominal) 20MHz on short and medium pulses
3MHz on long pulse
Noise Factor (nominal) 5.0dB
Dynamic Range (nominal) 80dB
4.4 Performance Monitor
This monitor is optional with non Type Approved systems.
Parameter Detail
Monitored Performance Radar Receiver and entire Radar System
Type Transponder
Presentation Four concentric arcs on Display Unit. Arcs are of
reducing brightness outwards, showing degradation in
performance (including antenna) in 5dB increments
relative to inner arc.
65800010B 1-8
4.5 Options
4.5.1 High Pulse Repetition Frequency
This option, available on 10kW and 25kW X-Band Transceivers, increases
the short pulse repetition frequency to 3kHz. This can be combined with the
Additional Features option listed below.
4.5.2 Antenna Rotation in Standby

This antenna is not available in combination with all other options.
This isolated closing contact input is used to make the antenna rotate when
the Transceiver is in standby.
This option cannot be used in combination with the remote speed select
option.
4.5.3 Additional Features

The additional-features versions of the Tuning Units and Transceivers
provide the extra Input and output capabilities listed below.
The synchro or resolver output is only available as an option on Scanner

Units with Additional Features.
4.5.3.1 Heading Marker Output

Output 1
Output 1 is an uncommitted contact output from a solid-state relay.
Output 2
Output 2 is an RS422 output, used to drive a differential line.
Both outputs share a common adjustment to correct for small errors in

Heading Marker Alignment.
4.5.3.2 Azimuth Data Output

4096 Pulse Bearing Output
This incremental output is available either in RS422 format to drive a

differential line, or as an open drain output to drive a single ended input.
Synchro or Resolver Bearing Data Output
The Scanner Unit may be fitted with size 11 synchro or resolver. This is
not aligned. Any alignment must be provided externally.
The synchro may be a Control Transmitter (CX) or a Control Differential

Transmitter (CDX).
65800010B 1-9
4.5.3.3 External Trigger Input
This 75-Ohm coaxial input allows the Transmitter to be synchronized to
other equipment on the ship.
Presence of the signal at the external trigger input will automatically select
external trigger as the mode of operation.
Transmission occurs typically 11µs after the leading edge of the pulse.
4.5.3.4 Radar Silence Input.

On receipt of this input, the transmitter is switched to standby within one
pulse repetition interval. The transmitter remains on standby as long as
the signal is present.
The input signal format can be selected to be: RS422, RS423, or

uncommitted contact.
The sense of the signal can be selected to be active high or active low.
4.5.3.5 Pre-Trigger Output

This 75-Ohm coaxial output allows other equipment on the ship to be
synchronised with the Transmitter.
The leading edge of the positive output pulse occurs approximately 11µs
before the magnetron output.
4.5.3.6 Speed Select Input (X-Band AC systems only)

This isolated closing contact input allows remote selection of either high or
low antenna rotation speed.
65800010B 1-10
5 Radar Display Specification

5.1 Monitors
5.1.1 BridgeMaster E CRT Monitors
Monitor Type:Colour raster scan with landscape mode picture format.
Radar Circle Pixel Grid Screen Diagonal Aspect
Type
Diameter (mm) Size (inches) Ratio
180 180 1365 x 1024 14 4:3
250 250 1365 x 1024 21 4:3
340 340 1024 x 768 29 4:3
5.1.2 BridgeMaster E Flat Panel Monitors
Monitor Type:Cold Cathode Florescent Lamp backlit transmissive Thin Film
Transistor LCD, with landscape mode picture format.
Radar Circle Pixel Grid Screen Diagonal Aspect
Type
Diameter (mm) Size (inches) Ratio
180 Desktop 180 1024 x 768 15.1 4:3
180 Kit 180 1280 x 1024 15.4 5:4
250 Desktop 250 1280 x 1024 19.0 5:4
250 Kit 250 1280 x 1024 18.1,19.0 or 20.1 5:4
340 340 1280 x 972 23.1 4:3
Note – 180 and 250 kit monitors can be used as secondary monitors to a
1280 x 1024 or 1280 x 972 primary monitor.
340 kit monitors can be used as secondary monitors to a 340 type primary
monitor.
Flat Panel monitors cannot be used as secondary monitors to primary CRT

monitors
5.1.3 Non-BridgeMaster E CRT Monitors

BridgeMaster E CRT Monitors fitted with buffered video/sync output option
can be used to drive a suitable Company approved CRT monitor as a
secondary display.
Video signal characteristics conform to RS343A, A 2:1 interlace format is

used, with line and field rates as shown in the following table.
Pixel Grid Size Line Rate (kHz) Field Rate (Hz)
1365 x 1024 42.5 79
1280 x 1024 42.5 79
1280 x 972 42.5 79
1024 x 768 30.7 76
65800010B 1-11
5.2 Video Processing
Parameter Detail
Manual Control Variable controls for gain, anti-clutter sea and anti-
clutter rain.
Anti-clutter Auto Advanced adaptive rain and sea clutter suppression
circuits, applied without manual adjustment.
Vision anti-clutter (option) Advanced 2-dimensional thresholding process with
target censoring for improved sea and rain clutter
suppression without manual adjustment.
Enhance (echo stretch) Operation available by selection on ranges of
0.75nm and above, with enhancement of targets
over entire picture area except for a small area
around the radar origin. Special circuitry for
identifying weak/fading targets.
Multi-level Video Radar video digitised at 16 levels. Scan integration
employed at 16 levels and displayed at 8 levels on
screen.
Picture Persistence/Trails Medium persistence phosphor simulation with
switchable true or relative motion trails, achieved by
unique video processing.
5.3 Range Scales
Range Scales Range Rings Available Pulse Lengths
nm* km nm* km Short Medium Long
0.125 0.25 0.025 0.05 √
0.25 0.5 0.05 0.1 √
0.5 1 0.1 0.2 √ √
0.75 1.5 0.25 0.5 √ √
1.5 3 0.25 0.5 √ √
3 6 0.5 1 √ √ √
6 12 1 2 √ √
12 24 2 4 √ √
24 48 4 8 √ √
48 96 8 16 √
96 192 16 32 √
* Statute miles have the same range scale/ring values as Nautical Miles. Later references
in this chapter to nm are equally applicable to sm if selected.
Display in nautical miles, kilometres or statute miles may be selected during

initialisation.
65800010B 1-12
5.4 Azimuth Stabilisation
Built-in stabilisation allows interfacing to most stepper and 360:1 ratio
synchro compass types. A Special Compass Input Option provides
interfacing to 180:1, 90:1, 36:1 and 1:1 ratio synchros.
Interfacing with Compasses with a Serial Output is also available. However,

the preferred interface is a stepper or synchro compass. If only a serial
compass is available and it is used for tracking, then the message rate
should be 50Hz.
See Chapter 3 (section 3.2) for details of compass types and cabling details.
Parameter Detail
Maximum Rate of Turn 1200°/m
Course Accuracy Within 0.5° of input source.
5.5 Stabilisation Modes

Parameter Detail
Head-Up (unstabilised) Available with Relative Motion (Relative Trails).
North-Up Available with Relative Motion (Relative Trails),
Course-Up Relative Motion (True Trails) and True Motion.
Note – North-Up and Course-Up are only available with a valid compass
input.
5.6 Speed Inputs

Speed information can be provided by several methods, selectable via the
SPEED display.
Parameter Detail
Speed Range and Input 0 to 75Kt, MANUAL
0 to 75Kt, Log (Serial or Pulse)
Echo Reference
Navigation Sensor
Steady State Speed Accuracy ±5% or ±0.25Kt, whichever is the greater, of
that defined by the input source.
The log speed can be derived from either a Pulse Type or a Serial Output
Type. Pulse Log types have outputs in the range 100 to 3000 pulses per
NM, and can be incremental TTL or ‘closing contact’ type. The open circuit
potential for the Pulse Log Input is approximately 5V. For acceptable serial
message headers, see Section 5.22 in this chapter.
65800010B 1-13
5.7 Presentation Modes
5.7.1 Relative Motion (Relative Trails)
Relative Motion (Relative Trails) – RM(R) – is available with Head-Up
(unstabilised), North-Up (stabilised), or Course-Up (stabilised), on all range
scales.
In the RM(R) mode, ownship is maintained at a selected point on the

display and the motion of all echoes is shown relative to ownship. This is
indicated by the Trails, if turned on.
5.7.2 True Motion, and Relative Motion (True Trails)

True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion (True Trails) – RM(T) – are available
with North-Up or Course-Up Stabilisation on ranges 0.5 to 48 nm inclusive
for TM, and ranges 0.5 nm and above for RM(T).
When using either TM or RM (T) modes, with either North-Up or Course-Up

Stabilisation selected, Sea and Ground Stabilisation is available.
Heading and Speed inputs from compass and a water locked log (or
manually set speed) provide a sea-stabilised presentation.
Course Made Good (CMG) and Speed Made Good (SMG) inputs, obtained
by echo referencing (locking to an echo fixed with respect to the ground), or
by using an input from a navigation sensor, provide a ground stabilised
presentation.
Ground stabilisation is also available with dual-axis serial logs.
5.7.3 True Motion (TM) – Sea Stabilised

Ownship moves across the radar picture according to the input of heading
(derived from the compass) and speed through the water (derived from the
log or manually estimated).
Echoes from land and all other stationary targets are presented as objects,
which are steady except for the movement due to tide or current
experienced by ownship.
Moving targets generate Trails, representing their True heading and speed,
but modified by the tide or current effects referred to above.
5.7.4 True Motion (TM) – Ground Stabilised

Ownship moves across the radar picture according to the inputs derived
either from tracking a fixed echo (echo reference) or from a navigation
sensor.
Echoes from land and all other stationary targets are presented as fixed
objects i.e., without trails.
Moving targets generate True Trails, representing their Course Made Good
and Speed Made Good.
65800010B 1-14
A disadvantage of the TM presentation mode is that the radar display range
ahead of ownship decreases as ownship moves across the display. The
display has to be reset, automatically either when ownship reaches two
thirds of display radius, or manually as required.
With TM selected, target trails may be selected or not as required. With

Sea Stabilisation, Trails attached to fixed targets give a direct indication of
tide or current set and rate experienced by ownship. Leeway effects, if
significant, will modify the trails on stationary targets.
5.7.5 Relative Motion (True Trails) – RM(T) – Sea Stabilised

In this mode, ownship is maintained at a selected point on the radar screen,
and True Trails of targets are built-up in memory. As with the True Motion
presentation, all trails are modified from True by the effect of tidal set and
drift experienced by ownship.
The advantage of RM (T) is that a constant range ahead of ownship is

maintained and it is not necessary to reset the display as in TM.
5.7.6 Relative Motion (True Trails) – RM(T) – Ground Stabilised

Just as for the Sea Stabilised presentation, the position of ownship remains
at a pre-selected position on the screen. With inputs derived either from
tracking a fixed echo (echo reference) or from a navigation sensor, echoes
from stationary targets move on the screen relative to ownship, but do not
generate trails.
All moving targets, such as ships underway, generate True Trails

representing their Course Made Good and Speed Made Good.
Note – The Echo Reference facility is only available when Autotrack is

installed.
5.8 Range and Bearing Measurement

Parameter Detail
Fixed Range Ring accuracy 1% of maximum of scale in use, or 25m, whichever
is the greater.
Fixed Bearing Scale Electronically generated scale markers at 1°, 5°
and 10° with bearing annotation every 10°.
When the VRM and EBL or ERBL are centred on dual channel radar, all
ranges and bearings are relative to the turning unit on channel 1.
5.8.1 Variable Range Marker (VRM)

Two independent VRMs are variable up to 480nm (limited to 5 times the
range scale selected) with numeric readout on display. Accuracy is better
than 1% of scale in use or 25m whichever is the greater.
VRM 1 is a 3:1 mark/space dashed circle and VRM 2 is an even

mark/space dashed circle. VRM 2, in conjunction with EBL 2, can be
centred, dropped or carried. VRM 1 is always centred. The range of the
VRMs is limited to five times the range scale in current use.
65800010B 1-15
When a change of range scale causes the limit to be exceeded, the VRM
range remains unchanged until he VRM is altered. When it is altered, it
immediately jumps to one and two thirds times the screen radius. These
restrictions also apply in ERBL mode.
5.8.2 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

There are two EBLs variable from zero to 359.9°, in 0.1° increments, with
numeric readout on display.
EBL 1 is a 3:1 mark/space dashed line and EBL 2 is an even mark/space

dashed line. EBL 2, in conjunction with VRM 2, can be centred, shifted,
dropped or carried relative to own ship. EBL 1 is always centred.
The EBL data display shows TRUE for a stabilised picture and REL for an
unstabilised picture. Switching from an unstabilised picture to a stabilised
picture or the opposite causes the EBLs to switch OFF and revert to the
default values.
5.8.3 Electronic Range and Bearing Line (ERBL)

When VRM 1 is OFF, the VRM function is merged with EBL 1 to form ERBL
1. There is a small circle on ERBL 1 to indicate the range setting of VRM 1,
set by the VRM/DATA control. ERBL 2 is related to VRM 2 in the same
way.
If EBL 2 is off-centred, then VRM 2 will also be off-centred. The VRM 2

data display is shown when ERBL 2 is displayed, to indicate the position of
the small ERBL circle.
5.9 Cursor Position Display

The position of the cursor, controlled by the joystick or trackball, is used to
provide the positional coordinates of targets located within the radar circle.
The cursor position is displayed as either Range or Bearing relative to
ownship or in Latitude and Longitude. Alternatively, the Range/Bearing and
Lat/Long readouts may be shown simultaneously. The cursor position, when
in the video circle, can be configured as a serial output message.
5.10 Heading/Stern Marker Line

This can be displayed as heading or stern marker via the initialisation menu
option. There is a momentary OFF facility that removes all synthetic data
from within the video circle, including the heading or stern marker, leaving
only radar video and trails. It is referenced to the selected turning unit
(channel 1 in dual channel radar systems).
Note – In static site mode the softkey action is to display heading line only.
65800010B 1-16
5.11 Trails
Long, Short and Permanent trails, and trails OFF are selectable. The long
and short trail lengths are shown on the display, and are dependent on the
selected range as follows:
Range Scale
Short Time Long Time
nm km
0.125 0.25 10 s 30 s
0.25 0.5 10 s 30 s
0.5 1 15 s 45 s
0.75 1.5 15 s 45 s
1.5 3 30 s 90 s
3 6 30 s 90 s
6 and above 12 and above 1 min 3 min
Permanent trails are timed for up to 100 minutes, and can be displayed until
manually reset.
5.12 Guard Zones (EPA)

Two annular guard zones can be defined. Guard zones are shown on 3, 6
and 12nm range scales (6, 12 and 24km scales) only and up to 60
infringements in total can be detected. When an infringement is observed a
GZ Entry alarm is raised and the guard zone infringement symbol (∆) is
drawn at the azimuth of the infringement. The default guard zone definitions
are given in the table below:
Parameter Guard Zone 1 Guard Zone 2
Subtended Angle 180° 180°
Start Bearing(with respect to 270° 270°
ship’s heading)
Start Range nm 4 8
km 8 16
Depth nm 0.4 0.4
km 0.8 0.8
The table below indicates the range of values that can be set:
Parameter Detail
Start and End Angle No restriction
Subtended Angle 6° to 354° and 360°
Start Range 1nm to 10nm to a resolution of 0.1nm.
2km to 20km to a resolution of 0.2km.
End Range As defined by the start range and range depth.
Range Depth Fixed at 0.4nm (0.8km)
65800010B 1-17
5.13 Auto-acquisition Zones (ATA/ARPA)
Two annular and two polygonal auto-acquisition zones are available. They
are referenced to the turning units and maintain their orientation with ship's
head. In dual channel radars, an auto-acquisition zone consists of two
identically shaped zones each referenced to its own turning unit position and
each acting independently.
5.13.1 Annular Auto-acquisition Zones

The default annular auto-acquisition zones will be two sections of an
annulus, as described in the table below. Note that the ranges and depths
are the same, irrespective of whether a metric, nm, or sm display has been
selected.
Parameter Detail
Auto-Acquisition Zone 1
Subtended Angle 180°
Start Bearing 270° w.r.t. ship’s head
Start Range 4nm
Depth 0.8nm
Auto-Acquisition Zone 2
Subtended Angle 180°
Start Bearing 270° w.r.t. ship’s head
Start Range 12nm
Depth 1.6nm
w.r.t = with respect to
The auto-acquisition zones can be redefined as needed within the limits

defined in the table below. The range, depth and subtended angle may be
altered.
The zones will always be shaped as a complete annulus or a section of

one. They will be defined in a clockwise direction, i.e. the arcs will extend
clockwise from the start position. If an attempt is made to define an auto-
acquisition zone with a subtended angle greater than 354°, the result will be
a 360° auto-acquisition zone.
Parameter Detail
Start and End Angle No restriction
Subtended Angle 6° to 354° and 360°
Min Start Bearing 1nm
Max End Range 40nm
Range Depth 0.4 to 2nm
5.13.2 Polygonal Auto-acquisition Zones
Two polygonal auto-acquisition zones are available, each bounded by a
polygon of between 3 and 10 sides.
65800010B 1-18
5.14 Sector Blanking
Parameter Detail
Sectors Two bearing sectors of antenna scan can be set on
installation. These sectors inhibit radar transmission over
an angular width of up to 180°, with a combined maximum
blanking of 340°. Sectors are indicated on the outside of the
bearing circle on the display.
5.15 Off-centre Display
Parameter Detail
Picture Offset Up to two thirds of the radius of the radar picture in any
direction. Not available on 96 n.mile (192km) range.
5.16 Max View Ahead
A facility enabling the operator to off-centre ownship on the reciprocal course
is provided on all range scales except 96nm (192km). On action, ownship is
re-positioned at two-thirds radius with the ship’s course line passing through
the centre of the display. The course line will be the Heading for Sea
Stabilised presentations, or Course Made Good for Ground Stabilisation.
5.17 Marks
Twenty cross-shaped markers are available in Relative and True Motion
modes. Markers can be dropped or carried relative to ownship, by menu
selection.
5.18 Index Lines

A group of five (four on EPA (L)) parallel index lines can be displayed
simultaneously, using the menu, on range scales of 0.25 nm (0.5km) and
above. The index lines are available in all presentation and motion modes.
During positioning of each index line, the display shows the angle of the line
and its perpendicular offset (range) to ownship’s position. Groups of index
lines are stored on the memory card, except for the EPA (L) where only one
group is available and that is stored internally.
5.19 Rotating Parallel Cursor

A facility to display a HALF circle or FULL circle rotating parallel cursor is
provided via the TOOLS menu. The cursor consists of a single diameter
white line plus a number of equally spaced lines perpendicular to the single
line. The spacing of the perpendicular lines corresponds to the range ring
spacing on all ranges except the 0.75nm (1.5km) range where spacing is at
half ring intervals. The rotating cursor is always centred on own ship.
65800010B 1-19
5.20 Constant Radius Turn
A facility to plan and display a change of heading via a constant radius turn is
provided for all range scales, all motion modes and all stabilised presentation
modes. The facility is accessed via the TOOLS menu, providing that the
radar is in the transmit mode. The menu prompts the operator for a start
point, new course, and radius of turn. Once set, the proposed turn is
displayed in red and may be toggled ON and OFF via the tools menu.
5.21 Own Ship’s Profile

From the tools menu, the operator can select own ship’s profile (a simple
outline of the ship in plan view) to be displayed at own ship’s position in the
video circle. The profile is only shown on the lower range scales. The shape
of the profile, and the maximum range scale at which it is displayed is
determined from information entered during system initialisation (i.e., Ship’s
length and beam, and Turning Unit offset from own ship’s centre).
5.22 Serial Interfacing

Two IEC61162-1 (NMEA 0183) serial inputs with optical isolation to 1000V
are provided as standard. These can be used for a variety of different serial
inputs such as from navigation sensors, logs and compasses. It should be
noted that due to a baud rate limit of 4800 on these inputs, a serial compass
would only be appropriate for the EPA variant. An additional three serial
inputs to IEC61162-2 are available on a dual channel radar or when an
optional Interface Unit 65847A is fitted, allowing baud rates of 4800 and 38K4
baud (38400 baud).
The following table shows the message types that can be interpreted from
devices generating serial outputs.
Device Message Types
Serial Compass One of: HDT, HDM, HDG
Serial Log One of: VBW, VHW
Depth Sensor One of: DPT, DBT
Wind Sensor One of: MWV, VWT, VWR
Nav Sensor One of: GGA, GLL, GLL&SNU, GLL&SLL
(Position Input)
One of: ZDA, ZZU, GLL (Time Input)
One of: Rnn&WPL, RTE&WPL, BWC&BWR
(Route Input)
VTG only (Speed Input)
VMSG (Proprietary VMS graphics message)
VBW for LOG input (via NAV sensor rather
than direct)
Target Rename TLB (Used with Track Table Output)
Alarm Acknowledgement ACK (Used with Alarm Status Output)
AIS Input VDM, VDO and ALR
Route & Waypoint Transfer RTE&WPL
All serial inputs can be connected for RS232, RS422 or current loop
compatibility. Full details of the serial input specification are given in the
Serial Input specification 65800/SIS/001.
65800010B 1-20
Two serial outputs are provided as standard in addition to the dedicated
Track Table Output (see Section 5.28). A further three outputs are available
on the dual channel radar or if the Interface Unit is fitted.
All outputs are software configurable as RS232 or RS422. Serial output 5 is

also configurable for RS485. There are only two serial outputs devices, the
alarm status output (ALR messages) that is associated with the Alarm
Acknowledgement Input, and the AIS output (ACK messages) that is
associated with the AIS Input.
Note – The AIS Input/Output can only be fitted on Serial I/O Ports 3, 4 or 5.
5.23 Alarm/Watch Alarm

An internal audible alarm will beep for each new alarm. The alarm is also
used for the Watch Alarm that can be programmed with time of 3, 6, 9 or 12
minutes. Both of these functions can be independently enabled and
disabled. A dual-channel radar or the optional Interface Unit 65847A enable
an external audible alarm to be driven, mimicking the internal one.
5.24 Interface Expansion for standard Radars (not for EPA(L))

An Interface Unit 65847A is available for single channel radars, giving the
following additional interfacing capability:
• Three serial inputs and outputs, necessary for AIS input (see Section
5.22)
• External audible alarm drive (see Section 5.23)
• External Start O/P (N/O and N/C relay contacts*)
• Remote Alarms O/P (N/O and N/C relay contacts*)
• Vigilance Alarm O/P (N/O and N/C relay contacts*) – refer to Chapter
4 Section 3.2.12 for additional information
*All O/P relay contacts are rated at 1A 30V DC or 1A 250V AC RMS.
5.25 Manual Target Plotting (EPA)

Parameter Detail
Availability Electronic plotting system on ranges 0.5nm to 48nm
(1km to 96km), in RM(R), RM(T) and TM modes.
Number of Targets 10
Vectors True or Relative. Vector time adjustable from 1 to 60
minutes. True Vectors only available when compass
connected.
Plotted points are scaled with range changes and rotated with changes in
orientation (stabilised modes only). Closest Point of Approach (CPA), Time
to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA), Range, Bearing, Speed of plotted
target(s) and Bow Crossing Time are given by alphanumeric readout on
display.
65800010B 1-21
5.26 Tracking & AIS (ATA/ARPA)
Targets can be acquired manually, automatically, or received from an AIS
system up to a total of 80 targets. The maximum number of AIS targets is 40,
and the maximum number of tracked targets is 60 if AIS is not being used.
The total number of targets that can be manually acquired is also reduced by
the number of targets that have already been automatically acquired.
By using the Auto Acquisition Zones of the BridgeMaster E, targets can be

acquired automatically on entry to an acquisition zone.
Parameter Detail
Targets 60 (Maximum) or 40 Tracked and 40 AIS
Manual Acquisition Range 0.25 to 40 nm.
Tracking Range 0.25 to 40 nm.
Information Displayed 0.5 to 96 nm (1km to 192km) range scales.
Tracking Performance Continuous for acquired targets, for 5 out of 10
consecutive scans.
Relative Velocity 150kt maximum.
Vector Presentation Full accuracy within 3 minutes, trend within 1 min.
Vector Length 1 to 60 minutes in 0.1-minute increments.
CPA Alarm Settings 0.1 to 20 nm in 0.1 nm increments.
TCPA Alarm Settings 1 to 99 minutes in 1-minute increments.
Auto-acquisition Zones 2 available.
CPA, TCPA, Range, Bearing, Bow Crossing, Speed and Course of all targets
are given by alphanumeric readout on display. All distances and times
displayed are relative to the Turning Unit’s physical location (channel 1 on a
dual channel radar).
Any display required to meet IEC60872-1 or IEC60872-2 specifications must

be supplied with compass information in analogue form, or in serial form
conforming to IEC61162-2.
If a serial compass is used for tracking, then the message rate should be
50Hz.
5.27 Multi-Target Tote (ATA/ARPA)

Three alternative display options to the single target data are provided
showing limited information for up to six selected targets. The multiple target
information comprises the target ID (Identification Number), TCPA, and CPA.
Groups of targets can be automatically selected by CPA or range, or can be
manually selected by the user.
65800010B 1-22
5.28 Track Table Outputs (ATA/ARPA)
A dedicated Track Table Output is compliant to IEC 61162-1. Output formats
RS232 or RS422, are selectable via the I/O Options Menu. A guide to the
NMEA message content is given below:
Own ship’s information, output every two seconds:

• Ship’s heading and status
• Vessel’s course and speed
• Reference for course and speed (e.g. manual or log)
• Speed units
• Manually entered set and drift
Radar system information, output every two seconds:
• Origin 1 range/bearing
• VRM 1 range
• EBL 1 bearing
• Origin 2 range/bearing
• VRM 2 range
• EBL 2 bearing
• Cursor range/bearing
• Range scale
• Range units
• Display presentation
Target information, output varies according to number of tracked targets,
maximum of 10 being output every 2 seconds:
• Target number
• Target range from own ship
• Target bearing from own ship, TRUE
• Target speed
• Target course, TRUE
• CPA Distance
• Time to CPA (TCPA)
• Speed/distance units
• Target name
• Target status
• Echo reference target
• Acquisition calculation time in UTC.
• Acquisition type
Interface Specification 65800/SIS/003 shows full details of the output format.
65800010B 1-23
5.29 Past Positions (ARPA)
This facility is only available on an ARPA. It is possible to display up to four
past position dots indicating the past positions of all tracked targets,
depending on how long the target has been tracked.
Parameter Detail
Dot time intervals 15 sec
30 sec
1 min
2 min
4 min
8 min
16 min
The position of the dots will match the trails, i.e. they will be true position dots
when the trails are true, and relative dots when the trails are relative. Past
position dots are available in all presentation and motion modes on systems
with a working compass. When the dots are selected, the time interval
between dots will be displayed as a permanent prompt.
The selected interval will not alter when the range is changed. The selected
time interval is stored in non-volatile memory; the default is 1 minute. The
past position data will start to build up as soon as tracking of the target
commences. It will only be cleared when the target is cancelled. The
operator may switch the display of the dots off and on.
5.30 Trial Manoeuvres (ARPA)

Parameter Detail
Trial Course 0 to 359.9, in 0.1° increments.
Trial Speed 0 to 75kts.
Trial Delay 1 to 30 minutes, in 0.1 minute increments.
Rate of Turn 1°/min to maximum set rate of turn in initialisation
Alarm (MVR) time 30 seconds before manoeuvre starts.
5.31 Degauss
Degauss occurs automatically after switch ON, and manually on selection via
System Menu. This function is only required for colour CRT monitors.
5.32 Nav Lines Interface

A proprietary non-NMEA interface is selectable allowing radar maps to be
transferred from VMS systems.
65800010B 1-24
6 Radar Control Panels

With the exception of the ON/OFF switch, all the controls required for operating
the radar are located on one (or two) Radar control Panel(s) mounted at the
bottom edge of the display monitor. A simple control panel containing a joystick
or trackerball and associated left/right keys is always fitted. This panel may also
contain a memory card unit.
The controls offered by the Simple Control Panel are as follows:
Joystick/Trackerball Used to move the screen cursor within the radar

picture, and to position the arrowed cursor over
menu items. It is also used to control primary
operational functions of the radar, such as clutter
and gain.
Left/Right Push These keys are positioned at the right hand side of
Button Keys the panel close to the joystick/trackerball. The left
key is used to select (turn ON or OFF) the option
over which the screen cursor is placed. The right
key is used where appropriate to reveal an options
menu for the selected facility, or to cancel a
selection.
Duplicate Left Key: This key is available when a memory card unit is
fitted at the left hand side of the panel. Its operation
is identical to that of the left key described above.
However, its location allows for two-handed
operation.
The second, Dedicated Control Panel (optional), offers the following controls:
Rotary Analogue Controls Used to control primary operational
functions of the radar:
• Gain
• Anti-clutter Rain
• Anti-clutter Sea
• EBL 1
• VRM 1
• Panel Brightness
Push Button Keys Used to select the secondary functions of
the radar:
• Range Up
• Range Down
• Centre
• TM/RM
• True/Relative Vectors
• Acknowledge
65800010B 1-25
7 Radar Maps
The main features of Radar Maps are:
• Construction, display and maintenance of multi-source topographic
maps.
• Guard Lines.
The facilities of Radar Maps are available in all stabilised modes of operation. All
references for Radar Maps are in latitude and longitude, and therefore maps can
only be used when ownship’s position is available. Ownship’s positions can be
obtained from a Navigation Sensor or by using an EP.
Notes –
1. The integrity of Radar Maps is entirely dependent on there being a
reliable, steady source for ownship’s lat/long at all time.
2. To ensure the integrity of data stored on memory cards, refer to
Chapter 7 ‘Routine Maintenance’ for details of memory card
battery maintenance.
Parameter Detail
Availability Ranges 0.5 to 96 nm (1 to 192km).
Stabilised modes only.
Ownship lat/long required (Nav, EP/DR).
Latitude must be between 78°N and 78°S.
7.1 Maps
Parameter Detail
Availability A single map or folio of maps at any time, in all stabilised
modes.
Selection By name, from a menu list.
Alignment If required, applied to all map elements.
Elements Displayed 500 closest displayable elements (maximum).
Elements per Map Any number; recommended maximum 800.
Editing By lat/long via control panel.
By cursor via joystick.
Storage By name, to a file on one of the two Memory Cards.
7.2 Guard Lines

Parameter Detail
Number of Lines 20 maximum.
65800010B 1-26
7.3 History Tracks
Parameter Detail
Number of Tracks Ownship and up to 6 tracked targets.
Availability Stabilised Presentations only.
Operational Modes Record and/or display.
Time Stamp Interval 1, 3, 6, 12, 30 and 60 minutes.
Storage By time stamp, to file on one or two Memory Cards.
Replay Standby or Transmit mode.
Event Marking On demand for all history tracks.
7.4 Position Input

Parameter Detail
Ownship’s Lat/Long derived from Navigation sensor, estimated position or
dead reckoning.
65800010B 1-27
8 Power Requirements
8.1 Power Requirements and Unit Characteristics (AC)
The prime power source must have a voltage between 92 and 276V RMS at
a frequency between 47 and 64Hz.
For high voltage multiphase supplies, a step-down transformer is available.

Maximum
Unit
Input Power
Display Units (Including Monitor and Processor Unit)
180/250/340 Display Unit (CRT) 240 VA
250/340 Dual Channel Display Unit (CRT) 260 VA
180 Display Unit (FPD) 130 VA
250 Display Unit (FPD) 140 VA
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) 160 VA
FPD Monitor (All sizes with no Processor) 100 VA
Processor Unit (No Monitor) 100 VA

Dual Channel Processor Unit (No Monitor) 120 VA
X-band Scanner Motor and Transceiver

Standard Speed Unit 250 VA
High Speed Unit 370 VA
S-band Transceiver Unit 120 VA
S-band Scanner Motor Unit 1 Phase 3 Phase

Standard Speed Unit (Per phase) 750 VA 500 VA
High Speed Unit (Per phase) 750 VA 600 VA
Parameter All Units except S-band Scanner Motor Unit

Power Factor Correction Better than 0.9
Over-voltage transient of up to 40% above
nominal input voltage with maximum duration of
Transient protection one second.
Pulse transient of up to ± 1200V peak, with a rise
time of 2 to 10µs and duration up to 20µs.
Output short circuit.
High and low input voltage.
Protection facilities
Output over-voltage.
Slow start.
65800010B 1-28
8.2 Power Requirements and Unit Characteristics (DC)
The prime power source must have a voltage between 22 and 32V DC.
Maximum
Unit
Input Power
180/250/340 Display Unit (CRT) 240W
180 Display Unit (FPD) 130W
250 Display Unit (FPD) 140W
Processor Unit (No Monitor) 100W
FPD Monitor (No Processor) 100W
X-band Scanner Motor and Transceiver 250W
Parameter Detail
Symmetrical (line-line) 5000V of duration 10µs
(100µs rise/fall time).
Transient protection
Line to ground 500V of duration 60µs
(1µs rise/fall time)
Output short circuit.
Protection facilities High and low input voltage.
Slow start.
65800010B 1-29
9 Mechanical Specification
9.1 Weights and Dimensions
Height Depth Width Weight
Component
(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
180 Display Unit (CRT) 439 598(694)† 403 28(29)†
180 Display Unit (FPD) 459 598(694)† 403 21(22)†
†
250 Display Unit (CRT) 547 632(726) 538 49(51)†
250 Display Unit (CRT) + pedestal 1283 635(731)† 538 87(88)†
250 Display Unit (FPD) 535 598(694)† 458 25(26)†
†
250 Display Unit (FPD) + pedestal TBA TBA () TBA TBA ()†
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (CRT) 617 632(726)† 538 60(62)†
†
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (CRT) + pedestal 1283 635(731) 538 86(87)†
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) TBA TBA ()† TBA TBA ()†
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) + pedestal TBA TBA ()† TBA TBA ()†
†
340 Display Unit (FPD) Desktop 610 632(727) 640 53(54)†
340 Display Unit (FPD) Desktop + pedestal 1346 635(731)† 640 90(91)†
†
340 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) Desktop TBA TBA () TBA TBA ()†
340 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) Desktop + pedestal TBA TBA ()† TBA TBA ()†
340 Display Unit (CRT) Deck Mounted 1300 993 680 131
340 Display Unit (FPD) Deck Mounted 1300 993 680 105
340 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) Deck Mounted 1300 993 680 111
180 Monitor Module (CRT) 320 499 425 18.4
180 Monitor Module (FPD) 392.5 93 412 5
250 Monitor Module (CRT) 420 553 576 35.5
250 Monitor Module (18” FPD) 447 98 486 7
250 Monitor Module (19” FPD) 444 96 483 12
250 Monitor Module (20” FPD) 481 108 534 10.5
340 Monitor Module (CRT) 497 481 729 55
340 Monitor Module (FPD) 534 100 584 17
Processor Electronics Unit 120 454 387 12
Dual Channel Processor Electronics Unit 185 563 437 18
X-band Scanner Unit with 1.2m Antenna 440 586 1305* 49 42‡
X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (658xxA, B, P, T, W) 607 327 370 23
X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (658xxE, F, G, H, L) 607 330 370 19
S-band Scanner Unit + 2.7m Antenna + integral Transceiver 800 718 2800* 163.5
S-band Scanner Unit + 2.7m Antenna. No integral Transceiver 800 675 2800* 150.5
S-band Scanner Unit + 3.7m Antenna + integral Transceiver 800 718 3700* 176.5
S-band Scanner Unit + 3.7m Antenna. No integral Transceiver 800 675 3700* 163.5
S-band Bulkhead Transceiver Unit 515 318 402 25
* Antenna Turning Circle
†
Depths and weights in brackets include keyboard
‡
Excluding Transceiver
Refer to individual installation drawings in Chapter 3 for dimensions and weights of
smaller components, such as Control Panel Modules.
65800010B 1-30
9.2 Display Mounting Options
The radar display components are supplied either as integrated unit (desk or
deck mounting), or as a kit for fitting into customer specified console. See
Chapter 3 for installation details.
65800010B 1-31
10 Compass Safe Distance

Component Standard Steering
180 Display Unit (CRT) 1.4 m 0.8 m
180 Display Unit (FPD) 0.9 m 0.9 m
250 Display Unit (CRT) 1.8 m 1.1 m
250 Display Unit (CRT) + pedestal 2.0 m 1.1 m
250 Display Unit (FPD) 0.9 m 0.9 m
250 Display Unit (FPD) + pedestal TBA TBA
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (CRT) 2.0 m 1.3 m
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (CRT) + pedestal 2.2 m 1.3 m
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) TBA TBA
250 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) + pedestal TBA TBA
340 Display Unit (CRT) Deck Mounted 2.7 m 1.6 m
340 Display Unit (FPD) Deck Mounted 2.7 m 2.6 m
340 Display Unit (FPD) Desktop 2.6 m 2.6 m
340 Display Unit (FPD) Desktop + pedestal 2.2 m 1.2 m
340 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) Desktop TBA TBA
340 Dual Channel Display Unit (FPD) Desktop + pedestal TBA TBA
180 Monitor Module (CRT) 1.6 m 0.9 m
180 Monitor Module (FPD) 0.8 m 0.8 m
250 Monitor Module (18” FPD) 0.8 m 0.8 m
340 Monitor Module (FPD) 2.6 m 2.6 m
Processor Electronics Unit 2.0 m 1.0 m
Dual Channel Processor Electronics Unit 2.1 m 1.1 m
Brilliance Module 0.3 m 0.3 m
Memory Card Module 0.8 m 0.3 m
On-Off Switch Module 0.5 m 0.3 m
Joystick Module 0.9 m 0.4 m
Trackerball Module 0.8 m 0.3 m
Keyboard Module 0.5 m 0.3 m
X-band Scanner Unit 10kW 1.4 m 0.8 m

X-band Scanner Unit 25kW 3.3 m 2.0 m
X-band Scanner Unit (without Transceiver) 0.4 m 0.3 m
X-band Bulkhead Transceiver 10kW 1.3 m 0.7 m
X-band Bulkhead Transceiver 25kW 3.3 m 2.0 m
S-band Scanner Unit 30kW TBA TBA

S-band Scanner Unit (without Transceiver) TBA TBA
S-band Bulkhead Transceiver 30kW 4.3 m 2.6 m
S-band Scanner Control Unit 0.8 m 0.4 m
Interface Unit 0.3 m 0.3 m
65800010B 1-32
11 International Specifications
Meets the requirements of the following International Standards for maritime
navigation equipment:
Number Version Title

IEC 60872-1 1998 Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication Equipment and
Systems - Radar Plotting Aids - Automatic Radar Plotting Aids
(ARPA) - Methods of Testing and Required Test Results
Systems - Radar Plotting Aids - Part 2: Automatic Tracking
Aids (ATA) - Methods of Testing and Required Test Results
Systems - Radar Plotting Aids - Part 3: Electronic Plotting Aid
(EPA) - Performance Requirements - Methods of Testing and
Required Test Results
Systems - Radar - Part 1: Shipborne Radar - Performance
Requirements - Methods of Testing and Required Test Results
Systems - Shipborne Radar For High-Speed Craft (HSC) -
Methods of Testing and Required Test Results
IEC 60945 2002 Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication Equipment and
Systems - General Requirements - Methods of Testing and
Required Test Results
Systems - Digital Interfaces - Part 1: Single Talker and Multiple
Listeners
Systems - Digital Interfaces - Part 2: Single Talker and Multiple
Listeners, High-Speed Transmission
65800010B 1-33

intentionally
65800010B 1-34
Ship’s Manual System Configuration
CHAPTER 2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................3
2 System Identification Labels..............................................................................4
3 Unit Type Numbers .............................................................................................5
3.1 Monitor Unit...............................................................................................................5
3.2 Processor Electronics Unit........................................................................................7
3.3 Antenna Unit .............................................................................................................9
3.4 Turning Units and Integral Transceivers .................................................................10
3.5 Bulkhead Transceiver Unit......................................................................................12
3.6 Scanner Control Unit...............................................................................................13
3.7 Interswitch Unit .......................................................................................................13
3.8 Interface Unit...........................................................................................................13
4 Configuring a Typical System..........................................................................14

5 Options and Kits ...............................................................................................15
Figures
Figure 2.1 BridgeMaster E Series Part Numbers ....................................................3
Figure 2.2 Monitor Unit label ...................................................................................5
Figure 2.3 Processor Electronics Unit label ............................................................7
Figure 2.4 Antenna Unit label..................................................................................9
Figure 2.5 Turning Unit and Integral Transceiver label .........................................10
Figure 2.6 Bulkhead Transceiver Unit label ..........................................................12
Figure 2.7 Scanner Control Unit label ...................................................................13
65800010B 2-1
Chapter 2 BridgeMaster E Radar
System Configuration Ship’s Manual

intentionally
2-2 65800010B
1 Introduction
The alphanumeric System Number allocated to the BridgeMaster E Series of
Radars details the various units of the particular system to which the number
refers. Each System Number consists of up to seven identifying labels, which
are listed below. The description below covers all variants except dual channel
radars, some of which are not commercially available.
The various labels (from 1 to 7) of Figure 2.1, shown below, are explained in
more detail in Section 2 – System Identification Labels, which follows.
ARPA 34 2 / 6 / M K /FS
Radar Type Label

Label
1 1 Label 7 Monitor Type
Display Size Label 2 Label 6 Display Mounting Arrangement
Transceiver Type Label 3 Label 5 Transceiver Location
Label 4 Antenna Size
Figure 2.1 BridgeMaster E Series Part Numbers
65800010B 2-3
2 System Identification Labels

Label 1 Radar Size
Label Radar Type
EPA or EPA(L) Electronic Plotting Aid
ATA Automatic Tracking Aid
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Label 2 Display Type
Label Display Size
18 180mm Display PPI
Label 3 Transceiver Type
Label Transceiver Type
0 10kW X-band DC*
1 10kW X-band AC
2 25kW X-band AC
3 30kW S-band AC
* The 10kW X-Band DC Transceiver is only for masthead installation where the
transceiver is mounted as an integral part of the Scanner Unit. The other variants can
be used in bulkhead or masthead systems.
Label 4 Antenna Type

Label Antenna Size
4 4ft (X-band)
6 6ft (X-band)
8 8ft (X-band)
9 9ft (S-band)
12 12ft (S-band)
Label 5 Transceiver Location
Label Transceiver Location
M Masthead Transceiver
B Bulkhead Transceiver
Label 6 Display Mounting Arrangement
Label Display Mounting Arrangement
K Kit format for mounting in console
Blank Standard Configuration (Deck standing 340, Desktop 180/250)
Label 7 Monitor Type
Label Monitor Type
FS Flat Panel Display
Blank CRT Monitor
2-4 65800010B
3 Unit Type Numbers

A BridgeMaster E Radar System is configured from among the following unit
types:
• Monitor Unit
• Processor Electronics Unit
• Antenna Unit
• Turning Unit (with or without Integral Transceiver)
• Bulkhead Transceiver Unit
• Scanner Control Unit (S-Band)
• Interswitch Unit
• Interface Unit
3.1 Monitor Unit
The Monitor Unit type number consists of a five-figure number (e.g. 65826)
followed by a single letter suffix (e.g. L). A typical complete Monitor Unit
Type Number may therefore be: 65826L. A further breakdown of the
number is as follows.
658 26 L
Radar Identifier Label 1
Screen Size Label 2 Label 3 Display Type
Figure 2.2 Monitor Unit label
Label 1 BridgeMaster E Identifier
Fixed as 658
Label 2 Screen Size

Label Diagonal
14 14" (180 CRT)
15 15.1" or 15.4" (180 FPD)
17 18.1" or 19.0" (250 FPD)
19 20.1" (250 FPD)
21 21" (250 CRT)
23 23.1" (340 FPD)
26 29" (340 CRT)
65800010B 2-5
Label 3 Monitor Type
Label Monitor Series Mounting* Resolution Buffered Mains
Video O/P Input†
A 180/250/340 FPD Kit High Yes AC
B 340 FPD Desk High Yes AC
C 180/250 FPD Desk High Yes P
D 180/250 FPD Kit High Yes DC
E 340 FPD Deck High Yes AC
F 180/250 CRT Desk High No P
G 250 FPD Kit High Yes AC
H 250 FPD Kit High Yes DC
K 250 CRT Desk Medium No P
L 340 CRT Deck Medium No P
N 180/250 CRT Kit High No P
P 250/340 CRT Kit Medium No P
R 180/250 CRT Desk High Yes P
V 250 CRT Desk Medium Yes P
W 340 CRT Deck Medium Yes P
Y 180/250 CRT Kit High Yes P
Z 250/340 CRT Kit Medium Yes P
DF 250 Dual CRT Desk High No P
DR 250 Dual CRT Desk High Yes P
*Deck means inclusion in a pedestal mounted display unit.
Kit means a screened monitor module for fitting into a customer specified console.
Desk means inclusion in a desk mounted display unit.
†P The Processor Electronics Unit supplies the Monitor power.
Note – There is an independent On/Off switch for AC and DC monitors.
2-6 65800010B
3.2 Processor Electronics Unit
The type numbers are as follows:
65800 R A X U
Radar Identifier Label 1 Label 5 Man/Machine Interface
Radar Type Label 2 Label 4 Complexity
Label 3 Mains Input - Display and Transceiver
Figure 2.3 Processor Electronics Unit label

Label Radar Identifier
65800 Standard BridgeMaster E Processor
65818 Dual Channel BridgeMaster E Processor
Label 2 Radar Type
Label Radar Type
P Electronic Plotting Aid
T Automatic Tracking Aid
R Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Y ATA with AIS capability
Z ARPA with AIS capability
Label 3 Mains Input for the Display and Monitor
Label Mains Input
A 110/240V AC, 50/60Hz Single Phase
D 24-32V DC
Label 4 Complexity
Label No of Cards* RVAP Compass Type
M 1 No Special
N 1 No Standard
R 2 No Standard
S 3 No Standard
T 2 Yes Standard
V 2 No Special
W 3 No Special
X 2 Yes Special
* The number of cards relates to the number of Processor Cards in the Processor
Electronics Unit. Two card systems consist of a Display Processor card and a Radar
Processor card. Three card systems consist of a Display Processor and two Radar
Processor cards (Dual).
65800010B 2-7
Label 5 Human Machine Interface
Label Pointer Type Keyboard Mounting/Fit* Memory Card†
A Joystick No Desk No
B Trackerball No Desk No
C Joystick Yes Desk No
D Trackerball Yes Desk No
E Joystick No Kit Yes
F Trackerball No Kit Yes
G Joystick Yes Kit Yes
H Trackerball Yes Kit Yes
J Joystick No Desk Yes
K Joystick Yes Desk Yes
L Trackerball Yes Desk Yes
M Joystick No Deck Yes
N Trackerball No Deck Yes
O Joystick Yes Deck Yes
P Trackerball Yes Deck Yes
R Trackerball No Desk Yes
S‡ Joystick No Deck Yes
T‡ Trackerball No Deck Yes
U‡ Joystick No Kit Yes
V‡ Trackerball No Kit Yes
W‡ Joystick Yes Kit Yes
X‡ Trackerball Yes Kit Yes
Y‡ Joystick Yes Deck Yes
Z‡ Trackerball Yes Deck Yes
*Deck means inclusion in pedestal mounted display unit.
Kit means a screened monitor module for fitting into a customer specified console.
Desk means inclusion in a desk mounted display unit.
†Memory card units cannot be fitted to EPA(L) variants.
‡Processors with these labels are now obsolete and have been replaced by others in the
same table.
2-8 65800010B
3.3 Antenna Unit
656 12 A
Fixed as 656
Antenna Unit Type Label 1 Fixed as A
Figure 2.4 Antenna Unit label
Label 1 Antenna Type

Label Radar Type
04 4ft (X-band)
06 6ft (X-band)
08 8ft (X-band)
09 9ft (S-band)
12 12ft (S-band)
65800010B 2-9
3.4 Turning Units and Integral Transceivers
658 10 B A R
Radar Type Label

Label
1 1 Label 5 Azimuth and PM Options
Turning Unit Type Label 2 Label 4 Mains Input – Scanner Motor
Label 3 Transceiver Location
Figure 2.5 Turning Unit and Integral Transceiver label
Fixed as 658
Label 2 Turning Unit Type

Label Turning Unit Type
01 X-band without Transceiver
10 X-band with 10kW Transceiver
25 X-band with 25kW Transceiver
30 S-band with 30kW Transceiver
X-band Turning Units are supplied set to ‘Standard Speed’. Speed changes
are effected by link changes within the unit. S-band Turning Units are
correctly set for their turning speed.
Label 3 Transceiver Location and Type

Label Transceiver Location
B Bulkhead
C Bulkhead with additional facilities
L* Masthead special variant
M Masthead with biased Limiter
N Masthead with additional facilities
P Masthead, 3kHz short pulse variant
R* Masthead special variant
S Pressure tested for lifeboat use.
T Masthead, 3kHz with additional facilities
W Masthead with non-biased Limiter
* These Scanner Units are special naval variants, and are covered in separate manuals.
2-10 65800010B
Label 4 Mains input – Scanner Motor
Label Phases Voltages (V) Frequency (Hz) Speed Band*
A 1 110/240 50/60 S/H X
D DC 24 – 32 0 S X
E 1 110 – 120 50/60 S S
F 1 220 – 240 50/60 S S
G 3 110 – 120 50/60 S S
H 3 220 – 240/380 – 440 50/60 S S
J 1 110 – 120 50 H S
K 1 220 – 240 50 H S
L 3 110 – 120 50 H S
M 3 220 – 240/380 – 440 50 H S
P 1 110 – 120 60 H S
Q 1 220 – 240 60 H S
R 3 110 – 120 60 H S
S 3 220 – 240/380 – 440 60 H S
* For X-band Turning Units the motor is powered from the transceiver. This supply
matches the Processor Electronics Unit supply.
For S-band Turning Units the motor is fed from its own supply via a Scanner Control
Unit and can differ from the Transceiver/Processor Electronics Unit supply.
Label 5 Azimuth and Performance Monitor Options

Label Performance Monitor Synchro/ Synchro
Resolver Type
P No No N/A
R Yes No N/A
S No Synchro CX
T Yes Synchro CX
U No Synchro CDX
V Yes Synchro CDX
W Yes Resolver 11M6P1
X No Resolver 11M6P1
65800010B 2-11
3.5 Bulkhead Transceiver Unit
658 10 B
Radar Type Label

Label
1 1
Transceiver Unit Type Label 2 Label 3 Facilities
Figure 2.6 Bulkhead Transceiver Unit label
Fixed as 658
Label 2 Transceiver Type

Label Transceiver Type
10 10kW X-band
25 25kW X-band
31 30kW S-band
Label 3 Facilities
Label Facilities
A* E Standard with biased limiter
B* F With additional facilities
P* G 3kHz short pulse variant
T* L 3kHz short pulse with additional facilities
W* H Standard non-biased limiter
* X-band Units with these labels are now obsolete, and have been replaced by units with
the label in the adjacent column.
2-12 65800010B
3.6 Scanner Control Unit
65837A H
Radaras
Fixed Type
65837A
Label Label 1 Motor Mains Supply
Rada
Figure 2.7 Scanner Control Unit label
Label 1 Motor Main Supply

Label Phases AC Voltage Antenna Speed
B 3 380/440 Standard
C 3 220/240 Standard
3 380/440 High
E 1 220/240 Either
3 110/120 Standard
3 220/240 High
F 3 110/120 High
H 1 110/120 Either
Scanner Control Units (SCU) are adjusted internally for thermal trip current
and the number of phases (1 or 3).
3.7 Interswitch Unit

Interswitch Type System Configuration
65842A Up to 4 Displays and 2 Top Units
65846A Up to 6 Displays and 6 Top Units
Note – Either Interswitch unit may be mounted on a bulkhead, but only the
65842A can be fitted within the console Pedestal if available.
3.8 Interface Unit

Interface Unit Type Requirement
65847A Depends on system interface, watchdog and alarm
annunciation requirements. Required for AIS input and
high-speed serial Compass input.
65800010B 2-13
4 Configuring a Typical System

The following shows how a typical system is configured using the information
above. The requirement is for S-band ARPA radar with the following
characteristics:
1. Display Unit Deck mounted 23” (340 series) flat panel monitor.
2. Processor Unit Keyboard, Trackerball and Standard Compass
3. Antenna 12ft S-band, standard speed
4. Transceiver Masthead mounting with Performance Monitor
5. Performance Monitor Yes
6. Ship’s Mains Supply 220/240V AC, 50Hz, 1 Phase
The System Identification number for the system specified above would be:
ARPA 34 3 / 12 / M /FS
The individual Type Numbers for the specified units would be:
Monitor Unit 658 23 E
Processor Electronics Unit 65800 R A R P
Antenna 656 12 A
Turning Unit (including Transceiver) 658 30 M F R
Scanner Control Unit 65837A E

Note – The modular method for configuring BridgeMaster E Systems results in a
large number of possible combinations, not all of which are commercially
available. Consult NORTHROP GRUMMAN SPERRY MARINE for full
details.
2-14 65800010B
5 Options and Kits

An Interface Unit (Part No 65847A) is available for use with standard
BridgeMaster E Systems.
250 and 340 pedestal and plinths are available for some systems.
Consult NORTHROP GRUMMAN SPERRY MARINE for further details and

availability of these options.
65800010B 2-15

intentionally
2-16 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Installation
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION
Contents
1 General Information ............................................................................................5

1.1 Preparation ...............................................................................................................5
1.2 Installation Procedure ...............................................................................................5
1.3 Cable Details.............................................................................................................6
1.4 Safety Earthing .......................................................................................................10
1.5 EMC Screening Continuity ......................................................................................10
1.6 Siting .......................................................................................................................10
2 Securing of System Components....................................................................13

2.1 Mains Isolator (Optional Fit)....................................................................................13
2.2 X-band Scanner ......................................................................................................15
2.3 X-band Bulkhead Transceiver.................................................................................33
2.4 S-band Scanner Unit...............................................................................................48
2.5 S-band Bulkhead Transceiver.................................................................................66
2.6 Scanner Control Unit...............................................................................................78
2.7 Display Units ...........................................................................................................82
2.8 Modular Units........................................................................................................101
2.9 Interface Unit.........................................................................................................129
2.10 Isolation Transformer Unit.....................................................................................131
2.11 Despatch Kits........................................................................................................132
2.12 Installation Kits......................................................................................................133
3 System Component Interconnections...........................................................134

3.1 Interconnection Diagrams .....................................................................................134
3.2 Compass Cabling and Link Settings .....................................................................149
3.3 Log Cabling...........................................................................................................152
3.4 Processor Electronics Unit Additional Signals ......................................................152
3.5 Cabling Schedules ................................................................................................155
3.6 System Fuses .......................................................................................................162
65800010B 3-1
Installation Ship’s Manual
Table of Figures
Figure 3.1. Scanner Siting ..................................................................................... 11

Figure 3.2. Minimum angle of Depression ............................................................. 12
Figure 3.3. Dual Scanner Positioning (glare angle) ............................................... 12
Figure 3.4. Isolation Switch Installation ................................................................. 14
Figure 3.5. X-band Scanner 4ft Masthead Tx/Rx Installation ................................ 16
Figure 3.6. X-band Scanner 4ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation ................................. 17
Figure 3.8. X-bancd Scanner 6ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation ............................... 19
Figure 3.10. X-band Scanner 8ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation ................................. 21
Figure 3.11. Fixing the Turning Unit to the Mounting Platform ................................ 22
Figure 3.12. Fixing the Antenna to the Support Casting .......................................... 23
Figure 3.13. Motor Drive Board 65801811 – Showing Link Position ....................... 24
Figure 3.14. Pulse Bearing Board 65801805 – Showing Link Position.................... 26
Figure 3.15. Turning Unit – Input Board Details ...................................................... 27
Figure 3.16. Turning Unit – Mains Input Details ...................................................... 28
Figure 3.17. Turning Unit – Cable Entry Positions.................................................. 30
Figure 3.18. Turning Unit (Bulkhead Transceiver) – Cable Entry Positions............. 31
Figure 3.19. Detailed view of Cable Gland Assembly.............................................. 32
Figure 3.20. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver – Mounting Alternatives....................... 34
Figure 3.21. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver 25kW Installation ................................. 35
Figure 3.22. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver 25kW (later version) Installation .......... 36
Figure 3.23. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (early version) – Cable Input Details ... 37
Figure 3.24. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (later version cast base) – Cable Input
Details ................................................................................................. 38
Figure 3.25. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (earlier version) - Input Board Details.. 39
Figure 3.26. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (later version) – Input Board Details .... 39
Figure 3.27. Cut Jacket ........................................................................................... 41
Figure 3.28. Fit Compression Ring .......................................................................... 42
Figure 3.29. Fit Flare Ring....................................................................................... 42
Figure 3.30. Cut Tabs.............................................................................................. 43
Figure 3.31. Flare End............................................................................................. 43
Figure 3.32. Fit Connector....................................................................................... 44
Figure 3.33. Deck Gland Fixings ............................................................................. 45
Figure 3.34. Deck Gland Details.............................................................................. 45
Figure 3.35. Waveguide Support Details ................................................................. 47
Figure 3.36. S-Band Scanner 9ft Masthead Tx/Rx 30kW Installation...................... 49
Figure 3.37. S-Band Scanner 12ft Masthead Tx/Rx 30kW Installation .................... 50
Figure 3.38. S-Band 9ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation ............................................... 51
Figure 3.39. S-Band Scanner 12ft Tx/Rx Installation............................................... 52
Figure 3.40. S-Band Turning Unit Cable Installation ............................................... 53
Figure 3.41. Attachment of Lifting Eyebolts ............................................................. 54
Figure 3.42. Fixing the Turning Unit to the Mounting Platform ................................ 55
Figure 3.43. Fixing the Support Casting to the Torque Tube................................... 55
Figure 3.44. Fixing the Antenna to the Support Casting .......................................... 56
Figure 3.45. Turning Unit – Cable Entry Locations .................................................. 57
Figure 3.46. Turning Unit – Input Board and Mains Input Details ............................ 58
Figure 3.47. Dual Voltage Single Phase Motor Connections................................... 61
3-2 65800010B
Figure 3.48. Dual Voltage 3 Phase Motor Configuration..........................................62
Figure 3.49. General View of the Cable Glands.......................................................63
Figure 3.50. Detailed view of a Cable Gland............................................................64
Figure 3.51. Cable Installation Details .....................................................................65
Figure 3.52. S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver 30kW Installation .................................67
Figure 3.53. Bulkhead Transceiver – Mounting Alternatives ....................................68
Figure 3.54. Bulkhead Transceiver – Cable -Input Details .......................................69
Figure 3.55. Bulkhead Transceiver – Input Board Details ........................................70
Figure 3.56. Preparing the Cable .............................................................................71
Figure 3.57. Second Jacket Cut...............................................................................72
Figure 3.58. Installing the Gasket ............................................................................72
Figure 3.59. Adding the Clamping Nut and Cutting the Cable..................................73
Figure 3.60. Detaching Foam and Removing Burrs .................................................73
Figure 3.61. Enlarged Cutaway View.......................................................................74
Figure 3.62. Installing the Inner Connector ..............................................................74
Figure 3.63. Installing the Outer Body......................................................................75
Figure 3.64. Deck Gland Details ..............................................................................76
Figure 3.65. Cable Support Details ..........................................................................77
Figure 3.66. Scanner Control Unit – Internal Layout ................................................79
Figure 3.67. Scanner Control Unit Installation..........................................................80
Figure 3.68. Scanner Control Unit – Single Phase Supply Arrangement .................81
Figure 3.69. Scanner Control Unit – Three-Phase Supply Arrangement .................81
Figure 3.70. 180 Display Unit (CRT) Outline Drawing..............................................83
Figure 3.71. 180 Display Unit (CRT with Keyboard) Outline Drawing ......................84
Figure 3.72. 180 Display Unit (FPD) Outline Drawing..............................................85
Figure 3.74. 250 Display Unit (CRT) Outline Drawing..............................................87
Figure 3.75. 250 Display Unit (CRT with Keyboard) Outline Drawing ......................88
Figure 3.76. 250 Display Unit (CRT with Pedestal) Outline Drawing .......................89
Figure 3.77. 250 Display Unit (CRT with Pedestal) Outline Drawing .......................90
Figure 3.80. 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT) Outline Drawing..............................93
Figure 3.81. 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT with Keyboard) Outline Drawing ......94
Figure 3.82. 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT with Pedestal) Outline Drawing .......95
Figure 3.84. 340 Display Unit (FPD with Pedestal) Outline Drawing........................97
Figure 3.85. 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (CRT with extruded tray) Outline
Drawing................................................................................................98
Figure 3.86. 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (CRT with moulded tray) Outline
Drawing................................................................................................99
Figure 3.87. 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (FPD with moulded tray) Outline
Drawing..............................................................................................100
Figure 3.88. Processor Module Outline Drawing....................................................102
Figure 3.89. Processor Module (for VT cabinet) Outline Drawing ..........................103
Figure 3.90. Extended Processor Module Outline Drawing ...................................104
Figure 3.91. 180 Monitor Module (CRT) Outline Drawing ......................................106
Figure 3.92. 180 Monitor Module (FPD) Outline Drawing ......................................107
Figure 3.93. 250 Monitor Module (CRT) Outline Drawing ......................................108
Figure 3.94. 250 Monitor Module (FPD 18”) Outline Drawing ................................109
65800010B 3-3
Figure 3.97. 340 Monitor Module (FPD) Outline Drawing...................................... 112

Figure 3.98. 340 Monitor Module (CRT) Outline Drawing (Sheet 1 of 5) ............... 113
Figure 3.103. Keyboard Module Outline Drawing.................................................... 119
Figure 3.104. ON/OFF Switch Module Outline Drawing .......................................... 120
Figure 3.105. Joystick Module Outline Drawing (154mm version)........................... 121
Figure 3.106. Joystick Module Outline Drawing (170mm version)........................... 122
Figure 3.107. Trackerball Module Outline Drawing (154mm version)...................... 123
Figure 3.108. Trackerball Module Outline Drawing (170mm version)...................... 124
Figure 3.109. Memory Card Module Outline Drawing (154mm version).................. 125
Figure 3.110. Memory Card Module Outline Drawing (170mm version).................. 126
Figure 3.111. Brilliance Control Module Outline Drawing (163mm version) ............ 127
Figure 3.112. Brilliance Control Module Outline Drawing (73mm version) .............. 128
Figure 3.113. Interface Unit Installation ................................................................... 130
Figure 3.114. Isolation Transformer Unit Installation ............................................... 131
Figure 3.115. BridgeMaster E X-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling............................. 135
Figure 3.116. BridgeMaster E X-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling ............................. 136
Figure 3.117. BridgeMaster E S-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling............................. 137
Figure 3.118. BridgeMaster E S-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling ............................. 138
Figure 3.119. BridgeMaster E Dual Radar S-Band and X-Band Masthead Tx/Rx
Cabling .............................................................................................. 139
Figure 3.120. BridgeMaster E Dual Radar S-Band and X-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx
Cabling .............................................................................................. 140
Figure 3.121. Processor Electronics Unit Rear Panel/Interface Connections.......... 141
Figure 3.122. Extended Processor Electronics Unit Rear Panel Connections......... 142
Figure 3.123. Kit Processor Electronics Unit Front Panel Connections ................... 143
Figure 3.124. Monitor Unit Connections .................................................................. 144
Figure 3.125. Desk Mounted Display Unit Inter-Unit Cabling .................................. 145
Figure 3.126. Kit Display Unit Inter-Module Cabling................................................ 146
Figure 3.127. Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit (CRT) Inter-Unit Cabling................. 147
Figure 3.128. Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit (FPD) Inter-Unit Cabling ................. 148
Figure 3.129. Standard Compass Interface PCB .................................................... 150
Figure 3.130. Special Compass Interface PCB ....................................................... 151
3-4 65800010B
1 General Information
The Installation Engineer is responsible for providing the work needed for the
installation and that the Contractor completes the work.
1.1 Preparation
Preparation for installation is as follows:
1. If necessary, the structure of the ship should be strengthened to support
the components of the system
2. The provision and fitting of mounting facilities for the components of the
system
3. The provision of power supplies terminated by a switch-fuse box. The
Installation Engineer will specify the voltage level and current rating of
the supplies.
4. The provision and installation of cable trays, battens and/or conduits for
the interconnecting cables of the system
5. When a mast is to be mounted on a wooden deck, earth leads or strips
are to be provided for connection to the mast
1.2 Installation Procedure
The Installation comprises the following operations:
1. The Contractor will install the mast. If required, the Contractor will
provide and install adjustable stays for the mast, and take suitable
precautions to minimise vibration.
2. The unpacking and external inspection of the components of the system
3. The installation of the Scanner Unit of the system
4. If required, installation of waveguide brackets and/or deck glands
5. The installation of the other components of the system
6. Planning and laying of cables
Note – If a bulkhead transceiver is to be installed, a mounting pad is to be
provided.
65800010B 3-5
1.3 Cable Details

Refer to the Cabling Schedules section below for details of cables and
related terminations. Inter-unit cabling diagrams are given in Section 3. For
details of the X-band RF waveguide, RF termination and installation see
Section 2.3.2. Details of the S-band coaxial RF Feeder are given in
Section 2.5.2.
1.3.1 Supply Cables
Consider the following points to determine the physical size of the cable
used to connect the AC or DC supply of the ship to the radar:
a. The voltage drop from the supply to the radar must not exceed 2% of
the supply voltage
b. The current required by the radar must not exceed the current rating of
the cable
If the system is to be supplied by a three-phase supply, the system must be
connected between two of the three phase lines. If it is a high voltage
supply, an isolating transformer must be provided to reduce the voltage to
220/240V at the system input.
Note – S-band Turning Unit motors are fed directly from the AC supply via
the appropriate Scanner Control Unit (SCU) – see Section 2.6 in
this chapter for details of the SCU.
In a DC powered system, the physical size of the cable used to connect the
DC supply should be chosen to achieve the minimum input voltage
requirement of 21.6V without exceeding the maximum current rating of the
cable, our recommendation for the processor and masthead transceiver is
37-3-4R (MA00014209). This cable cannot be used for DC Flat Panel
Monitors, a cable capable of carrying 5 Amps only is required.
1.3.2 Power Consumption
The power consumption of the radar is given in Chapter 1 of the Technical
Specification for the radar.
1.3.3 Switch Fuses
The radar is connected to the power supply of the ship via two Switch
Fuses. The Switch Fuses are not supplied with the radar, and are therefore
of local manufacture. The fuse ratings of the Switch Fuses are given in
Section 3.6 of this Chapter.
1.3.4 Control Cables
The control cables detailed on the Inter-Unit Cabling diagrams may be used
up to a maximum length of 180m, unless otherwise stated. (A connector kit
is available for cable lengths from 180m to 300m where special cable is
required.)
The DATA cable (Service Code MA00007419) conforms to UL Type CL2,
AWM 2919 and CSA PCC FT4.
The other multi-core cables conform to IEC 92/3 and DEF STAN 61-12
Part 5.
3-6 65800010B
The LSZH (low smoke zero halogen) cables follow the construction of DEF
STAN 61-12 Part 5 but utilise polyethylene insulation over the cores instead
of PVC.
The cables are multicore stranded or bunched, and have tinned copper wire
conductors.
Each conductor is insulated with PVC to form cores. The cores are
screened with braided tinned copper wire, and the complete cable is
sheathed with PVC. The temperature range of the cables is -25°C to
+70°C.
Ref Service Cable Number Core Resistance Current Voltage
Code Diameter of Cores Strands/ per 1000m Rating (RMS)
Diameter (at 20°C)
mm mm Ω A V
16-2-2C 3218376 6.9 2 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
16-2-4C 3209342 7.7 4 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
16-2-6C 3211274 8.7 6 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
16-2-12C 3211266 11.0 12 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
37-3-2R 3228207 10.3 2 37/0.32 6.79 13 440
37-3-4R 3214044 11.8 4 37/0.32 6.79 13 440
- MA00007419 8.4 4 pairs 7/0.2 - - 30
PT1YM 3236862 6 1 1X0.6 95
FSJ1-75 MA00012534 7.4 1 49.2
FSJ4-75A MA00012880 13.2 1 1X3 4.9
Note – PT1YM characteristic impedance is 75Ω, and is double screened;
each screen provides 95% coverage.
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) Alternatives to Standard Cables
Ref Service Cable Number Core Resistance Current Voltage
Code Diameter of Strands/ per 1000m Rating (RMS)
Cores Diameter (at 20°C)
mm mm Ω A V
16-2-2C MA00014100 6.9 2 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
16-2-4C MA00014167 7.7 4 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
16-2-6C MA00014175 8.7 6 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
16-2-12C MA00014183 11.0 12 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440
37-3-2R MA00014191 10.3 2 37/0.32 6.79 13 440
37-3-4R MA00014209 11.8 4 37/0.32 6.79 13 440
- MA00014126 8.4 4 pairs 7/0.2 - - 30
PT1YM 91005248 6 1 1X0.6 95
FSJ1RN-75A MA00014142 7.4 1 49.2
FSJ4RN-75A MA00016089 13.2 1 1X3 4.9
Note – 91005248 characteristic impedance is 75Ω, and is double screened;
each screen provides 95% coverage.
65800010B 3-7
1.3.5 Cable Core colour Coding

a) Multicore Cables
R Red BN Brown
B Blue V Violet
G Green O Orange
Y Yellow P Pink
W White L/G Light Green
BK Black GY Grey
b) DATA Cable (four twisted pairs)
B/W Blue/White BN/W Brown/White Twisted Pair

Twisted Pair
W/B White/Blue W/BN White/Brown
G/W Green/White O/W Orange/White Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
W/G White/Green W/O White/Orange
Note – Blue/White is predominately blue with a narrow white trace;
White/Blue is predominately white with a narrow blue trace and
similarly with the other pairs.
c) DATA Cable (four twisted pairs) Low Smoke Zero Halogen alternative
B Blue W White Twisted Pair

Twisted Pair
BK Black BK Black
G Green R Red Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
BK Black BK Black
3-8 65800010B
1.3.6 Coaxial Cables
Signal Coaxial Cables
The coaxial signal cables detailed on the Inter-Unit Cabling diagrams may
be used up to a maximum length of 300m depending on the type of cable
chosen. These cables are double screened, and have a nominal
impedance of 75Ω. Braiding is made from tinned copper to reduce corrosion
problems.
Cable Nominal Attenuation
Service
Diameter Impedance at 10MHz Comments
Code
mm Ω dB/100m
Double screened, with
Mylar insulation between
3236862
6.0 75 3.9 screen (PT1YM), for use
91005248
with cable runs not
exceeding 67m
Low loss, copper clad
steel inner, solid copper
MA00012534
7.4 75 1.87 screen, for use with
MA00014142
cable runs not exceeding
180m
Ultra low loss, solid
copper inner, solid
MA00012880
13.2 75 0.96 copper screen, for use
MA00016089
with cable runs not
exceeding 300m.
S-band Coaxial Cable
This is a ⅞” foam dielectric RF feeder cable. The cable has a minimum
bend radius of 250mm (10”) and may be used up to a maximum
recommended length of 30m. Longer lengths may be used at the owner’s
discretion but performance will be significantly degraded for lengths over
30m.
Cable Nominal Attenuation
Service
Diameter Impedance at 3GHz Comments
Code
mm Ω dB/100m
9648577 28 50 8.31 Andrew Type LDF-50A
1.3.7 X-band Elliptical Waveguide
This is a 33.5 x 22.9mm corrugated elliptical waveguide. The waveguide
has a minimum bend radius of 200mm in the ‘H’ plane, and 480mm in the
‘E’ plane, and may be used up to a maximum recommended length of 30m.
Longer lengths may be used at the owner’s discretion but performance will
be significantly degraded for lengths over 30m.
Waveguide Attenuation
Service
Size at 9.4GHz Comments
Code
mm dB/100m
9037748 33.5 x 22.9 9.96 Andrew Type EW85
65800010B 3-9
1.4 Safety Earthing

All company equipment with internal voltages greater than 50V ac (RMS),
and contained in a protective metal chassis, must have the chassis
connected directly to earth. This is to protect against the chassis becoming
live under fault conditions. The earth link should be made by connecting a
low resistance conductor between the equipment’s 6mm stainless steel
safety earth stud (marked with ) and the main ship’s earth.
Particular attention should be paid to protecting the connections from both
environmental and electro-chemical corrosion. Before assembly, it is
essential to ensure that the contact areas are oxide-free and that they are
coated with a thin layer of conducting paste to seal the joints The most
suitable materials for making connections between the equipment’s earthing
bolt and the ship’s earth are aluminium or tinned copper straps that provide a
large contact area.
If an aluminium strap is connected to a ship’s stainless steel earth, a zinc-
plated washer should be used between the strap and the ship’s earth.
If a tinned copper strap is connected to a ship’s aluminium earth, an
aluminium washer (rather than steel) should be used between the strap and
the ship’s earth.
The method of connecting the bonding straps together is very important. The
connections must be made from each piece of equipment to the ship’s earth
not looped from unit to unit. No other connection must be made to the earth
bolt to ensure that this is a non-current carrying connection.
The safety earth should never be removed during normal use or servicing. It
is only safe to remove it once the equipment has been isolated from all
external power sources.
1.5 EMC Screening Continuity
The object of EMC screening is to restrict the emission of electro-magnetic
energy from the equipment, and to reduce its susceptibility to external
electro-magnetic influence. Individual items of equipment are EMC screened
by their protective chassis, but they generally require that this screening is
extended to cover both input and output connections and cabling, to maintain
overall electro-magnetic efficiency. To this end, particular attention should be
paid to the bonding of the braids of interconnecting cables where indicated in
the appropriate cable schedules.
1.6 Siting
The performance of the system is dependent on the correct siting of the
system Scanner Unit (Turning Unit and Antenna). Scanner Unit siting must
consider the following:
1. Compass safe distance
2. Satisfactory short and long-range performance of the radar
3. Protection of the equipment (cables and waveguide if applicable) from
damage
4. Ease of access for safe servicing
3-10 65800010B
5. Minimum practical length of waveguide or S-band coaxial cable, if
applicable
6. Freedom from blind arcs and false echoes, particularly on the starboard
side of the vessel, as own ship generally has to give way to vessels
approaching from this direction. Port side visibility is also extremely
important for monitoring approaching vessels, as these normally pass
own ship on the port side. This is particularly important for vessels that
navigate in narrow channels or canals.
Ship features, which commonly obstruct the radar beam, are funnels,
masts, Samson posts and crosstrees. A funnel usually throws a shadow
aft, which may or may not be considered serious. However, it is a
probable source of false echoes aft. Shadows thrown by Samson posts
and masts will vary in extent with their size and proximity to the
scanner.
If there are obstacles around the selected site, it may be necessary to

position the scanner towards the starboard side of the vessel
(Figure 3.1 identifies this as position B). In this example, position B
gives the antenna an unobstructed area for direction of traffic on
ownship’s starboard side. In practice, in the direction of the ship’s bow,
often a mast or crane can reflect or suppress signals transmitted from
the antenna.
Dead angle of B
Position A A
MAST C
Dead angle of
Position B
Figure 3.1. Scanner Siting
This type of obstruction can cause the system to display large false
returns on the display and/or fail to detect target returns within a certain
dead angle. On ARPA systems, this may also cause the radar to lose
automatically tracked targets that move into such an area. If the
obstacle is such that it forms a significant obstruction, the scanner
height may have to be changed to ensure that the angle of depression
is a minimum of 5 degrees (see Figure 3.2)
The scanner must be installed only as high as is necessary to clear

major objects. It must also be borne in mind that when the scanner
height is minimised the short-range performance is improved along with
the effects of sea clutter. Therefore, position the scanner high enough
to secure 5 degrees or greater angle of depression. The angle is
measured between the horizontal line drawn from the antenna and the
top of the mast or obstacle.
65800010B 3-11
>5˚
Figure 3.2. Minimum angle of Depression
7. Interference from an adjacent radar antenna: the vertical separation

between antennas should be as large as practicable. As a minimum,
the glaring angle between antennas should be less than 45°
(see Figure 3.3).
Glare angle should

not exceed 45˚
Figure 3.3. Dual Scanner Positioning (glare angle)
8. Local wind effect due to ship’s structure

9. Local vibration environment
The site and method of mounting the below-decks equipment should be
chosen to comply, as far as possible, with the wishes of the owner or master
of the vessel. The following points should also be considered:
1. Compass safe distance
2. Ease of access for servicing
3. Positioning to avoid the ingress of moisture
4. Positioning away from doors or ports that are frequently used
5. Positioning to minimise accidental damage
6. Environmental considerations such as; adequate ventilation, dust, dirt,
clean air
7. Position the display unit away from strong magnetic fields
8. Position the display screen away from direct sunlight
9. Local vibration environment
3-12 65800010B
2 Securing of System Components

2.1 Mains Isolator (Optional Fit)
It is good practice to include Mains Isolator Switches Type 65800700 in the
system wiring of AC powered systems. Its function is to enable the Scanner
Unit (with the exception of the Motor Supply in S-band systems) and the
Processor Unit (and Monitor) to be isolated from the ship’s mains supply. In
S-band systems, the Scanner Unit Motor Supply is isolated separately via the
Scanner Control Unit. From a safety standpoint, the Mains Isolator should be
mounted adjacent to the SCU so that the S-band system can be isolated
from a single location. If required, the Mains Isolator may be locked in the
OFF position by means of a suitable padlock.
In multiple radar systems, a number of isolating switches may be required.
Note – Refer to System Diagrams and Cabling Schedules (Section 3) for
connection details.
65800010B 3-13
Figure 3.4. Isolation Switch Installation
3-14 65800010B
2.2 X-band Scanner
The Scanner Unit comprises the following main elements, each of which is
supplied in its own packing, together with relevant Installation Drawings:
Turning Unit With/without Masthead Transceiver (10 or 25kW)
Despatch Kit 65801660
(Installation Drawing 65801050)
NB: a Bulkhead system would also be supplied with the following:
Bulkhead Transceiver (10 or 25kW)
(Installation Drawing 65825050 OR 65825055)
Turning Units or Transceivers fitted with additional facilities option are
supplied with a supplementary despatch kit 65825661 in addition to the
above.
Antenna 4ft, 6ft or 8ft
Despatch Kit is supplied in Antenna carton.
Installation of the Scanner Unit entails carrying out the following operations,
preferably in the sequence outlined below:
1. Preparation of the site (see notes at the beginning of this chapter)
2. Bolting the Turning Unit to the mounting platform (ship’s structure) as
detailed in Installation Drawing 65801050 supplied with the Turning Unit
3. Bolting the Antenna to the Support Casting as detailed in Installation
Drawing 65601275 supplied with the Antenna
4. Laying in and installing the cables for the Turning Unit in accordance
with the Cabling Schedules below
5. Ensuring that in the Turning Unit, the Motor Drive Board and the Pulse
Bearing Board are correctly set for the required High or Low Speed
option set via their relevant jumper links
Figure 3.5 to Figure 3.10 also show installation details that are intended to
duplicate those provided with the equipment. However, as changes may
occur to the details that may not be reflected in this manual, the installation
drawings supplied with the equipment take precedence in the event of
differences arising.
Turning Unit
!CAUTION!
The Turning Unit should only be lifted using the four fixing holes at the base
of the unit. The weight and spread of the Antenna can cause a freestanding
Turning Unit to topple over. The Turning Unit should therefore be bolted
down onto its mounting platform before attaching the Antenna to the Turning
Unit. When working on the X-band Turning Unit with the top casting raised,
always make sure the locking bolt or latch on the stay is in the locked
position.
65800010B 3-15
Figure 3.5. X-band Scanner 4ft Masthead Tx/Rx Installation
3-16 65800010B
Figure 3.6. X-band Scanner 4ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation
65800010B 3-17
3-18 65800010B
Figure 3.8. X-bancd Scanner 6ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation
65800010B 3-19
3-20 65800010B
Figure 3.10. X-band Scanner 8ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation
65800010B 3-21
Note – The Turning Unit is bolted to the mounting platform with Neoprene
isolating pads (4 off – 65601251) between the Turning Unit casting
and the mounting platform, to prevent galvanic corrosion. Additional
washers or pads may be added to level the mounting so that the
Turning Unit casting is not subject to twist when the bolts are
tightened. M10 washers may be used as shims, or purpose made
parts produced locally may be used.
Figure 3.11. Fixing the Turning Unit to the Mounting Platform
2.2.1 Support Casting

The Support Casting is factory fitted to the Turning Unit and requires no
further assembly during installation.
2.2.2 Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor comprises the Performance Monitor module, and
an associated control cable. The equipment is normally factory fitted.
3-22 65800010B
2.2.3 Antenna
The Antenna is fitted to the Support Casting using the parts listed below
that are supplied with the antenna. Note that the holes in the support
casting are asymmetrically placed to prevent the antenna being fitted
backwards. The support casting has the letters ‘FRONT’ visible from the
above to aid initial antenna location.
4 off – M8 Stainless Steel Plain Nut (grade 316S16) 4411544
4 off – Washer with locking tab 65602122
Figure Figure 3.12 shows how these are fitted.
Ensure that all threads and bushes are coated with Densopaste.
Note – The lock tab ends must be bent as shown to prevent rotation of the
nuts.
Figure 3.12. Fixing the Antenna to the Support Casting
2.2.4 Turning Unit Link Settings (standard turning units)

Standard Turning Units include the following types:
65801Bxx
65810Mxx, 65810Pxx, 65810Sxx, 65810Wxx
65825Lxx, 65825Mxx, 65825Pxx, 65825Wxx
For link settings on additional features turning units, see Chapter 9
Additional features turning units include the following types:
65801Cxx
65810Nxx, 65810Txx
65825Nxx, 65825Txx
For the standard turning units, two scanner speed settings are available,
‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’, depending on the following settings of the Motor Drive
Board and the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly.
For the additional features turning units fitted with Motor Drive Board
65801827 and Pulse Bearing Board 65801826, there is a third option that
allows remote selection between the two scanner speed settings.
65800010B 3-23
Motor Drive PCB Assembly (65801811)

For Motor Drive PCB Assembly 65801827 (fitted to additional facilities
turning units) see Chapter 9.
Setting link LK1 on the Motor Drive Board 65801811
This link is set during installation and commissioning, and requires no tools
to change.
The factory default setting is ‘NORMAL’ speed. Note that with no jumper
fitted, the rotational speed defaults to HIGH speed.
Under no circumstances should the link position be moved whilst the motor
is running.
With the jumper in the position marked ‘LO’ (pins 1 & 2 – left hand pair), the
nominal scanner speed is 28 RPM.
With the jumper in the position marked ‘HI’ (pins 2 & 3 – right hand pair), the
nominal scanner speed is 45 RPM.
Not fitted on 65801811
LK1 shown fitted 2 - 3
LO
1
LK1
HI
file ref:65801811.dwg
Figure 3.13. Motor Drive Board 65801811 – Showing Link Position
3-24 65800010B
Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly (65801805)
For Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801826 (fitted to additional facilities
turning units) see Chapter 9.
Setting link LK1 on the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801805
Note – This link does not change the rotational speed of the scanner, but
does alter the ability of the phase-locked loop within the board to
track the scanner rotational speed.
The factory default setting is optimised for ‘LOW’ speed.
Note – With no jumper fitted, Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly is optimised for
HIGH speed. Under no circumstances should the link be moved
whilst the motor is running.
Set the jumper in the position marked ‘1’ (pins 1 & 2 – the lower pair) when
the nominal scanner speed is 28 RPM (‘LOW’).
Set the jumper in the upper pair position (pins 2 & 3) when the nominal
scanner speed is 45 RPM (‘HIGH’).
The link is set during installation and commissioning. The link can be
moved with the PCB in place using long nose pliers but the operation is not
easy due to the PCB mounting bracket that tends to obscure the position of
the link.
The recommended method is to loosen the two Pozidriv screws that retain
the mounting bracket and slide the whole assembly to the right using the
slotted screw holes in the mounting bracket. The assembly can then be
brought forward into a more accessible position for the link to be moved.
Take care during removal and refitting of the mounting bracket not to
damage the teeth on the pulse disc assembly that run between
optocouplers mounted on the rear of the Pulse Bearing PCB. Before re-
tightening the two Pozidriv screws, check that both pairs of plain and single
coil washers are above the top surface of the mounting bracket and not
trapped beneath it.
For ease of installation, it is recommended that this operation be carried
out, if required, before mounting the Turning Unit aloft.
65800010B 3-25
Not fitted on 65801805
LK1
Shown fitted 2 - 3
1 LK1
file ref: 65801805.dwg
Figure 3.14. Pulse Bearing Board 65801805 – Showing Link Position
Turning Unit Input PCB Assembly 65801813 (fitted to standard Turning

Units)
For Input PCB Assembly 65801819 (fitted to additional facilities turning
units), see Chapter 9.
The diagram below shows details of the Turning Unit Input Board
65801813. Lifting up the upper casting cover on its hinges after releasing
the four retaining bolts gives access to the unit (see Figure 3.5 to
Figure 3.10). The screening cover can then be removed.
Normal configuration of the PCB links is as follows:
LK1 Not Normally Fitted (deleted from later issue boards)
LK2 Not Normally Fitted (deleted from later issue boards)
LK3 Link Pins 2 & 3 (deleted from later issue boards)
LK4 Link Pins 2 & 3 (deleted from later issue boards)
3-26 65800010B
Figure 3.15. Turning Unit – Input Board Details
Note – The video cable does not plug into the Input Board, but goes
directly to the Receiver. Refer to Section 2.2.6 ‘Fitting the Cable
Glands’ for further details.
Turning Unit Mains Input Connector (Aloft Transceiver)
The diagram below shows details of the Mains Input Connector TSE
(Integral Transceiver only). These are revealed on removal of the support
plate that is retained by four fixing screws (see below). Note that the
screws need only be partially undone before the plate can be slid out.
65800010B 3-27
Figure 3.16. Turning Unit – Mains Input Details
3-28 65800010B
2.2.5 Cabling Information
The table below shows the route by which each cable enters the turning unit
(with or without an integral transceiver). Figure 3.17 shows the cable entry
points. Three of these are via cable glands labelled 1, 2 & 3.
Note – For cable entry details for turning units with additional features, see
Chapter 9.
The RF feeder (waveguide) input is only required when the transceiver is
mounted below decks (bulkhead). The bulkhead lower casting is different
from the masthead variant in the respect that an X-band waveguide flange
is mounted on the underside face. See Figure 3.6, Figure 3.8 or
Figure 3.10 for details.
A 6mm bolt is fitted to enable the unit to be bonded to the ship’s structure.
This must not be used for any other connection.
For details of how to terminate the cables into their connector blocks, see
the Interconnection Diagrams and Cabling Schedules in Section 3.
Each cable gland has a waterproof seal and a separate EMC seal, both of
which must be installed as shown in Figure 3.19.
Details for terminating the RF feeder (waveguide) are given in
Section 2.3.2.
Turning Unit Turning Unit
Cable Gland
without Integral Transceiver with Integral Transceiver
Description Cable Type Description Cable Type
Cable Gland 1 Blanking Plug - Mains Input AC 37-3-2R
Mains Input DC 37-3-4R
Cable Gland 2 PM/Bearing 16-2-12C Blanking Plug -

Cable Gland 2 PM Trigger 75Ω co-ax - -
Cable Gland 2 TU Enable 16-2-2C
Cable Gland 3 Motor 50V 37-3-2R Radar Video 75Ω co-ax

Cable Gland 3 - - Data T/Pairs
RF Connector RF Feed X-band Waveguide - -
65800010B 3-29
Turning Unit for Use with Aloft Transceiver
Turning Unit for Use with Bulkhead Transceiver
Figure 3.17. Turning Unit – Cable Entry Positions
3-30 65800010B
2.2.6 Fitting the Cable Glands
The installation cables are connected into the turning unit via the proper
cable glands (see earlier table). The body of the gland fits through a hole in
the casting and is held in position by the Top Nut. Note the ‘O’ ring seal,
which is fitted below the casting surface (input side). A waterproof seal and
an EMC seal are provided with each gland as shown in Figure 3.18. Some
glands are designed for a single cable; others are intended for several
cables. Unused glands are fitted with a blanking plug. Unused cable entries
are fitted with a sealing pin to maintain the seal integrity.
Figure 3.18. Turning Unit (Bulkhead Transceiver) – Cable Entry Positions
Note – Cable Glands and Blanking Plugs are normally Factory fitted to the
Turning Unit. Later Turning Units for aloft transceivers do not have
three cable gland holes.
65800010B 3-31
CABLE INSTALLATION “X” BAND SCANNER UNIT

The waterproofing seal works by clamping onto the cable PVC sheath
whereas the EMC seal clamps onto the cable braid. It is important not to
force the outer sheath through the EMC seal, as the seal is liable to split.
The braid is also formed into a tail that is grounded by means of an adjacent
earth tag. The fitting procedure is detailed in Figure 3.19.
Figure 3.19. Detailed view of Cable Gland Assembly
To Install the Cables:

Unscrew the gland nut and remove the waterproof seal and the EMC
gasket. Feed the cables through the gland nut and waterproof seal.
For the multicore cables, strip the outer sheath to expose approximately
300mm of braid, and for the video coaxial cable to expose about 1200mm
of braid.
Push the braid back to expose approximately 50mm of the inner cores.
Trim 50mm off the cores, and pull the braid back and twist into a point.
Feed the cable through EMC gasket until it is position as shown above.
For the Multicore Cable:
Flare the braid out to within approximately 15mm of the EMC gasket and
form a tail.
For the Coaxial Cable:
Do not fit the connector at this time.
3-32 65800010B
Assembly into the Scanner Unit:
Feed the assembled cables and seals into the gland body, and tighten the
gland nut to compress the waterproof seal.
Crimp the earth tags provided to the braids of the multicore cables, keeping
them as short as possible. Attach them with the screws provided. Trim and
make off the cable inners to the appropriate connectors.
The video coaxial cable does not plug into SKV on the Input PCB, but is
connected to SKV on the Receiver Assembly.
Sleeve the braid of the coaxial cable with the 6mm sleeving provided.
Route the cable through the slot at the end of the filter box cover, along the
cable loom on the right hand side of the scanner unit. Use cable ties to clip
it to the loom.
Trim to length and fit the coaxial plug.
For systems using below decks transceivers, the Performance Monitor
Trigger coaxial cable is terminated in the same manner but only needs to be
stripped back 200mm as it is plugged into SKP on the input PCB.
2.3 X-band Bulkhead Transceiver
The Bulkhead Transceiver, type 65810A to 65810W (10kW) or 65825A to
65825W (25kW), is installed below decks in a suitable location such as the
ship’s equipment room. The installation should pay due regard to
accessibility for maintenance and servicing, and the distance between the
Transceiver and the Scanner Unit. For maximum performance, this should
be kept as short as practicable, as the loss per metre of the X-band
waveguide is typically 10dB per 100 metres, i.e. 2dB for 20 metres. This loss
applies to both the transmitted RF pulse and the received signals.
The maximum recommended cable length between the Turning Unit and the
Transceiver Unit is 30 metres, and that between the Transceiver and Display
is 67 metres using standard coaxial cable (PT1YM). Greater separation is
possible by using a lower loss cable. Contact Northrop Grumman Sperry
Marine B.V. if greater separation is required. When choosing the installation
location for the Transceiver, due regard must be made for the routing of the
RF Feeder (waveguide).
The Transceiver may be attached to the bulkhead by several methods. The
actual method chosen will depend on individual circumstances, but due
regard must be given to the likely vibration and shock loading which may be
experienced. The available methods include through bolting to the bulkhead,
or mounting on studs provided by the shipyard. Note that slotted mounts are
provided at the bottom for ease of installation.
65800010B 3-33
Figure 3.20. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver – Mounting Alternatives
3-34 65800010B
Figure 3.21. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver 25kW Installation
65800010B 3-35
Figure 3.22. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver 25kW (later version) Installation
3-36 65800010B
Figure 3.23 and Figure 3.24 show details of the cable input. The
Transceiver cover, which is secured by four fixing screws, is shown
removed. Note that a cable retainer retains the coaxial cables. This must
be fitted after the cables are in place. All other cables, with the exception of
the X-band RF feeder (waveguide), are individually clamped on their cable
braids to provide EMC shielding. The braids are also made off as tails and
connected to earth tags provided. The AC mains input is connected to TSE
located underneath the cover plate as shown.
Figure 3.23. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (early version) – Cable Input Details
65800010B 3-37
RF FEEDER CONNECTION
TO SCANNER UNIT
NOTE:
THE VIDEO COAXIAL CABLE
PLUGS DIRECTLY INTO THE
RECEIVER
MAINS INPUT
TSE
FUSE
UNDERSIDE OF
MAINS INPUT
COVER
37-3-2R
6224C (DATA)
MAINS INPUT COVER

16-2-12C
37-3-2R
16-2-2C
16-2-2C
PT1YM
EARTH STUD
CABLE CLAMP
CRIMP TAGS FOR

TERMINATING
CABLE BRAIDS
SKP - PERFORMANCE
MONITOR TRIGGER
COAX. SKJ, SKV, SKH
NOT FITTED ON
STANDARD
FILE REF:65825ECAB.DWG 12/10/04 TRANSCEIVERS.
Figure 3.24. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (later version cast base) – Cable Input Details
3-38 65800010B
Figure 3.25 and Figure 3.26 show details of the Input PCB Assemblies,
65801820 (fitted to earlier units) and 65801814 (fitted to later units). Access
to the board is made by removal of the main Transceiver cover, and the
Filter Box cover. Refer to the cabling schedules in Section 3 for details of
the connections, which are made via the two-part connectors provided.
For additional features transceivers fitted with PCB 65801815 or 65801821,
see Chapter 9.
Configuration for normal operation is by link settings as follows:
LK2 Link pins 2 & 3 LK3 Link pins 2 & 3
The following components are not fitted to this PCB:

PLZK, LK1. LK5, LK7, SKH, SKJ, C6-C12,TSD
Figure 3.25. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (earlier version) - Input Board Details
Figure 3.26. X-band Bulkhead Transceiver (later version) – Input Board Details
65800010B 3-39
2.3.2 Fitting the RF Elliptical Waveguide (X-band)

General Information
1. A 33.5mm x 22.9mm corrugated elliptical waveguide is used for the run
between the Bulkhead Transceiver Unit and the Turning Unit with X-
band radars. The waveguide used is Andrew Antennas Type EW85.
A 12” flexible waveguide (Part No 1189.z, supplied) must be fitted

between the elliptical waveguide and the turning unit.
(Figure 3.27 to Figure 3.31 are reproduced by permission of Andrew

Antennas).
2. Although apparently robust, the waveguide must be protected against
strain and kinking, and must be treated with the utmost care at all times.
The ends of the waveguide must be kept sealed against the ingress of
moisture before the connectors are assembled. The maximum
permissible twist is 3°/metre (39”).
3. Wherever possible, bends should have a great a bending radius as
practicable. A single bend may be made when necessary with a
minimum bending radius (measured from the axis of the waveguide) of
203mm (8in) in the ‘E’ plane, and 482mm (19in) in the ‘H’ plane.
4. For convenience, the upper (Turning Unit) connector can be fitted prior
to installation of the waveguide, (waveguide kits supplied by Sperry
Marine have one connector fitted) but the following precautions must be
taken:
a. Any bend required within 1m (3ft) of the waveguide end must be
formed before carrying out the cutting and assembly procedure
detailed in subsequent paragraphs. Note that no bend may be
nearer than 250mm (10in) from the end of the waveguide.
b. Whenever possible, to allow for movement between the Turning Unit
and mast, a double bend should be formed in the waveguide to
produce an offset immediately below the Turning Unit.
c. The waveguide and assembled connector should be fitted to the
Turning Unit so that a minimum amount of distortion of the
waveguide occurs between the connector and the pre-formed bend.
d. The waveguide should be installed and secured in position (using
the waveguide supports shown in Figure 3.35 as far as is practicable
before the lower (Transceiver Unit) connector is fitted to the
waveguide. The precautions given in subparagraph a above must
be observed if a bend is required adjacent to the Transceiver Unit.
3-40 65800010B
ASSEMBLING THE CONNECTORS
General
5. A straight connector (Type 185BC) is used to terminate the waveguide
at each end.
Tools required
6. The normal tools found in an engineer’s tool kit, a hacksaw (with a fine-
toothed blade) and 1-15/16in open-ended spanner will be sufficient for
fitting the connectors to the waveguide.
Procedure
7. The procedure that follows is applicable to the straight connectors at
each end of the waveguide. Note that it is most important that swarf
and other foreign matter should be prevented from entering the
waveguide.
8. Prepare the waveguide end and assemble the connector as follows:
a. Ensure that the end of the waveguide is straight for at least 250mm
(10in). The ends of the EW85 must be cut squarely. Wrap a
straight edged piece of paper around the waveguide to ensure
squareness, tilt waveguide downwards to prevent copper swarf
entering and then remove a 24mm (15/16in) length of the
polyethylene jacket. Clean the external copper with Comothene (or
Ultraclean) solvent and the interior with a bottlebrush, (see Figure
3.27).
Figure 3.27. Cut Jacket
b. Apply a thin film of silicone grease (MS4 or similar) to the large ‘O’
ring and insert in the internal groove of the clamping nut; apply a
thin film of grease to smooth internal surface of the clamping nut
and slip the nut over the end of the waveguide as shown in Figure
3.27. Wrap several turns of tape around the clamping nut and jacket
to prevent foreign matter from entering.
65800010B 3-41
c. Grease the cut edge of the jacket, slip the chamfered end of the
compression ring over until the recessed edge bottoms against the
jacket (align pin in holes facing away from the jacket) as shown in
Figure 3.28 and.Figure 3.29.
Figure 3.28. Fit Compression Ring
d. Turn the gasket inside out and fit on the end of the waveguide, apply
a thin film of silicone grease to the gasket threads, roll the gasket
over to the correct position and against the compression ring. See
Figure 3.29 and apply a thin film of grease to the outside surface of
the gasket. Clean any grease from the exposed copper with
solvent.
Figure 3.29. Fit Flare Ring
3-42 65800010B
e. Fit the recessed side of the flare ring over the gasket, with alignment
holes of the flare ring and compression ring corresponding. Push
the flare ring firmly against the compression ring (see Figure 3.30).
Figure 3.30. Cut Tabs
f. With tin-snips, cut the bared end of the waveguide into tabs 1/8in
wide and 1/8in deep – as close to the flange as possible, (see
Figure 3.30) Flatten the tabs against the flare ring with a mallet
using minimum force. Heavy blows will reduce the thickness of the
copper, (see Figure 3.31). Trim off any tab protruding beyond the
periphery of the flare ring; clean the tabs with solvent to remove any
silicone grease.
Figure 3.31. Flare End
g. Ensure that the mating RF contact face of the Type 185AC

connector body is clean and thoroughly grease-free. Clean the
inside of the waveguide with a bottlebrush.
h. Fit the smaller ‘O’ ring to the external groove on the connector body
without any grease, (see Figure 3.32). Apply a thin film of grease to
the rear outer surface of the compression ring (so that large ‘O’ ring
in the clamping nut will slide over the compression ring and seat in
the recess).
65800010B 3-43
Figure 3.32. Fit Connector
i. Place the connector body against the flare ring. Insert the alignment
pin in the holes of the flare ring and compression ring. Remove the
tape from the clamping nut, slide it over the rings and screw to the
thread on the connector body.
j. Hold the rectangular part of the connector body with an adjustable
spanner and tighten the clamping nut with 1-15/16in set spanner
across the flats. DO NOT turn the connector body.
Fitting the Deck Gland
9. The EW85 waveguide passes through its own separate deck gland, part
no 9391991 (sks86347/a), positioned near the foot of the mast. The kit
comprises a deck gland, gasket, upper and lower pressure plates, 4 off
m6x25 screws and 4 off split gaskets.
10. After cutting the deck and fitting the flange using suitable fixings (not
supplied – see Figure 3.33), assemble the deck flange split gaskets
(refer to notes) loosely around the waveguide section from below and
slide the assembly upwards into the deck gland (see Figure 3.34).
Secure the waveguide down the mast then tighten the four split gasket
screws carefully. Do not over-tighten the screws. This avoids possible
distortion of the waveguide.
a. Fill the space between the waveguide and deck gland with
hermastic oil-proof compound (see Figure 3.34).
Notes: Split gaskets are to be fitted in alternative positions to ensure that
the split does not line up with the split of adjacent gasket.
Initially, assemble the gaskets loosely before inserting them into

the deck flange (see Figure 3.34). This assembly may be
inverted to allow greater accessibility to the screws.
3-44 65800010B
Figure 3.33. Deck Gland Fixings
Figure 3.34. Deck Gland Details
Note – If cables are not routed via conduit into a deck gland, ensure that
the cable entry hole is fully sealed using a suitable silicone sealant.
65800010B 3-45
Installing the Waveguide

11. Waveguide hangers are supplied (Andrew hanger kit type 42396a-5) for
supporting the waveguide along its run between the scanner unit and
the bulkhead transceiver. Each kit contains 10 hangers. Their
associated support assembly (Andrew type 1116.b) and fixing kit
(Andrew type 31769-1) are included as part of the installation kit.
Normally, a hanger is attached to a cable entry tray using suitable bolts
at the recommended spacing of 0.9 metres (3ft). The support brackets
must be fitted to the hangers to prevent distortion when the hanger is
wrapped around the waveguide as show in Figure 3.35.
12. Figure 3.35 also shows additional hardware (not supplied in the
installation kit) that facilitates special mounting arrangements. If
required, these are obtainable from Andrew Corporation.
3-46 65800010B
Recommended
hanger spacing
Figure 3.35. Waveguide Support Details
65800010B 3-47
2.4 S-band Scanner Unit

The Scanner Unit comprises the following main elements, each of which is
supplied in its own packing, together with relevant Installation Drawings:
Turning Unit With/without Integral Transceiver (30kW)
NB: a Bulkhead system would also be supplied with the following:
Bulkhead transceiver (30kW)
Antenna 12ft or 9ft
Antenna Despatch Kit 65612610

(Installation Drawing 65612050-054)
Installation of the Scanner Unit entails carrying out the following operations,
preferably in the sequence outlined below:
1. Preparation of the site (see notes at the beginning of this chapter).
2. Bolting the Turning Unit to the mounting platform (ship’s structure) as
detailed in Installation Drawing 65830050 supplied with the Turning Unit
3. Bolting the Support Casting to the Turning Unit as detailed in
Installation Drawing 65612050-054 supplied with the Antenna Despatch
Kit
4. Bolting the Antenna to the Support Casting as detailed in Installation
Drawing 65612050-054 supplied with the Antenna Despatch Kit
5. Laying in and installing the cables for the motor and the Turning Unit in
accordance with the Cabling Schedules below
Figure 3.36 to Figure 3.40 also show installation details that are intended to
duplicate those provided with the equipment. However, as changes may
occur to the details that may not be reflected in this manual, the installation
drawings supplied with the equipment take precedence in the event of
differences arising.
Turning Unit
CAUTION
The weight and spread of the Antenna can cause a freestanding Turning
Unit to topple over. The Turning Unit should therefore be bolted down onto
its mounting platform before attaching the Antenna and Support Casting to
the Turning Unit.
3-48 65800010B
Figure 3.36. S-Band Scanner 9ft Masthead Tx/Rx 30kW Installation
65800010B 3-49
Figure 3.37. S-Band Scanner 12ft Masthead Tx/Rx 30kW Installation
3-50 65800010B
Figure 3.38. S-Band 9ft Bulkhead Tx/Rx Installation
65800010B 3-51
Figure 3.39. S-Band Scanner 12ft Tx/Rx Installation
3-52 65800010B
Figure 3.40. S-Band Turning Unit Cable Installation
65800010B 3-53
If it is necessary to lift the Turning Unit by crane, three M12 lifting eyebolts
must first be screwed into the torque tube in the three positions shown in
Figure 3.41. The eyebolts are fitted in a symmetrical pattern in three of the
six holes normally used for attaching the Support Casting to the Turning Unit;
only three of the holes are tapped. Remove the eyebolts after the Turning
Unit has been bolted to the mounting platform. (Reference should be made
to “BS4278 Eyebolts for Lifting Purposes” and the safe use of lifting
equipment in accordance with the Health and Safety Work Act, Part 1
Section 6.)
Note – Under no circumstances should a combined Turning Unit and
Antenna Unit be lifted by the Antenna Unit. To do so would be
dangerous and would result in damage to the Antenna Unit.
Figure 3.41. Attachment of Lifting Eyebolts
The Turning Unit is attached to the mounting platform using the fixings
supplied in the Turning Unit Despatch Kit 65830660.
Figure 3.42 shows how these are fitted. Ensure that all threads and bushes
are coated with Densopaste.
3-54 65800010B
Note – The Turning Unit is bolted directly to the mounting platform without
any intervening washer or pad, except for the purpose of levelling the
mounting so that the Turning Unit casting is not subject to twist when
the bolts are tightened. M16 washers may be used as shims, or
purpose made parts produced locally may be used.
Figure 3.42. Fixing the Turning Unit to the Mounting Platform
2.4.1 Support Casting

The Support Casting is fitted to the Turning Unit torque tube using Fixing Kit
65612611, which is part of the Antenna Despatch Kit 65612610.
Figure 3.43 shows how these are fitted. Ensure that all threads and bushes
are coated with Densopaste.
Figure 3.43. Fixing the Support Casting to the Torque Tube
65800010B 3-55
2.4.2 Antenna
The Antenna is fitted to the Support Casting using the parts listed below
which are supplied with the antenna:
4 off M12 Stainless Steel Prevailing Torque Nuts (grade 316S16)
6 off Spacers
2 off Lock Tabs
Figure 3.44 shows where these are fitted. Ensure that all threads and
bushes are coated with Densopaste. For full fitting instructions see drawing
65830052 supplied with the equipment.
Figure 3.44. Fixing the Antenna to the Support Casting
Note – The lock tab ends must be bent as shown to prevent rotation of the
nuts.
The next step is to mate the S-Band coaxial cable from the Antenna with
the Turning Unit RF connector and to wrap the mated connector with self-
amalgamating tape as an additional precaution against water ingress.
3-56 65800010B
Figure 3.45 shows the cable entry points. Three of these are via cable
glands labelled 1, 2 & 3 details of which are given in the accompanying
table.
The RF cable input is only required when the Transceiver is mounted below
decks (Bulkhead).
The motor supply cable is connected directly to the motor termination
blocks mounted in the box on the side of the motor.
A 6mm stud is fitted to enable the unit to be bonded to the ship’s structure.
This must not be used for any other connection.
Note – Drawing is for turning unit without integral transceiver. Refer to the
table later in this section for details of cable fitted for different
variants.
Figure 3.45. Turning Unit – Cable Entry Locations
65800010B 3-57
The diagrams below show details of the Input Board 65801813 or

(65801819) and the Mains Input connector, (integral transceiver only) TSE.
These are revealed on removal of the cover plate, which is retained by four
fixing screws (see Figure 3.45). Links LK3 and LK4 on the Input Board
should be set as shown in.Figure 3.46 Link LK5 is fitted. Details of the
motor connections are described separately.
Figure 3.46. Turning Unit – Input Board and Mains Input Details
3-58 65800010B
Input Board 65801813 fitted to later units
For earlier units fitted with Input Board 65801804:
LK3 and LK4 should be set in position 2 - 3
LK5 should be fitted (“S” band only)
For Input Board 65801819, see Chapter 9.
The table below shows the route by which each cable enters the Turning
Unit (with or without an Integral Transceiver) for systems with Additional
Features see drawing in Chapter 9. For details of how to terminate the
cables into their connector blocks, see the cabling schedules (Section 3.5)
and system diagrams (Section 3.1).
Each of the cable glands has a waterproof seal and a separate EMC seal,
both of which must be installed as shown in Figure 3.50.
Details of terminating the RF feeder cable (S-Band coaxial) are in
Section 2.5.2.
Turning Unit
Turning Unit
Cable Gland without Integral
with Integral Transceiver
Transceiver
Description Cable Type Description Cable Type
Cable Gland 1 - - Mains Input 37-3-2R
Cable Gland 2 12-Core 16-2-12C - -

Cable Gland 2 PM Trigger 75Ω co-ax - -
Cable Gland 3 - - 2-Core 16-2-2C

Cable Gland 3 - - Radar Video 75 Ω co-ax
Cable Gland 3 - - Data T/Pairs
RF Connector RF Feed S-Band co-ax - -
65800010B 3-59
2.4.4 Motor Connections

Various motor types are available to cater for the different mains supplies
and the standard/high speed antenna rotation rate variants.
The following table gives the available motor alternatives:
Motor Type for Motor Type for
Mains Supply
Standard High Speed
Characteristics
Speed Antenna Antenna
110/120/220/240 Volts,
1φ 91003757 91003759
(50/60 Hz)
110/120 Volts, 3φ
91003752 91003754
(50/60 Hz)
220/240/380/440 Volts,
91003751 91003753
3φ (50/60 Hz)
CAUTION
As can be seen from the table, dual voltage motors are used for both single
and 3 phase supplies. 110-120/220-240 Volts for single phase,
220-240/380-440 Volts for 3 phase. In addition to the wiring up of the mains
supply to these motors, the windings must also be correctly configured for the
appropriate voltage. Incorrect configuration will adversely affect the unit’s
performance – refer to connection details below.
For all motor types, the mains cable must first be fed through the cable
gland on the motor termination box housing. The cable braid must be
connected to the motor chassis, and the individual insulated conductors
connected to the appropriate terminals as detailed for each motor type in
the following section. Ensure that the cable is not under strain in the
termination box area, and that sufficient slack is available to remake the
connection, should this ever be necessary, e.g. if a motor is changed in
service. Also, ensure that the insulated conductors are terminated
appropriately, using ring crimp terminals on threaded studs, or stripping
insulation back by 5mm for screw compression pillars.
Ensure that any gasket fitted for sealing the terminal box cover is correctly
seated when the cover is re-secured.
3-60 65800010B
Single Phase Motor Connections
Make connections according to the label on the inside of the termination
box cover. Ensure that the rated motor volts are matched to the supply. If
the radar antenna rotates in the wrong direction, re-configure the
connections on the motor according to the diagram on the motor housing
(the radar antenna should rotate anti-clockwise when viewed from below).
Dual voltage single phase motors; connection details are shown in Figure
3.47.
There are 6 wires from the motor housing to the terminal block numbered 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 and 8. Connect the wires to the terminal block as detailed in
Figure 3.47 for the required motor supply voltage.
LOW VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE

110/120 V 220/240 V
1,3,8 2,4,5 1 4,5 2,3,8
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
LINE LINE
File Ref: motorcons_A.dwg
Figure 3.47. Dual Voltage Single Phase Motor Connections
Cable Schedule No 166 Motor Label

Description
Reference Reference
TSH1 AC LINE L, L1 or U1
TSH2 AC NEUTRAL N, L2, U2 or V1
65800010B 3-61
Three Phase Motor Connections

For dual voltage motors, ensure that windings are configured for the
appropriate voltage. Delta (triangle) connected windings are for low voltage
operation, Star (Y) for high voltage.
Figure 3.48. Dual Voltage 3 Phase Motor Configuration
The label on the inside of the termination box cover gives details of mains
supply connections, and of the winding re-configuration details for alternate
voltages if appropriate.
Ensure that the rated motor volts are matched to the supply. If the radar
antenna rotates in the wrong direction, reversal of any two phases will
correct this (the radar antenna should rotate anti-clockwise when viewed
from below).
Cable Schedule No 166 Motor Label
Description
Reference Reference
TSH1 AC LINE 1 L1 or U1
TSH2 AC LINE 2 L2 or V1
TSH3 AC LINE 3 L3 or W1
3-62 65800010B
2.4.5 Fitting the Cable Glands
The installation cables are connected into the Turning Unit via the
appropriate cable glands (see earlier table). The body of the gland fits
through a hole in the casting and is held in position by the Top Nut. Note
the ‘O’ ring seal, which is fitted below the casting surface (input side). A
waterproof seal and an EMC seal are provided with each gland as shown
inFigure 3.49. Some glands are designed for a single cable whilst others
are intended for several cables.
Note – Cable Glands and Blanking Plates are normally factory fitted to the
Turning Unit.
Figure 3.49. General View of the Cable Glands
The waterproofing seal works by clamping onto the cable PVC sheath
whereas the EMC seal clamps onto the cable braid. It is important not to
force the outer sheath through the EMC seal, as the seal is liable to
split. The braid is also formed into a tail that is grounded by means of an
adjacent earth tag. The fitting procedure is detailed in Figure 3.51.
65800010B 3-63
Figure 3.50. Detailed view of a Cable Gland
3-64 65800010B
Figure 3.51. Cable Installation Details
Included within the cable gland is a waterproof seal and an EMC seal. The
waterproof seal clamps around the cable outer sheath, and the EMC seal
clamps around the braid. It is important not to force the outer sheath
through the EMC seal as the seal is liable to split.
To install the cables:
Unscrew the gland nut and remove the waterproof seal and the EMC seal.
Feed the cable through the gland nut and the waterproof seal. Strip the
outer sheath to expose approximately 300mm of braid. Push the braid back
to expose approximately 50mm of the inner cores. Trim 50mm off the inner
cores, and pull the braid back over the inner cores and twist into a point.
Feed the braid through the EMC seal until the cable is positioned as in
Figure 3.51.
For the multicore cables:
Flare out the braid to within approximately 15mm of the EMC seal, and form
into a tail.
For the coaxial cables:
Do not fit the coaxial connector at this time.
Assembly into Turning Unit
Feed the assembled cables and seals into the gland body, and tighten the
gland nut until the EMC seal is compressed. Crimp the earth tags provided
to the braids of the multicore cables and attach them to the earth studs
adjacent to the cables. The tails should be as short as is practicable. Trim
and make off the cable inners to the appropriate terminal blocks. Trim the
coaxial cables to length and slide the plastic sleeve provided in the
despatch kit over the exposed braid. Fit the coaxial connectors, and plug
them into the appropriate sockets.
2.4.6 Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor comprises the Antenna, the Performance Monitor
module and an associated cable. The equipment is normally factory fitted.
65800010B 3-65
2.5 S-band Bulkhead Transceiver

The Bulkhead Transceiver, 65831A, is installed below decks in a suitable
location such as the ship’s equipment room. The installation should pay due
regard to accessibility for maintenance and servicing, and the distance
between the Transceiver and the Scanner Unit. For maximum performance,
this should be kept as short as practicable, as the loss per metre of the
S-Band coaxial cable is typically 8.31dB per 100 metres, i.e. 1.7dB for
20 metres. This loss applies to both the transmitted RF pulse and the
received signals.
The maximum recommended cable length between the Turning Unit and the
Transceiver Unit is 30 metres, and that between the Transceiver and Display
is 67 metres using standard coaxial cable (PT1YM). Greater separation is
possible by using a lower loss cable. Contact: Northrop Grumman Sperry
Marine B.V. if greater separation is required.
3-66 65800010B
Figure 3.52. S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver 30kW Installation
65800010B 3-67
The Transceiver may be attached to the bulkhead by several methods. The

actual method chosen will depend on individual circumstances, but due
regard must be given to the likely vibration and shock loading which may be
experienced. The available methods include through bolting to the bulkhead,
or mounting on studs provided by the shipyard.
Note – The positions of the four fixings for the unit are not on a rectangle –
i.e., the horizontal spacing of the top fixings is 364mm compared with
376mm for the lower fixings.
When choosing the installation location for the Transceiver, due

regard must be made for the routing of the RF feeder coaxial cable.
Figure 3.53. Bulkhead Transceiver – Mounting Alternatives
3-68 65800010B
Figure 3.54 below shows details of the cable inputs. The cable cover plate,
which is secured by two fixing screws, is shown removed. Note: a cable
retainer holds the coaxial cables. This must be fitted after the cables are in
place. All other cables, with the exception of the RF feeder S-Band coaxial
cable, are individually clamped on their cable braids to provide emc
shielding. The braids are also made off as tails and connected to earth tags
provided. The ac mains input is connected to TSE as shown.
Figure 3.54. Bulkhead Transceiver – Cable -Input Details
65800010B 3-69
Figure 3.55 shows details of the Input Board, 65801814. Refer to the
cabling schedules for details of the connections, which are made via the two
part connectors provided. Links LK2 and LK3 on the Input Board should be
set as shown. Link LK1 is not fitted. Refer to Chapter 9 for details of PCB
65801815 fitted to additional features transceivers.
Figure 3.55. Bulkhead Transceiver – Input Board Details
2.5.2 Fitting the RF Feeder Cable (S-Band Coaxial Cable)

General Information
1. A radio frequency (RF) coaxial cable is used for the run between the
Bulkhead Transceiver Unit and the Turning Unit with S-Band radars.
The cable used is Andrew Antennas Heliax LDF5-50A 7/8in 50-ohm –
overall diameter 28mm (1.1in).
(Figure 3.56 to Figure 3.63 are reproduced by permission of Andrew
Antennas).
2. Although apparently robust, the cable must be protected against strain
and kinking, and must be treated with the utmost care at all times. The
ends of the cable must be kept sealed against the ingress of moisture
before the connectors are assembled.
3. Wherever possible, bends should have as great a bending radius as
practicable. A single bend may be made when necessary with a
minimum bending radius (measured from the axis of the cable) of
250mm (10in).
4. For convenience, the upper (Turning Unit) connector can be fitted prior
to installation of the cable, but due to the possibility of movement of the
inner conductor relative to the outer conductor, the following precautions
must be taken.
a. Any bend required within 1m (3ft) of the cable end must be formed
before carrying out the cutting and assembly procedure detailed in
subsequent paragraphs. Note that no bend may be nearer that
250mm (10in) from the end of the cable.
3-70 65800010B
b. To allow for movement between the Turning Unit and mast,
whenever possible a double bend should be formed in the cable to
produce an offset immediately below the Turning Unit.
c. The cable and assembled connector should be fitted to the Turning
Unit so that a minimum amount of distortion of the cable occurs
between the connector and the pre-formed bend.
d. The cable should be installed and secured in position (using the
waveguide supports shown in as far as is practicable before the
lower (Transceiver Unit) connector is fitted to the cable. The
precautions given in subparagraph a above must be observed if a
bend is required adjacent to the Transceiver Unit.
ASSEMBLING THE CONNECTORS
General
5. A straight connector (Type L45DM) is used to terminate the feeder cable
at each end.
Tools required
6. The normal tools found in an engineer’s tool kit, a hacksaw (with a fine-
toothed blade) and 1¼in open-ended spanners will be sufficient for
fitting the connectors to the cable.
Procedure
7. The procedure that follows is applicable to the straight connectors at
each end of the feeder cable. Note that it is most important that swarf
and other foreign matter should be prevented from entering the cable.
8. Prepare the cable end and assemble the connector as follows:
a. Ensure that the end of the cable is straight for at least 10in
(250mm). Using a knife, remove approximately 1in of the jacket.
Deburr the sharp end of the cut outer conductor (Figure 3.56).
Figure 3.56. Preparing the Cable
65800010B 3-71
b. Scribe a line on a ridge of the exposed corrugated outer conductor

(Figure 3.57). Using a straight-edged piece of heavy paper,
wrapped around the cable as a cutting guide, remove the jacket to
the dimension shown in Figure 3.57.
Figure 3.57. Second Jacket Cut
c. Clean the outer conductor with solvent and then add the small thick
‘O’ ring gasket to the second fully exposed corrugation groove from
the jacket (see Figure 3.58). Apply a thin coating of silicone grease
to the outer surface of the gasket and the gasket lead chamfer in
the clamping nut, using the fingertip.
Figure 3.58. Installing the Gasket
3-72 65800010B
d. Push the clamping nut onto the cable, using a twisting motion to
ensure that the spring contacts snap into the first groove (see
cutaway view in Figure 3.59). Grip the clamping nut with one hand
and align the edge with the scribed line. Using a hacksaw with a
fine-toothed blade, carefully cut the cable flush with the end of the
clamping nut (see Figure 3.59).
Figure 3.59. Adding the Clamping Nut and Cutting the Cable
e. Using the tip of a knife, work around the entire circumference

separating all foam completely from the edge of the outer
conductor. This is to ensure a good electrical contact between the
outer conductor and the outer body of the connector. (See the
enlarged cutaway view in Figure 3.60 that (at the arrow) shows the
eventual positive grip of the outer conductor between the clamping
nut and the outer body of the connector).
f. Use a knife to remove all burrs from the inside edges of the outer
and inner conductors. Use a wire brush or scraper to remove all
copper particles from the foam (see Figure 3.60).
Figure 3.60. Detaching Foam and Removing Burrs
65800010B 3-73
g. Screw the outer body on to the clamping nut and tighten with the
1¼in spanners. Hold the clamping nut and turn the connector
outer body; do not turn the clamping nut. Unscrew and remove the
outer connector body and inspect the end of the outer conductor
for good metal-to-metal contact (see Figure 3.61).
Figure 3.61. Enlarged Cutaway View
h. Place a ‘pin’ through the hole in the self-tapping inner connector

(see Figure 3.62) and use it as a ‘tommy bar’ to tap the connector
into the inner conductor. To aid tapping, use a small amount of
solvent as a lubricant. If tapping becomes difficult, ‘back off’ the
inner connector after every few turns. Tap until the inner connector
‘bottoms’ against the inner conductor and then tighten. Remove
the ‘pin’ from the inner connector.
Figure 3.62. Installing the Inner Connector
3-74 65800010B
i. Place the large thin ‘O’ ring in the gasket groove in the clamping
nut (see Figure 3.63) and coat the outer surface of the gasket
lightly with silicone grease. Screw the outer body of the connector
onto the clamping nut and tighten with spanners. Turn the outer
body only; do not turn the clamping nut.
Figure 3.63. Installing the Outer Body
FITTING THE DECK GLAND

9. The ⅞in RF feeder cable passes through its own separate deck gland
(Andrew Feed-Thru Kit Type 40656-1), positioned near the foot of the
mast. The gland kit comprises a rubber boot, metal flange halves, eight
Lock-o-seal washers and an adjustable clamp (Jubilee clip). In addition,
eight ¼in bolts (of suitable length), flat washers, lock washers and nuts
will be required. (See Figure 3.64).
10. To fit the deck gland proceed as follows:
a. Cut a 75mm (3in) diameter hole in the deck and, having installed
and secured the cable from the Turning Unit downwards, pass the
Transceiver Unit end down through the hole.
b. Apply silicone grease to the hole and to the slit and tapered edge of
the rubber boot.
c. Place the boot around the feeder, slide the boot down into the hole
in the deck and then mark the location of the eight holes for the
fixing bolts.
d. Withdraw the boot from the hole and drill eight 8mm (5/16in)
mounting holes through the deck.
e. Slide the boot back into the hole in the deck and position the flange
halves in the groove in the boot.
f. Align the flange holes with the boot holes and secure the assembly
in position with eight ¼in bolts, flat washers, lock washers and nuts,
together with the Lock-o-seal washers provided in the gland kit.
Note that the bolts are inserted downwards and that the Lock-o-seal
washers only go under the bolt heads.
g. Fit the adjustable clamp (Jubilee clip) around the boot and tighten to
ensure a leak proof seal.
65800010B 3-75
Figure 3.64. Deck Gland Details
INSTALLING THE CABLE

11. Cable Hangers are supplied (Andrew Hanger Kit Type 42396A-5) to
support the cable along the cable run between the Scanner Unit and the
Bulkhead Transceiver. Each kit contains 10 Hangers. Their associated
Fixing Kit (Andrew Type 31769-1) is included as part of the Installation
Kit. Normally, a hanger is attached to a cable tray, using suitable bolts,
at a recommended spacing of 0.9 metres (3 feet). The support brackets
must be fitted to the hangers to prevent distortion when the hanger is
wrapped around the coaxial cable as shown in Figure 3.65.
12. Figure 3.65 also shows additional hardware (not supplied in the
Installation Kit) that facilitates special mounting arrangements. If
required, these are obtainable from Andrew Corporation.
3-76 65800010B
Figure 3.65. Cable Support Details
65800010B 3-77
2.6 Scanner Control Unit

Single Phase (1φ) or Three Phase (3φ) Mains Supply Voltage
For single-phase scanner motors refer to Figure 3.68, for three-phase
scanner motors refer to Figure 3.69, and the relevant cabling schedules for
connection details for the Scanner control Unit (SCU).
Mounting Position
The SCU must be mounted in such a position that it allows access by a
service engineer for the isolation of the mains supply to the Turning Unit
motor. For this reason, it is preferable to mount the SCU close to the Mains
Isolator (see below). Normally, the SCU is mounted so that it is accessible to
the radar operator.
Scanner Speed Option
Two scanner speed options, ‘standard’ and ‘high’, are available, depending
on the type of scanner motor. Motor types 91003751, 52, 57 & 58 are
standard speed; 91003753, 54, 59 & 60 are high speed. See Section 0 for
connection details.
Note – The table below defines the Thermal Current Trip settings for each
variant that must be set at the time of installation.
Mains Supply Standard Speed Scanner High Speed Scanner
Voltage 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz
110/120 Volts 8.0A 8.0A 8.0A 8.0A
1φ 65837AH 65837AH 65837AH 65837AH
220/240 Volts 4.0A 4.0A 4.0A 4.0A
1φ 65837AE 65837AE 65837AE 65837AE
110/120 Volts 5.2A 5.2A 6.4A 6.4A
3φ 65837AE 65837AE 65837AF 65837AF
220/240 Volts 2.2A 2.2A 4.0A 4.0A
3φ 65837AC 65837AC 65837AE 65837AE
380/440 Volts 1.3A 1.3A 1.8A 1.8A
3φ 65837AB 65837AB 65837AC 65837AC
3-78 65800010B
CONNECT LINK BETWEEN
1L1 & R FOR THREE PHASE
CONNECT LINK
BETWEEN 1L1
& 4(T2) FOR
SINGLE PHASE
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
1 3 5 13 + R S T N
L1 L2 L3 NO A1
1 0
THE CURRENT TRIP
FIGURES SHOWN ON
THE DIAL WILL DEPEND
CABLE ENTRY POINTS
T1 T2 T3 NO A2 ON THE ACTUAL UNIT

FITTED. FIGURES SHOWN
2 4 6 14 ARE FOR THE 'AA' VARIANT.
THERMAL OVERLOAD
1 PLASTIC COVER
REMOVED FOR
CLARITY
TEST H A
0.8 1.2 R S T N
RESET/STOP
NO NC NO NC
97 95 98 96 INPUT CONNECTIONS
TSA
EARTH
E
CABLE ENTRY POINTS
2(T1) 4(T2) 6(T3)
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS TO MOTOR
EARTH BOLT
Figure 3.66. Scanner Control Unit – Internal Layout
65800010B 3-79
Figure 3.67. Scanner Control Unit Installation
3-80 65800010B
ENSURE THAT THIS
MANUAL ISOLATOR CONTACTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD LINK IS INSTALLED
RELAY
MAINS SUPPLY TO TURNING UNIT MOTOR

1(L1) 2(T1) 1 2(T1) NEUTRAL
MAINS INPUT FROM SHIPS'S SWITCH/FUSE
SA-R SA-R
NEUTRAL SA-S SA-S 3(L2) 4(T2) 3 4(T2)
LINE SA-T SA-T 5(L3) 6(T3) 5 6(T3) LINE
EARTH 13NO 14NO 98 97 NO EARTH E
+12V SA-N SA-N + A1 - A2 96 95 NC

FROM TRANSCEIVER
TSA
TU ENABLE 1
RESET THERMAL TRIP TEST

BUTTON CURRENT SET SWITCH
FILE REF: SCU6_C.DWG
Figure 3.68. Scanner Control Unit – Single Phase Supply Arrangement
Notes: Refer to Cable Schedules for details of connections to the ship’s

supply and the Turning Unit motor.
For Thermal Trip current settings, refer to the table at the start of
Section 2.6.
Cable type 37-3-2R may be used for 220/240V supplies.
MAINS INPUT FROM SHIPS'S SWITCH/FUSE
MAINS SUPPLY TO TURNING UNIT MOTOR

SA-R SA-R 1(L1) 2(T1) 2(T1) LINE 1
SA-S SA-S 3(L2) 4(T2) 3 4(T2) LINE 2
SA-T SA-T 5(L3) 6(T3) 5 6(T3) LINE 3
E 13NO 14NO 98 EARTHE

97 NO
SA N +12V SA-N SA-N + A1 - A2 96 95 NC

12V COIL
FROM TRANSCEIVER
TSA
TSA1 TU ENABLE 1
RESET THERMAL TRIP TEST

BUTTON CURRENT SET SWITCH
FILE REF: SCU5_C.DWG
Figure 3.69. Scanner Control Unit – Three-Phase Supply Arrangement
Notes: Refer to Cable Schedules for details of connections to the ship’s

supply and the Turning Unit motor.
For Thermal Trip current settings, refer to the table at the start of
Section 2.6
65800010B 3-81
2.7 Display Units

Note – In order to assemble display units from their supplied parts, refer to
the documentation supplied with the parts.
Refer to Figure 3.70 and Figure 3.71 for a 180 Display Unit (CRT)
Refer to Figure 3.72 and Figure 3.73 for a 180 Display Unit (FPD)
Refer to Figure 3.74 to Figure 3.77 for a 250 Display Unit (CRT)
Refer to Figure 3.80 to Figure 3.82 for a 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT)
Refer to Figure 3.85 for a 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (CRT with
extruded tray)
Refer to Figure 3.86 for a 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (CRT with
moulded tray)
Refer to Figure 3.87 for a 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (FPD)
2.7.1 Secondary Viewer Output
All display units can be fitted with a secondary viewer output. CRT units can
have a factory fitted output. Alternatively all CRTs can have a secondary
viewer output kit (65800720) fitted.
FPD units are all factory-fitted. However, to gain access to the connector
inside the 180 and 250 desktop monitors, follow these instructions:
1. Remove the bezel and the rear cover.
2. Bend down the tab on the rear of the chassis where the cable will exit.
3. Temporarily plug in the 15pin hi-density D cable into SK3 at the right
side (viewed from the rear) of PCB assembly 658xx891.
4. Dress the cable so it exits through the hole, and mark it where it goes
through the hole
5. Remove the parked grommet from the sidewall.
6. Unplug the cable, and fit the grommet to the cable.
7. Copy the orientation of the grommet to match the other ones fitted.
8. Close the snap grommet onto the cable using large-jawed pliers or a
vice.
9. Insert the cable back into the hole and push the grommet home from
the outside.
10. Make sure the click retainers spring out correctly.
11. Refit the D connector and tighten the jack screws.
12. Refit the rear cover but not the bezel yet.
13. Plug the other end of the cable into the Secondary Viewing unit.
14. Switch the unit on.
15. Re-test the system and adjust the Phase parameter via the menu if
required.
16. Refit the bezel.
3-82 65800010B
Figure 3.70. 180 Display Unit (CRT) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-83
Figure 3.71. 180 Display Unit (CRT with Keyboard) Outline Drawing
3-84 65800010B
Figure 3.72. 180 Display Unit (FPD) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-85
3-86 65800010B
Figure 3.74. 250 Display Unit (CRT) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-87
Figure 3.75. 250 Display Unit (CRT with Keyboard) Outline Drawing
3-88 65800010B
Figure 3.76. 250 Display Unit (CRT with Pedestal) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-89
Figure 3.77. 250 Display Unit (CRT with Pedestal) Outline Drawing
3-90 65800010B
65800010B 3-91
3-92 65800010B
Figure 3.80. 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-93
Figure 3.81. 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT with Keyboard) Outline Drawing
3-94 65800010B
Figure 3.82. 250 Extended Display Unit (CRT with Pedestal) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-95
3-96 65800010B
Figure 3.84. 340 Display Unit (FPD with Pedestal) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-97
Figure 3.85. 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (CRT with extruded tray) Outline Drawing
3-98 65800010B
Figure 3.86. 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (CRT with moulded tray) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-99
Figure 3.87. 340 Deck Mounted Display Unit (FPD with moulded tray) Outline Drawing
3-100 65800010B
2.8 Modular Units
Note – In order to assemble the modules from their supplied parts, refer to
the documentation supplied with the parts.
2.8.1 Processor Modules
Refer to Figure 3.88 and Figure 3.89 for installation of the Standard
Processor
Refer to Figure 3.90 for installation of the Extended Processor
Note – Particular attention should be given to ensuring adequate connector
clearance.
65800010B 3-101
Figure 3.88. Processor Module Outline Drawing
3-102 65800010B
Figure 3.89. Processor Module (for VT cabinet) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-103
Figure 3.90. Extended Processor Module Outline Drawing
3-104 65800010B
2.8.2 Monitor Modules
Refer to Figure 3.91 for a 180 Monitor Module (CRT)
Refer to Figure 3.92 for a 180 Monitor Module (FPD)
Refer to Figure 3.93 for a 250 Monitor Module (CRT)

Refer to Figure 3.94 to Figure 3.96 for a 250 Monitor Module (FPD)
Refer to Figure 3.97 for a 340 Monitor Module (FPD)

Refer to Figure 3.98 to Figure 3.102 for a 340 Monitor Module (CRT)
Refer to Figure 3.124 for information on interconnecting cables required to

connect the Monitor Modules to the Processor Electronics Unit, and to
connect the Brilliance Control Module to the Monitor.
65800010B 3-105
Figure 3.91. 180 Monitor Module (CRT) Outline Drawing
3-106 65800010B
Figure 3.92. 180 Monitor Module (FPD) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-107
Figure 3.93. 250 Monitor Module (CRT) Outline Drawing
3-108 65800010B
Figure 3.94. 250 Monitor Module (FPD 18”) Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-109
3-110 65800010B
65800010B 3-111
Figure 3.97. 340 Monitor Module (FPD) Outline Drawing
3-112 65800010B
Figure 3.98. 340 Monitor Module (CRT) Outline Drawing (Sheet 1 of 5)
65800010B 3-113
3-114 65800010B
65800010B 3-115
3-116 65800010B
65800010B 3-117
2.8.3 Control Panel Modules

The following table shows the figure number of the drawing related to the
installation of a particular module type:
Module Maximum Type Figure
Width (mm) Number Number
Keyboard - 65845600 Figure 3.103
On/Off Switch - 65826656 Figure 3.104
Joystick 154 65826658 Figure 3.105
170 65821620 Figure 3.106
Trackerball 154 65826654 Figure 3.107
170 65821623 Figure 3.108
Memory Card 154 65826655 Figure 3.109
170 65821619 Figure 3.110
Brilliance 163 65826657 Figure 3.111
Control 73 65821621 Figure 3.112
Refer to Figure 3.125 to Figure 3.128 for information on interconnecting
cables required to connect the modules to the Processor Electronics Units.
The 170mm versions of the Joystick, Trackerball and Memory Card are now
supplied as standard. The 154mm versions are the earlier version.
All items required for securing the modules are supplied with the units.
3-118 65800010B
Figure 3.103. Keyboard Module Outline Drawing
65800010B 3-119
Figure 3.104. ON/OFF Switch Module Outline Drawing
3-120 65800010B
Figure 3.105. Joystick Module Outline Drawing (154mm version)
65800010B 3-121
Figure 3.106. Joystick Module Outline Drawing (170mm version)
3-122 65800010B
Figure 3.107. Trackerball Module Outline Drawing (154mm version)
65800010B 3-123
Figure 3.108. Trackerball Module Outline Drawing (170mm version)
3-124 65800010B
Figure 3.109. Memory Card Module Outline Drawing (154mm version)
65800010B 3-125
Figure 3.110. Memory Card Module Outline Drawing (170mm version)
3-126 65800010B
Figure 3.111. Brilliance Control Module Outline Drawing (163mm version)
65800010B 3-127
Figure 3.112. Brilliance Control Module Outline Drawing (73mm version)
3-128 65800010B
2.9 Interface Unit
The Interface Unit, type 65847A, is designed to expand the range of input
and output options available to the standard BridgeMaster E range of
Displays. (These features are built-in as standard on extended displays.)
The unit has three serial inputs with optoisolation, three serial outputs, three
relay outputs and several miscellaneous signals. The three serial inputs (3,
4 & 5) are in addition to the standard two inputs fitted to the Display, and
have the capability of operating at data rates of up to 38.4Kbaud.
All relays provide normally open and normally closed contacts. One relay is
used to start external equipment (or may be used as a power fail indicator).
The second and third relays are called Remote Alarm (ALARM1) and
Vigilance Alarm (ALARM2). The Display software controls the categories of
alarm.
The Interface Unit also has the following miscellaneous signals:
1. Track Data – serial data about Own Ship and tracked targets. (This
output is not available on EPA systems.)
2. Freeze Frame – when grounded, this stops the radar picture updating.
(This function is not implemented on commercial units.)
3. Buzzer+ and Buzzer Return – provides an external repeat of the internal
buzzer
The host Display Unit provides power for the unit via the supplied 2-metre
long interface cable, 65800514.
The Interface Unit is supplied with all items required for installation,
including the Interface Cable 65800514.
This unit does not need configuration or setting up. See Section 3.4 for
information on cabling the Interface Unit.
65800010B 3-129
Figure 3.113. Interface Unit Installation
3-130 65800010B
2.10 Isolation Transformer Unit
Refer to Figure 3.114 for the installation of this unit.
Figure 3.114. Isolation Transformer Unit Installation
65800010B 3-131
2.11 Despatch Kits

In order to assemble the equipment, Despatch Kits, including assembly
instructions, are sent as shown in the following table:
Unit Despatch Kit
Display & Module Units
Desktop Processor 65800660
EPA(L) Desktop Processor 65800664
Kit Processor 65800662
340 Kit Processor for CRT 65826660
340 Deckstand Processor 65827621
Extended Desktop Processor 65818660
Extended kit Processor 65818661
180 Desktop (CRT) 65814608
180 Desktop (FPD) 65815608
180 Kit (CRT) 65814609
250 Desktop (CRT) 65821608
250 Desktop (FPD) 65815608
250 Kit (CRT) 65821609
250 Extended Desktop (CRT) 65822608
340 Desktop (FPD) 65823625
340 Kit (CRT) 65826661
S-Band Systems
Turning Unit 65830660
Antenna Unit 65612610
Bulkhead Transceiver 65831660
X-Band Systems
Turning Unit 65801660
Bulkhead Transceiver 65825660
3-132 65800010B
2.12 Installation Kits
S-Band
There are three Installation Kits for S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver
installations:
• 10 metre S-Band Coaxial Cable Kit Type 112/MIK/10
There are various length Installation Kits common to all S-Band Installations:
• 33 metre S-Band Cable Kit Type 115/MIK/33
X-Band
There are three Installation Kits for X-Band Bulkhead Transceiver
installations:
• 10 metre X-Band Waveguide Kit Type 116/MIK/10
There are various length Installation Kits common to all X-Band Installations:
• 33 metre X-Band Cable Kit Type 119/MIK/33
Connector Kit for Long Cable Runs
In addition to the above installation kits, a special connector kit is available
for installations where cable lengths of up to 300m require the use of low loss
video cable type FSJ4-75.
• Video Connector Kit Type 117/MIK
Most of the above kits can be supplied with LSZH equivalent cables.
65800010B 3-133
3 System Component Interconnections

This section contains information on the interconnection of system components,
any setting up that is required and details of all system fuses.
3.1 Interconnection Diagrams
Figure 3.115 to Figure 3.120 give wiring details of the X-Band and S-Band
systems and typical examples of the Dual Radar systems.
Figure 3.115 – BridgeMaster E X-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling
Figure 3.116 – BridgeMaster E X-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling
Figure 3.117 – BridgeMaster E S-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling
Figure 3.118 – BridgeMaster E S-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling
Figure 3.119 – BridgeMaster E Dual Radar S-Band and X-Band Masthead
Tx/Rx Cabling
Figure 3.120 – BridgeMaster E Dual Radar S-Band and X-Band Bulkhead
Tx/Rx Cabling
Figure 3.121 to Figure 3.128 give interconnection details between the
Processor Unit, the Monitor, the Interface Unit and the Kit Modules.
Figure 3.121 – Processor Electronics Unit Rear Panel/Interface Connections
Figure 3.122 – Extended Radar Processor Electronics Unit Rear Panel
Connections
Figure 3.123 – Kit Processor Electronics Unit Front Panel Connections
Figure 3.124 – Monitor Unit Connections
Figure 3.125 – Desk Mounted Display Unit Inter-Unit Cabling
Figure 3.126 – Kit Display Unit Inter-Module Cabling
Figure 3.127 – Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit (CRT) Inter-Unit Cabling
Figure 3.128 – Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit (FPD) Inter-Unit Cabling
3-134 65800010B
Figure 3.115. BridgeMaster E X-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling
65800010B 3-135
Figure 3.116. BridgeMaster E X-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling
3-136 65800010B
Figure 3.117. BridgeMaster E S-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling
65800010B 3-137
Figure 3.118. BridgeMaster E S-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling
3-138 65800010B
Figure 3.119. BridgeMaster E Dual Radar S-Band and X-Band Masthead Tx/Rx Cabling
65800010B 3-139
Figure 3.120. BridgeMaster E Dual Radar S-Band and X-Band Bulkhead Tx/Rx Cabling
3-140 65800010B
Figure 3.121. Processor Electronics Unit Rear Panel/Interface Connections
65800010B 3-141
Figure 3.122. Extended Processor Electronics Unit Rear Panel Connections
3-142 65800010B
Figure 3.123. Kit Processor Electronics Unit Front Panel Connections
65800010B 3-143
CRT MONITORS
DESKTOP 180/250 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY KIT AND ALL 340 FLAT PANEL DISPLAYS
Figure 3.124. Monitor Unit Connections
3-144 65800010B
Figure 3.125. Desk Mounted Display Unit Inter-Unit Cabling
65800010B 3-145
Figure 3.126. Kit Display Unit Inter-Module Cabling
3-146 65800010B
Figure 3.127. Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit (CRT) Inter-Unit Cabling
65800010B 3-147
Figure 3.128. Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit (FPD) Inter-Unit Cabling
3-148 65800010B
3.2 Compass Cabling and Link Settings
General
Compass cabling and linking information for BridgeMaster E Series Radars is
detailed below for stepper and synchro type compasses.
Note – Details of cabling information for compasses with a serial output are
described in Section 3.4.1 in this chapter. For ARPA and ATA
variants, the serial data must conform to IEC 61162-2 and must be
connected to serial input 3, 4 or 5.
The Compass Interface board is mounted as a daughter board onto the
Display Processor Board in the Processor Electronics Unit.
The type of compass interface board fitted will determine the type of
compass that can be used with the system. Two compass interface boards
are available:
Interface Compass Type Ratio Signal Voltages Impedance
Board
Stepper – S Type 360:1 16-100V DC line-line 10kΩ Min
Standard Stepper – M Type 180:1 8-100V DC line-line return.
65800831 Synchro (50–500Hz) 360:1 16-100V RMS line-line 10kΩ Min
25-165V RMS reference 47kΩ Min
Synchro (50-500Hz) 180:1 9.3-37V RMS line-line 40k to 60kΩ
Special 90:1 32-126V RMS line-line 133k to 200kΩ
65800832 36:1
26-150V RMS reference 100kΩ Min
1:1
At system power up, the Display Processor detects the type of compass
interface board, if any.
During System Initialisation, the compass type must be selected if the
standard compass interface board is fitted, and the number of cycles per
compass revolution (ratio) must be selected if the special compass interface
board is fitted.
65800010B 3-149
Standard Compass Board Links and Interconnections
LK1
LK2
LK3
Figure 3.129. Standard Compass Interface PCB
There are three links on the Standard Compass Board, LK1, LK2 and LK3.
These need only be fitted between the pins if the ‘OFF’ state current from an
‘S’ type stepper compass is too high and causes the board to generate
compass errors, otherwise leave in the parked position as shown in
Figure 3.129 above.
Compasses should be connected in accordance with the following tables:
Stepper Compass
S Type +ve Ref. S Type -ve Ref. M Type
I/O Panel Compass I/O Panel Compass I/O Panel Compass
TSC1┐ TSC1────── S1 TSC1────── S1
TSC2┤Link TSC2────── S2 TSC2────── S2
TSC3┴───── Common TSC3────── S3 TSC3────── S3
Ref. TSC4┬───── Common TSC4┐
TSC4────── S1 Ref. TSC5┤Link
TSC5────── S2 TSC5┤Link TSC6┘
TSC6────── S3 TSC6┘ TSC7 (no connection)
TSC7 (no connection) TSC7 (no connection) TSC8 (no connection)
TSC10 (no connection) TSC10 (no connection)
Synchro Compass
Ref. Below 61V RMS Ref. 61V - 115V RMS Ref. Above 115V RMS
I/O Panel Compass I/O Panel Compass I/O Panel Compass
TSC1────── S1 TSC1────── S1 TSC1────── S1
TSC2────── S2 TSC2────── S2 TSC2────── S2
TSC3────── S3 TSC3────── S3 TSC3────── S3
TSC4┐ TSC4┐ TSC4┐
TSC5┤Link TSC5┤Link TSC5┤Link
TSC6┘ TSC6┘ TSC6┘
TSC7────── Synchro TSC7 (no connection) TSC7 (no connection)
Ref. TSC8────── Synchro Ref. TSC8 (no connection)
TSC8 (no connection) TSC9 (no connection) TSC9────── Synchro Ref.
TSC9 (no connection) TSC10───── Ref. Return TSC10───── Ref. Return
TSC10───── Ref. Return
3-150 65800010B
Special Compass Board Links and Interconnections
1
LK3
2
LK2
LK1
FILE REF: 65800832M date:02/02/05
Figure 3.130. Special Compass Interface PCB
There are three links on the Special Compass Board, LK1, LK2 and LK3.
The voltage at the S1, S2 & S 3 inputs defines whether a shorting link is fitted
to position LK1 or LK2.
If the input voltages are greater than 32V RMS, the link must be fitted in
position LK1, otherwise, fit the link in position LK2.
The default setting is with the link fitted in position LK1.
The reference voltage determines the setting of LK3 as follows:
Reference Voltage LK3
150V RMS 2-4
115V RMS 3-4
50V RMS 1-2
26V RMS 1-3
The default setting is with pins 2 and 4 of LK3 linked.
Compasses should be connected in accordance with the following table:
Synchro Compass
I/O Panel Compass
TSC1───────── S1
TSC2───────── S2
TSC3───────── S3
TSC4 (no connection)
TSC7───────── Synchro Ref.
TSC10──────── Ref. Return
65800010B 3-151
3.3 Log Cabling

Serial Logs are connected to serial inputs as described in Section 3.4.1.
The BridgeMaster analogue log input can accept signals from a water-locked,
single axis, pulse or Doppler log with 100 to 3000 pulses per nm at a speed
range of 0 to 75 knots. The signal can be from a closing contact or be a TTL
compatible signal (1=2.4 to 5V, 0=0 to 0.4V).
The Log signal is connected to TSD 7, the Log Return to TSD 8 and the Log
Status to TSD 9.
3.4 Processor Electronics Unit Additional Signals
All BridgeMaster E Processors have two general-purpose serial input and
output ports with a dedicated serial output for Track Table data.
An extended Processor Unit has three more general-purpose serial input and
output ports and some additional signals.
An Interface Unit (65847A) may be fitted to a standard processor to expand
the system capability to that given by an extended processor.
3.4.1 Serial Ports
The table below gives details of the serial input and output connections.
See also Figure 3.121and Figure 3.122 earlier in this chapter.
3-152 65800010B
Port Terminal Function Features

Standard Serial Ports
TSE 1 RX Data 1B
Serial I/P 1 TSE 2 Loop 1
+/- 1000V isolation.
TSE 3 RX Data 1A
For RS232/RS422 use pins 1 (rtn/B) & pin 3 (sig/A).
TSF 1 RX Data 2B
For current loop use pins 1 & 2 linked (+ve), Pin 3 (-ve).
Serial I/P 2 TSF 2 Loop 2
TSF 3 RX Data 2A
TSD 1 TX Data 1B RS232/RS422 configured via Display menu.
Serial O/P 1 TSD 2 TX Data 1A For RS232 use pins 1 (sig) & 3 (rtn).
TSD 3 0V For RS422 use pins 1 (B) & 2 (A).
TSD 4 TX Data 2B RS232/RS422 configured via Display menu.
Serial O/P 2 TSD 5 TX Data 2A For RS232 use pins 4 (sig) & 6 (rtn).
TSD 6 0V For RS422 use pins 4 (B) & 5 (A).
Additional Serial Ports (Extended Processor & Interface Unit)
TSJ 1 RX Data 3B
Serial I/P 3 TSJ 2 Loop 3
TSJ 3 RX Data 3A
TSH 1 RX Data 4B +/- 1000V isolation.
Serial I/P 4 TSH 2 Loop 4 For RS232/RS422 use pins 1 (rtn/B) & pin 3 (sig/A).
TSH 3 RX Data 4A For current loop use pins 1 & 2 linked (+ve), Pin 3 (-ve).
TSG 1 RX Data 5B
Serial I/P 5 TSG 2 Loop 5
TSG 3 RX Data 5A
TSK 1 TX Data 3B RS232/RS422 configured via Display menu.
Serial O/P 3 TSK 2 TX Data 3A For RS232 use pins 1 (sig) & 3 (rtn).
TSK 3 0V For RS422 use pins 1 (B) & 2 (A).
TSK 4 TX Data 4B RS232/RS422 configured via Display menu.
TSK 6 0V For RS422 use pins 4 (B) & 5 (A).
TSK 7 TX Data 5B RS232/RS422/RS485 configured via Display menu.
TSK 9 0V For RS422/RS485 use pins 7 (B) & 8 (A).
Track Table Output
SKY 23 Track Data B
Serial Track Table O/P configured via Display menu.
Track Table For RS232 use pins 22 (rtn) & 23 (sig).
SKY 24 Track Data A
O/P For RS422 use pins 23 (B) & 24 (A).
(See note) NMEA format. Contains Own Ship’s information, Radar
SKY 22 0V information, and Tracked Target information.
TSK 10 Track Data B
Serial Track Table O/P configured via Display menu.
Track Table For RS232 use pins 12 (rtn) & 10 (sig).
TSK 11 Track Data A
O/P For RS422 use pins 10 (B) & 11 (A).
(See note) NMEA format. Contains Own Ship’s information, Radar
TSK 12 0V information, and Tracked Target information.
Note – The Track Table is on SKY for a standard processor and TSK for an
extended processor and interface unit.
65800010B 3-153
3.4.2 Additional Input and Outputs

The Dual Channel Processor and the Interface Unit provide the following
additional ports:
• Remote Alarm (Alarm 1) via relay contacts (N/O & N/C)
• Vigilance Alarm (Alarm 2) via relay contacts (N/O & N/C)
• External Start (or Power-On/Power-Fail indicator) via relay contacts
(N/O & N/C)
• Buzzer output
• Power output
• Freeze Frame input - not available on commercial units
The table below details the additional I/O connections for an extended
processor or an interface unit. See Figure 3.122 for Interconnection
Diagrams and I/O port connections.
Port Terminal Function Features

TSL 4 Remote Alarm N/O Remote Alarm with Relay Contacts.
TSL 5 Remote Alarm Return Normally Open (N/O) and Normally Closed
Remote Alarm
TSL 6 Remote Alarm N/C (N/C) available. N/C shorts to return in
alarm condition.
TSL 10 Vigilance Alarm N/O Vigilance Alarm with Relay Contacts.
TSL 11 Vigilance Alarm Return Normally Open (N/O) and Normally Closed
Vigilance Alarm
TSL 12 Vigilance Alarm N/C (N/C) available. N/O shorts to return during
output pulse.
TSL 7 Ext Start N/O Additional use as ‘Power ON’ indicator and
‘Power Fail’ indicator with Relay Contacts.
TSL 8 Ext Start Return Normally Open (N/O) and Normally Closed
External Start
(N/C) available. N/C shorts to return on
TSL 9 Ext Start N/C Power Fail.
TSK 14 Buzzer + Buzzer + is to +12V via 2k2 resistor.

Buzzer TSK 15 Buzzer Return Buzzer Return is via 2k2 resistor switched
to 0V.
TSL 1 +12V External Power Output to proprietary low
TSL 2 +5V current equipment.
Power Output
TSL 3 0V
TSL 13 -12V
TSK 13 Freeze Frame- Reserved for Special Options Radar
Freeze Frame requirements only.
Pull down to ground to activate function.
3-154 65800010B
3.5 Cabling Schedules

168 16-2-12C (TP3145)
164 16-2-2C (TP3141) TU FUNCTION CLR Tx/Rx

TSC1 PM ON R TSC1
TxRx FUNCTION CLR SCU TSC2 PM Tx/Rx B TSC2
TSB9 CONTR + 12V R SA N TSC3 PM TUNE G TSC3
TSB10 TU ENABLE B TSA1 TSC4 XR ADJUST Y TSC4
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG TSC5 XT ADJUST W TSC5
TSC6 +12V (PM) BK TSC6
TSC7 +12V (PM) BN TSC7
TSC8 0V V TSC8
165 37-3-2R (TP3149) TSC9 -12V (PM) O TSC9
TSC10 -12V (PM) P TSC10
ISO FUNCTION CLR TU TSC11 AZI PULSES L/G TSC11
2 AC LINE R TSE4 TSC12 HEADING MKR GY TSC12
4 AC NEUTRAL B TSE3 E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
EARTH EARTH (0V) SCR TSE1
37-3-2R (TP3149) SHORT

169 PT1YM - 75Ω COAXIAL
RUN
166 SINGLE PHASE 110/120V &
TU FUNCTION CLR Tx/Rx
SKP PERF MON TRIG - SKP
220/240V
SCU FUNCTION CLR TU
TRIP 6 AC LINE R TSH1
TRIP 2 AC NEUTRAL B TSH2
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG 174 DATA CABLE (4 T/PAIRS)
TU FUNCTION CLR DU
TSB1 DU DATA + B/W TSA1
37-3-4R (TP3150) LONG RUN TSB2 DU DATA - W/B TSA2
166 SINGLE PHASE 110/120V & TSB3 TX DATA + O/W TSA3
220/240V TSB4 TX DATA - W/O TSA4
SCU FUNCTION CLR TU TSB5 TX TRIG + G/W TSA5
TRIP 2 AC LINE R TSH1 TSB6 TX TRIG - W/G TSA6
TRIP 6 AC NEUTRAL B TSH2 TSB7 TX SART + BN/W TSA7
TRIP 2 AC LINE G TSH1 TSB8 TX SART - W/BN TSA8
TRIP 6 AC NEUTRAL Y TSH2 E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG*
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG * located on lower back cover, adjacent to cable
clamp. Cable clamp should grip onto cable braid.
37-3-4R (TP3150) THREE

166 PHASE
110/120V & 220/240V & 380/440V 175 PT1YM - 75Ω COAXIAL
SCU FUNCTION CLR TU TU FUNCTION CLR DU

TRIP 2 AC LINE 1 R TSH1 SKV VIDEO - SKV
TRIP 4 AC LINE 2 B TSH2
TRIP 6 AC LINE 3 Y TSH3
- NOT USED G -
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
65800010B 3-155
180 16-2-2C (TP3141)

184 37-3-2R (TP3149)
Tx/Rx FUNCTION CLR SCU
TSB9 CONTR +12V R SA N ISO FUNCTION CLR Tx/Rx
TSB10 TU ENABLE B TSA1 2 AC LINE R TSE4
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG 4 AC NEUTRAL B TSE3
EARTH EARTH (0V) SCR TSE1
182 37-3-2R (TP3149)

S/F FUNCTION CLR ISO
- AC LINE R 1 Tx/Rx FUNCTION CLR DU
- AC NEUTRAL B 3 SKV VIDEO - SKV
37-3-2R (TP3149) SHORT 194 DATA CABLE (4 T/PAIRS)

RUN
183 SINGLE PHASE 110/120V & Tx/Rx FUNCTION CLR DU
220/240V TSB1 DU DATA + B/W TSA1
S/F FUNCTION CLR SCU TSB2 DU DATA - W/B TSA2
- AC LINE R 6/T3 TSB3 TX DATA + O/W TSA3
- AC NEUTRAL B 4/T2 TSB4 TX DATA - W/O TSA4
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG TSB5 TX TRIG + G/W TSA5
TSB6 TX TRIG - W/G TSA6
TSB7 TX SART + BN/W TSA7
TSB8 TX SART - W/BN TSA8
37-3-4R (TP3150) LONG RUN E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG*
183 SINGLE PHASE 110/120V & * located on lower back cover, adjacent to cable
220/240V clamp. Cable clamp should grip onto cable braid.
S/F FUNCTION CLR SCU
- AC LINE R 6/T3
- AC NEUTRAL B 4/T2
- AC LINE G 6/T3 195 PT1YM - 75Ω COAXIAL
- AC NEUTRAL Y 4/T2
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG DU FUNCTION CLR
SKX MIS TRIG OUT -
Note: Only if required for the system configuration
37-3-4R (TP3150) THREE

183 PHASE
110/120V & 220/240V & 380/440V
S/F FUNCTION CLR SCU
- AC LINE 1 R 2/T1
DU FUNCTION CLR
- AC LINE 2 B 4/T2
SKM MIS TRIG IN -
- AC LINE 3 Y 6/T3 Note: Only if required for the system configuration
- NOT USED G -
3-156 65800010B
197 204 37-3-2R (TP3149)
LOG FUNCTION CLR DU ISO FUNCTION CLR TxRx

LOG TSD7 2 AC LINE R TSE4
LOG RETURN TSD8 4 AC NEUTRAL B TSE3
LOG STATUS TSD9 EARTH EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG*
* located on lower back cover, adjacent to cable
clamp. Cable clamp should grip onto cable braid.
205 37-3-2R (TP3149)
ISO FUNCTION CLR DU

198 2 AC LINE R TSP2
4 AC NEUTRAL B TSP4
FUNCTION CLR DU E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
S1 TSC1
S2 TSC2
S3 TSC3
S1 RTN TSC4
S2 RTN TSC5 206 16-2-12C (TP3145)
S3 RTN TSC6
TU FUNCTION CLR Tx/Rx
SYNCH Ref Low TSC7
TSC1 PM ON R TSC1
SYNCH Ref Med TSC8
TSC2 PM Tx/Rx B TSC2
SYNCH Ref High TSC9
TSC3 PM TUNE G TSC3
SYNCH REF TSC10
RTN TSC4 XR ADJUST Y TSC4
EARTH (0V) E/TAG* TSC5 XT ADJUST W TSC5
* located on lower back cover, adjacent to cable TSC6 +12V (PM) BK TSC6
clamp. Cable clamp should grip onto cable braid. TSC7 +12V (PM) BN TSC7
TSC8 0V V TSC8
TSC9 -12V (PM) O TSC9
TSC10 -12V (PM) P TSC10
TSC11 AZI PULSES L/G TSC11
199 16-2-2C (TP3141)
TSC12 HEADING MKR GY TSC12
FUNCTION CLR DU E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
RX DATA 1B TSE1
LOOP 1 TSE2
RX DATA 1A TSE3
Note: DO NOT Earth Cable Screen at DU 207 PT1YM - 75Ω COAXIAL
TU FUNCTION CLR TxRx

SKP PERF MON TRIG - SKP
200 16-2-2C (TP3141)
FUNCTION CLR DU
RX DATA 2B TSF1 208 37-3-2R (TP3149)
LOOP 2 TSF2
RX DATA 2A TSF3 Tx/Rx FUNCTION CLR TU
Note: DO NOT Earth Cable Screen at DU Earth TSA1 MOTOR + R TSA1
TSA2 MOTOR - B TSA2
65800010B 3-157
209 16-2-2C (TP3141) 230 DATA CABLE (4 T/PAIRS)
Tx/Rx FUNCTION CLR TU TU FUNCTION CLR DU

TSB9 CONTR +12V R TSB9 TSB1 DU DATA + B/W TSA1
TSB10 TU ENABLE B TSB10 TSB2 DU DATA - W/B TSA2
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG TSB3 TX DATA + O/W TSA3
TSB4 TX DATA - W/O TSA4
TSB5 TX TRIG + G/W TSA5
210 16-2-2C (TP3141) TSB7 TX SART + BN/W TSA7
FUNCTION CLR DU E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG*
0V SKY22 * located on lower back cover, adjacent to cable
clamp.
TX DATA B SKY23 Cable clamp should grip onto cable braid.
TX DATA A SKY24
EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
Note: For RS232 use SKY 22/23
For RS422 use SKY 23/24
231 16-2-2C (TP3141)
FUNCTION CLRIF or
DU
RX DATA 3B TSJ1
LOOP 3 TSJ2
TXRX FUNCTION CLR DU
RX DATA 3A TSJ3
SKV VIDEO - SKV
Note: DO NOT Earth Cable Screen at IF
228 DATA CABLE (4 T/PAIRS)

232 16-2-2C (TP3141)
FUNCTION CLR IF or
TSB1 DU DATA + B/W TSA1
DU
TSB2 DU DATA - W/B TSA2
TX DATA 3B TSK1
TSB3 TX DATA + O/W TSA3
TX DATA 3A TSK2
TSB4 TX DATA - W/O TSA4
0V TSK3
TSB5 TX TRIG + G/W TSA5
TSB7 TX SART + BN/W TSA7
E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG* 233 16-2-2C (TP3141)
* located on lower back cover, adjacent to cable
clamp. FUNCTION CLRIF or
Cable clamp should grip onto cable braid. DU
RX DATA 4B TSH1
LOOP 4 TSH2
RX DATA 4A TSH3
229 PT1YM - 75Ω COAXIAL Note: DO NOT Earth Cable Screen at IF
TU FUNCTION CLR DU
SKV VIDEO - SKV
3-158 65800010B
234 16-2-2C (TP3141) 239 16-2-2C (TP3141)
FUNCTION CLR IF or FUNCTION CLR IF or

DU DU
TX DATA 4B TSK4 EXT START NO TSL7
TX DATA 4A TSK5 EST START RTN TSL8
0V TSK6 EXT START NC TSL9
235 16-2-2C (TP3141) 240 16-2-2C (TP3141)
FUNCTION CLR IF or FUNCTION CLR IF or

DU DU
RX DATA 5B TSG1 BUZZER + R TSK14
LOOP 5 TSG2 BUZZER RTN B TSK15
RX DATA 5A TSG3 0V SCR E/TAG
Note: DO NOT Earth Cable Screen at IF
2M CABLE 65800514 SUPPLIED

241 WITH INTERFACE UNIT
236 16-2-2C (TP3141)
DU FUNCTION CLR IF
FUNCTION CLR IF or SKY1 +12V OUT SKZ1
DU SKY2 +5V OUT SKZ2
TX DATA 5B TSK7 SKY3 0V SKZ3
TX DATA 5A TSK8 SKY4 -12V OUT SKZ4
0V TSK9 SKY5 INTERFACE SKZ5
SKY6 0V SKZ6
SKY7 INTERFACE SKZ7
SKY8 0V SKZ8
237 16-2-2C (TP3141) SKY9 INTERFACE SKZ9
SKY10 INTERFACE SKZ10
FUNCTION CLR IF or SKY11 INTERFACE SKZ11
DU SKY12 0V SKZ12
TRACK DATA B TSK10 SKY13 INTERFACE SKZ13
TRACK DATA A TSK11 SKY14 INTERFACE SKZ14
0V TSK12 SKY15 INTERFACE SKZ15
SKY16 0V SKZ16
238 16-2-6C (TP3144) SKY19 FREEZE SKZ19
FRAME*
FUNCTION CLR IF or SKY20 INTERFACE SKZ20
DU SKY21 INTERFACE SKZ21
ALARM 1 NO TSL4 SKY22 0V SKZ22
ALARM 1 RTN TSL5 SKY23 TRACK DATA B SKZ23
ALARM 1 NC TSL6 SKY24 TRACK DATA A SKZ24
ALARM 2 NO TSL10 SKY25 INTERFACE SKZ25
ALARM 2 RTN TSL11 * Not used on commercial units
ALARM 2 NC TSL12
65800010B 3-159

242 16-2-2C (TP3141)
DU FUNCTION CLR DU
FUNCTION CLR DU SKM MIS TRIG - SKX2
TX DATA 1B TSD1
TX DATA 1A TSD2
0V TSD3
DU FUNCTION CLR DU
243 16-2-2C (TP3141) SKM2 MIS TRIG - SKX
FUNCTION CLR DU
TX DATA 2B TSD4
TX DATA 2A TSD5 326 PT1YM - 75Ω COAXIAL
0V TSD6
SKV VIDEO - SKV2
248 DC SUPPLY CABLE
SF FUNCTION CLR TXRX 327 DATA CABLE (4 T/PAIRS)

FOR TP3150 CONNECTIONS
- DC - B TSE3 TXRX FUNCTION CLR DU
- DC - G TSE4 TSB1 DU DATA + B/W TSZ1
- DC + Y TSE1 TSB2 DU DATA - W/B TSZ2
- DC + R TSE2 TSB3 TX DATA + O/W TSZ3
E/TAG EARTH SCR E/TAG TSB4 TX DATA - W/O TSZ4
TSB5 TX TRIG + G/W TSZ5
TSB6 TX TRIG - W/G TSZ6
TSB7 TX SART + BN/W TSZ7
249 DC SUPPLY CABLE TSB8 TX SART - W/BN TSZ8
SF FUNCTION CLR TXRX
FOR TP3150 CONNECTIONS
- DC - B TSP3
- DC - G TSP4 340 DATA CABLE (4 T/PAIRS)
- DC + Y TSP1
- DC + R TSP2 TU FUNCTION CLR DU
E/TAG EARTH SCR E/TAG TSB1 DU DATA + B/W TSZ1
TSB2 DU DATA - W/B TSZ2
TSB3 TX DATA + O/W TSZ3
TSB4 TX DATA - W/O TSZ4
301 See note TSB5 TX TRIG + G/W TSZ5
TSB6 TX TRIG - W/G TSZ6
ISO FUNCTION CLR MU TSB7 TX SART + BN/W TSZ7
2 AC LINE BN LINE1 TSB8 TX SART - W/BN TSZ8
4 AC NEUTRAL BE NEUTRAL E/TAG EARTH (0V) SCR E/TAG
EARTH EARTH (0V) GN/Y EARTH
Unit is supplied with 2-metre mains
cable; if necessary, this can be
extended using three core 0.75mm2
supplied by shipyard.
3-160 65800010B
TU FUNCTION CLR DU
SKV VIDEO - SKV2
343 DC SUPPLY CABLE
SF FUNCTION CLR FPD

- No Connection . N/C
- DC - . DC -
- Earth . E
- DC + . DC +
E/TAG EARTH SCR E/TAG
65800010B 3-161
3.6 System Fuses

Switch – Fuse Current Ratings
Current Rating
S-Band Motor
Ship’s Supply
Radar Single Phase Three Phase
110/120V AC 10A 10A 10A
220/240V AC 5A 5A 5A
380/440V AC - - 5A
22-32V DC 25A - -
Processor Electronics Unit Fuse
Refer to Figure 3.121 and Figure 3.122 for fuse location.
Supply Rating
110/120V AC 5A
Mains Fuse
220/240V AC 5A
(FS1)
22-32V DC 15 or 16A
Transceiver Unit Fuse
Refer to Figure 3.46 and Figure 3.52 for S-Band fuse location.
Refer to Figure 3.16, Figure 3.23 and Figure 3.24 for X-Band fuse location.
Supply S-Band X-Band
110/120V AC 3.15A 5A
Mains Fuse
220/240V AC 3.15A 3.15A
(FS1)
22-32V DC - 15 or 16A
Note – All fuses are 1¼in (31mm) ceramic, anti-surge, cartridge types.
3.15A fuse is code number MA00007245.
5A fuse is code number 2180413.
15 or 16A fuse is code number 2162342.
3-162 65800010B
BridgeMaster E Chapter 4
Ship’s Manual Initialisation and Commissioning
CHAPTER 4
INITIALISATION AND COMMISSIONING
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................3
1.1 Using the Radar Controls..........................................................................................3
1.2 Standby Display ........................................................................................................3
2 Selecting the Initialisation Mode .......................................................................4

2.1 Menus and Passwords..............................................................................................5
2.2 Returning to Standby ................................................................................................5
3 System Configuration.........................................................................................6
3.1 Password Access......................................................................................................6
3.2 Menu Items ...............................................................................................................6
3.2.1 Static Site ...................................................................................................................6
3.2.2 Interswitch ..................................................................................................................6
3.2.3 Display Mode .............................................................................................................6
3.2.4 Language Mode .........................................................................................................6
3.2.5 Distance Units ............................................................................................................6
3.2.6 Remote Alarm ............................................................................................................7
3.2.7 Ship Length ................................................................................................................7
3.2.8 Ship Beam..................................................................................................................8
3.2.9 Max Rate of Turn .......................................................................................................8
3.2.10 STD Rate of Turn ......................................................................................................8
3.2.11 Nav Sensor Offsets ...................................................................................................9
3.2.12 Vigilance Alarm........................................................................................................10
4 I/O Options.........................................................................................................11
4.1 Menu Items .............................................................................................................12
4.1.1 Serial Ports 1 to 5 and Radar Port...........................................................................12
4.1.2 Analogue I/P (COMPASS) .......................................................................................15
4.1.3 Analogue I/P (LOG) .................................................................................................16
5 Transceiver Settings.........................................................................................17
5.1 Menu Items .............................................................................................................18
5.1.1 Display Marker .........................................................................................................18
5.1.2 TU (Turning Unit) Offsets.........................................................................................18
5.1.3 TXRX Location.........................................................................................................18
5.1.4 RF Feeder Length....................................................................................................19
5.1.5 Video Cable Length .................................................................................................19
65800010B 4-1
Chapter 4
Initialisation and Commissioning Checklist
5.1.6 Antenna Beamwidth ................................................................................................ 20
5.1.7 Sector Blanking ....................................................................................................... 20
5.1.8 Interswitch Configuration......................................................................................... 21
5.1.9 Slave Only Transceiver ........................................................................................... 23
6 Reset Defaults .................................................................................................. 24

7 Restarting.......................................................................................................... 25
8 Initialisation in Transmit Mode ........................................................................ 26
8.1 Selecting Transmit Mode........................................................................................ 26
8.2 Accessing the SYSTEM Menu ............................................................................... 26
8.3 Accessing the VIDEO SETTINGS Menu................................................................ 27
8.4 Adjusting the TX Settings ....................................................................................... 27
8.4.1 Selecting the Required Transceiver ........................................................................ 27
8.4.2 Accessing the TX n SETTINGS Menu .................................................................... 28
8.4.3 Setting the TX Parameters...................................................................................... 28
8.4.4 Selecting and Setting the other Transceivers in Interswitched Systems ................ 32
8.4.5 Dual Channel Display Settings................................................................................ 32
8.5 Selecting the Performance Monitoring Facility ....................................................... 33
8.5.1 Selecting the Required Performance Monitor ......................................................... 33
8.5.2 Adjusting the Performance Monitor......................................................................... 34
8.6 Operating the Performance Monitor ....................................................................... 35
Figures
Figure 4.1 Initialisation Mode (System Configuration) Display ............................... 4
Figure 4.2 Remote alarms ...................................................................................... 7
Figure 4.3 Initialisation Mode (I/O Options) Display ............................................. 11
Figure 4.4 Initialisation Mode (Transceiver Settings) Display ............................... 17
4-2 65800010B
1 Introduction
Use the following procedures to start the system correctly. Use the checklist
given at the end of this chapter to record the settings made during the
procedures. This will provide a reference for future use and record that all of the
procedures have been completed.
1.1 Using the Radar Controls

General operating instructions for the radar are contained in the User Guide,
publication reference 65800010A for Single Channel Radars or 65818014A
for Dual Channel Radars.
A description of the operation of the radar control panel is in Chapter 2 of the

User Guide. You use a simple pointing device (joystick or tracker-ball), with
two associated keys (left and right) to control the radar and its display.
Throughout this manual, reference to the ‘cursor control’ relate to the joystick
of tracker-ball (depending on which is fitted). Similarly, instructions to ‘left
click’ or ‘right click’ relate to a press-and-release of the left or right key
associated with the cursor control.
1.2 Standby Display

The radar starts up for the first time, it goes into STANDBY mode.
65800010B 4-3
Chapter 4
2 Selecting the Initialisation Mode

You will find the soft key for selecting the INITIALISATION mode at the bottom
left hand corner of the display.
INITIALISATION
From the STANDBY display:
MONITOR TEST
1. Left click on the INITIALISATION soft key.
This will show the Initialisation page, see Figure 4.1below. The SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION soft key has an automatic highlight, and the menu associated
with this soft key is shown. Soft keys for I/O OPTIONS and TRANSCEIVER
SETTINGS are also available at the top of the display.
Some menu items are not shown, depending on the hardware and configuration.
For example, Remote Alarm and Vigilance Alarm are only available you have an
extended radar or a Serial Interface has been fitted.
RETURN TO STANDBY INITIALISATION
SYSTEM I/O TRANSCEIVER

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS SETTINGS
STATIC SITE NO
INTERSWITCH NOT FITTED
DISPLAY MODE MASTER
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
DISTANCE UNITS NM
REMOTE ALARM YES
SHIP LENGTH 300 M
SHIP BEAM 33 M
MAX RATE OF TURN 112 °/MIN
STD RATE OF TURN 30 °/MIN
NAV SENSOR OFFSETS FORE 28.5 M
PORT 5.0 M
VIGILANCE ALARM NO
RESET DEFAULTS
Figure 4.1 Initialisation Mode (System Configuration) Display
4-4 65800010B
2.1 Menus and Passwords
You can see the menus for SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, I/O OPTIONS and
TRANSCEIVER SETTINGS at any time by left clicking on the appropriate
soft key.
ENTER MANUFACTURERS PASSWORD
The first attempt to change a menu item will

result in the display of an alpha-numeric keypad
prompting you for the input of the
manufacturer’s password, see example right. WARNING
SAFETY OF THE VESSEL MAY BE
Enter an appropriate password at the keypad to COMPROMISED BY UNAUTHORISED CHANGES
proceed further, or right click to close the keypad without further action. For
more information on menus and keypads, refer to the Reference Section in
Chapter 15 of the User Guide. The navigator’s password will also be
accepted for making changes to items in the I/O OPTIONS menu.
After entering a correct password and making a change, the caption in the
soft key at the top left hand corner of the display will change from RETURN
TO STANDBY to SAVE CHANGES AND RESTART.
Sperry-Marine recommends that you make settings within the System

Configuration menu before making changes to items in the menus for I/O
Options and Transceiver Settings.
2.2 Returning to Standby

If you have made no changes to the initialisation menus, left click on the
RETURN TO STANDBY soft key (top left hand corner of display) to return
the system to Standby. If you have entered a password to make changes
and you have made at least one change; the soft key caption will have
changed from RETURN TO STANDBY to SAVE CHANGES AND RESTART,
see Section 7 (Restarting) later in this chapter.
65800010B 4-5
Chapter 4
3 System Configuration
3.1 Password Access
1. If necessary, left click on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key to
reveal the System Configuration menu. See Figure 4.1.
2. Position the screen cursor over the input field of the first item in the
menu to be changed.
3. Left click in an attempt to change the setting.
4. This will reveal an alphanumeric keypad prompting the input of the
manufacturer’s password. See Section 2.1 earlier in the chapter.
5. Use the keypad to enter the required password.
3.2 Menu Items
Select items in the System Configuration menu in order from the top. The
menu only shows items applicable to the actual system.
3.2.1 Static Site

Left click to toggle for YES or NO.
Note – If a static site is selected (YES) various items in the System

Configuration and I/O Options menus will be removed and not
appear, and all offsets will be referenced to N, S, E and W.
3.2.2 Interswitch
1. Left click to reveal a drop down menu listing the
NOT FITTED
Interswitch types, see example right. 65842 2-WAY
65846 6-WAY
2. Within the drop down menu, left click on the Interswitch 65642 2 WAY
65416 2-WAY
type if fitted.
Note – Selecting NOT FITTED will force the Display ID to ‘A’. Channel 1 is
set to ‘A’ and channel 2 is set to ‘B’ in dual channel radars.
3.2.3 Display Mode

This menu item will only be available if an Interswitch is NOT FITTED, and it
is not a dual channel radar.
Left click to toggle for MASTER or permanent SLAVE Display option. For a
dual channel radar, refer to Section 5.1.9 for setting a SLAVE only channel.
3.2.4 Language Mode

Left click to toggle for ENGLISH or JAPANESE.
3.2.5 Distance Units

Left click to toggle for NM (nautical miles), KM (kilometres) or SM (statute
miles).
4-6 65800010B
3.2.6 Remote Alarm
The remote alarm output is available if an optional Interface Unit is fitted, or
if the system is a dual channel radar. You can configure it as follows.
1. Left click to toggle for YES or NO.
2. Right click on the input field to reveal a drop down menu containing the
alarms applicable to the system configuration. See Figure 4.2 for a list
of all possible alarms. The alarms shown will depend on your
configuration.
REMOTE ALARMS
CONTROL PANEL TM RESET

PROCESSOR YES MVR TIME
DISPLAY RESET YES TRACKS FULL
RADAR RESET YES GUARD LINE
GRAPHICS RESET YES ZONES FULL
MEMORY AZ OVERLOAD
RADAR CONFIG GZ ENTRY
RADAR LINK AZ ENTRY
LOST TARGET
STBY/TX ERR ROUTE ERROR
AZI ERROR APPROACH
TX COMMS OFF TRACK
INTERSWITCH LEG CHANGE
LOW VIDEO WATCH ALARM
COMPASS MOTION MODE
MISSING HL CHECKSUM
MISSING SL AIS INTEGRITY
NO SCAN HL AIS INPUT
DEPTH INPUT
TX BIST WIND INPUT
VISION ALARM INPUT
TRIG ERROR VMS GRAPHIC
LOG ERROR PLOT UPDATE
LOST REF GPS QUALITY
BOW CROSS AUTOTIDE
CPA/TCPA TEMPERATURE
NAV INPUT CARD BATTERY
NAV SPEED PC CARD
POSITION EXTERNAL MAP
PL ERROR CARD FULL
Figure 4.2 Remote alarms
3. Within the drop down menu, left click on an alarm item to toggle for YES
or “…” (BLANK – not selected).
4. Repeat Step 3 until the alarm selections are as required.
5. Right click to close the alarms menu.
3.2.7 Ship Length
You use this menu to size the ship’s profile symbol. It is not available if you
have selected Static Site. Input range is 0-999m.
1. Left click to access.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to change the ship length value to
that required.
3. Left click to accept.
Alternatively, a right click on the input field will reveal a drop down numeric
keypad from which a ‘ship length’ value can be entered.
65800010B 4-7
Chapter 4
3.2.8 Ship Beam
You use this menu item to size the ship’s profile symbol. It is not available if
you have selected Static Site. Input range is 0-300m.
2. Move the cursor control left to right to change the ship beam value to
that required.
Alternatively, a right click on the input filed will reveal a drop down numeric
keypad from which you can enter a ‘ship beam’ value.
3.2.9 Max Rate of Turn

You use this menu item when using the Constant Radius Turn planning
tool. It is not available if you have selected Static Site. Input range is 0-
1200°/min.
2. Move the cursor control left to right to change the max-rate-of-turn value
to that required.
Alternatively a right click on the input field will reveal a drop down numeric
keypad from which a ‘max rate of turn’ value can be entered.
3.2.10 STD Rate of Turn

You use this menu item when using the Constant Radius Turn planning
tool. It is not available if you have selected Static Site. Input range is 0-
1200°/min.
The standard rate of turn can never exceed the Max Rate of Turn. If the
standard rate of turn is set to be greater than the Max rate of turn, the Max
rate of turn will be increased to be equal to the standard rate of turn. If the
Max rate of turn is reduced below the standard rate of turn, the standard
rate of turn will be reduced to the Max rate of turn.
2. Move the cursor control left to right to change the standard-rate-of-turn
value to that required.
keypad from which you can enter a ‘standard rate of turn’.
4-8 65800010B
3.2.11 Nav Sensor Offsets
The nav sensor offsets are the distances fore/aft and port/stbd of the nav
sensor from the centre of the ship. They are essential to provide accurate
positional information. Input ranges are limited to half ship’s length and half
ship’s beam.
To change the offset value:

1. Left click on the offset.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to change the offset value to that
required.
Alternatively: NAV SENSOR
1 2 3 F/A
4. Right click on the FORE (or AFT) caption to reveal a 4 5 6

7 8 9
drop down numeric keypad, see example right. 0
5. If required, left click on the F/A caption within the keypad FORE nnn.n
to toggle for FORE or AFT.

6. The numeric keypad can be used to enter the offset directly.
If you have selected STATIC SITE, then FORE (AFT) changes to NORTH
(SOUTH) and F/A changes to N/S.
To change the offset value:

1. Left click on the offset.
required.
Alternatively
4. Right click on the PORT (or STBD) caption to reveal a
drop down numeric keypad, see example right. NAV SENSOR
1 2 3 P/S
5. If required, left click on the P/S caption within the keypad 4 5 6
to toggle for PORT or STBD. 7 8 9
0
6. The numeric keypad can be used to enter the offset PORT nnn.n
directly.
If you have selected STATIC SITE, then PORT (STBD) changes to EAST
(WEST) and P/S changes to E/W.
65800010B 4-9
Chapter 4
3.2.12 Vigilance Alarm
Not available on EPA(L) systems and only available on dual channel radars
or other systems if an Interface Unit is fitted.
1. Left click to toggle for YES or NO.
The Vigilance alarm output provides for the requirements of Watch 1
systems. In direct response to an operator action, the output changes state
for 1 second (either opening or closing contacts). The alarm is then
inhibited for a period of 1 minute, whether operator action takes place or
not, after which time the output will activate at the next operator action.
4-10 65800010B
4 I/O Options
1. Left click on the I/O OPTIONS soft key.This will reveal the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
dialog box shown on the right. MUST BE CORRECT
BEFORE SELECTING
2. Left click on YES to reveal the I/O Options menu as FURTHER MENUS
illustrated at Figure 4.3 below. IS THIS

CONFIGURATION
CORRECT?
Note – A left click on the NO caption will close the dialog box
YES NO
without further action.
SAVE CHANGES AND RESTART INITIALISATION

SERIAL BAUD INPUT MESSAGE OUTPUT OUTPUT MESSAGE

PORTS RATE DEVICE HEADERS DEVICE TYPE HEADERS
VTG
NAV SENSOR GLL
1 4800 (Input Only) Time(ZDA) NO OUTPUT 422
R00&WPL
2 4800 LOG VBW NO OUTPUT 422

VDM
3 38k4 AIS INPUT ALR AIS OUTPUT 422 ACK
VDO
4 38k4 NO INPUT NO OUTPUT 422

5 38k4 NO INPUT NO OUTPUT 422
OSD
RADAR 4800 TRACK TABLE 422 RSD
PORT TTM
REFERENCE: Turning Unit
TARGETS: Tracked targets only
ANALOGUE I/P FITTED TYPE RATIO/PULSES

COMPASS STANDARD S STEPPER 360:1
LOG YES NEG PULSES 200PPNM
RESET DEFAULTS
Figure 4.3 Initialisation Mode (I/O Options) Display
65800010B 4-11
Chapter 4
4.1 Menu Items
The input of a password may be required, see sub-section 2.1.
4.1.1 Serial Ports 1 to 5 and Radar Port

You should repeat the following procedures for all applicable serial ports.
Port 3, 4 and 5 are not available on EPA(L) systems and only available on
single channel radars with an Interface Unit fitted or on dual channel radars.
BAUD RATE
The BAUD RATE for serial ports 1 & 2, and for the Radar port, is fixed at
4800.
For serial ports 3, 4 and 5 ONLY

1. Left click on the BAUD RATE input field to change the rate between
4800 and 38K4 for both INPUT and OUTPUT for that port
INPUT DEVICE
The RADAR port does not have an input device.

1. Left click on the INPUT DEVICE input field to reveal a drop down menu
listing the available device selections.
2. From within the drop down menu, left click on the appropriate option for
the selected Serial Port.
The NO INPUT option is included to enable the port to be de-selected.
When the system is a static installation the COMPASS, LOG and DEPTH
inputs are not available.
Notes The AIS INPUT option is only available on PORT 3, 4 and 5.
The Route & WPT TRANSFER INPUT is only available on an
ARPA system.
The Target Rename Inputs are used so that external devices
(including VMS) can name track targets on the radar. This is
useful where several radars are tracking the same targets as it
allows the use of a common name.
The NAV Lines Interface is used to transfer maps from a VMS to
the BridgeMaster E.
The Alarm Acknowledge Input is used to provide remote
acknowledgement of unacknowledged alarms.
The AIS Input is used for the output from an AIS system.
The Route & Waypoint Transfer Input is used to transfer routes
from an external system into the Internal Route System. This is
different from the routes and waypoints sent from the NAV
Sensor. See User Guide Section 9 for more details.
4-12 65800010B
INPUT MESSAGE HEADERS
For the INPUT DEVICES, COMPASS, LOG, NAV SENSOR, DEPTH &
WIND, it is necessary to select the message headers that are being
received.
1. Left click on the INPUT MESSAGE HEADERS input field to
reveal a drop down menu listing the available message HDT
HDM
headers for the selected input device. See example right HDG
which is for a serial compass input device.
2. From within the drop down menu,
3. Left click on the appropriate option to assign it to the selected Serial
Port:
Or
4. To remove a header if previously assigned, left click on the appropriate
option (this only applies to the time, VMSG and VBW headers on the
NAV SENSOR INPUT.)
Notes – You can set the Compass Message Header to HDT, HDM or
HDG.
You can set the Log Message Header to VBW or VHW. If you
have not configured a Log then a VBW sentence can be received
via the NAV sensor input.
The NAV Sensor is used to set: headers for position (GGA, GLL,
GLL&SNU or GLL&SLL); time (ZDA, ZZU or GLL); speed
(always set as VTG); routes and waypoints (RTE&WPL,
R00&WPL or BWC&BWR); log (VBW) if no LOG input is set. It
also sets VMS graphics (VMSG) if the system is used with a
VMS and next turn EBL and predicted vector are required.
The Depth Message Header can be set to DBT or DPT.
The Wind Message Header can be set to MWV, VWT or VWR.
65800010B 4-13
Chapter 4
OUTPUT DEVICE – RADAR PORT
1. Left click on the OUTPUT DEVICE input field to NO OUTPUT
reveal a drop down menu listing the available ALARM STATUS
device selections. See example right. AIS OUTPUT
2. From within the drop down menu, left click on the appropriate option for
the selected Serial Port.
Notes – The ALARM STATUS output reports the state of alarms local to
the system.
The AIS OUTPUT option is used to provide remote
acknowledgement of unacknowledged alarms on an AIS. It is
only available on PORTS 3, 4 and 5.
The TRACK TABLE output is only available on the RADAR
PORT.
The TRACK TABLE information can be referenced to the turning
unit (channel 1 for a dual channel system) or to the centre of the
ship.
Left click on the REFERENCE field to select ‘Turning Unit’ or
‘Centre’.
The Track Table output can be set for tracked targets only or for
AIS and tracked targets if an AIS INPUT DEVICE is set up.
Left click on the TARGETS field to select ‘Tracked targets only’
or ‘AIS & Tracked targets’.
OSD and RSD messages are transmitted every 2 seconds. The
TTM message rate depends on the number of tracked targets.
OUTPUT TYPE
Left click on the OUTPUT TYPE input field to toggle for (RS) 422 or
(RS) 232.
Serial Port 5 OUTPUT TYPE toggles between (RS) 422, (RS) 232 and
(RS) 485.
4-14 65800010B
4.1.2 Analogue I/P (COMPASS)
The ANALOGUE I/P box will not be available if a static site has been
selected. An analogue compass cannot be used if a serial compass has
been selected. The box will show COMPASS (Not in use).
COMPASS FITTED
This is an indication only of the type of compass board fitted. The options
are STANDARD, SPECIAL or NONE (if none fitted).
COMPASS TYPE
This is an indication of the type of compass information being received, and

will be set to SYNCHRO if a SPECIAL compass board is fitted, or NONE if
no compass board is fitted.
1. If a STANDARD compass board is fitted, left click
M STEPPER
on the COMPASS TYPE input field to reveal a S STEPPER
drop down menu listing the types available. See SYNCHRO
example right.
2. From within the drop down menu, left click on the appropriate option.
COMPASS RATIO/PULSES
When a STANDARD compass board is fitted, the ratio is set by the

compass type above and will be set to one of the following:
M STEPPER 180:1, S STEPPER 360:1 or SYNCHRO 360:1.
1. If a SPECIAL compass board is fitted, left click on the 180:1
COMPASS RATIO input field to reveal a drop down 90:1
menu listing the ratios available for the synchro. See 36:1
example right. 1:1
2. From within the drop down menu, left click on the appropriate option.
65800010B 4-15
Chapter 4
4.1.3 Analogue I/P (LOG)
The ANALOGUE I/P box will not be available if a static site has been
selected. This input can be selected even if a serial log has been selected.
The particular input required can be selected from the speed menu during
normal radar operation.
LOG FITTED
Left click on the LOG FITTED input field to toggle for YES or NO.
LOG TYPE
Left click on the LOG TYPE input field to toggle for NEG PULSES or POS
PULSES. Select NEG PULSES if the log is a closing contact type.
LOG RATIO/PULSES
1. Left click on the LOG RATIO/PULSES input field to highlight the PPNM
(Pulses/NM) number.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to change the number to that
required. The Range is 100 to 3000ppnm, in steps of 10.
3. Left click to accept new number
4-16 65800010B
5 Transceiver Settings
Left click on the TRANSCEIVER SETTINGS soft key to reveal the
TRANSCEIVER SETTINGS menu illustrated at Figure 4.4 below.
Note – The number of transceivers shown (TX A to TX F in the figure) will

depend on whether an Interswitch is fitted or not and whether it is a dual
channel radar. If a 65846 Interswitch is fitted, TX A to TX F will be
available. If a 65842, 65642 or 65416 Interswitch is fitted, only TX A and
TX B will be available. For a single channel radar without Interswitch,
only TX A will be available. For a dual channel radar without Interswitch,
only TX A and TX B will be available.
SAVE CHANGES AND RESTART INITIALISATION

TRANSCEIVER TX A TX B TX C TX D TX E TX F
DISPLAY MARKER HL HL HL HL HL HL
TU OFFSETS F/A A 5.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M
P/S P 7.5 M 0.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M 0.0 M
TXRX LOCATION ALOFT BLKHD ALOFT ALOFT ALOFT ALOFT
RF FEEDER LENGTH 4 M
VIDEO CABLE LENGTH
ANTENNA BEAMWIDTH
11 2.0°
to 11 2.0°
to 11 2.0°
to 11 2.0°
to 11 2.0°
to 11 2.0°
to
SECTOR BLANKING
START 0° 0° 0° 0° 0° 0°
END 0° 0° 0° 0° 0° 0°
START 180° 180° 180° 180° 180° 180°
END 180° 180° 180° 180° 180° 180°
SLAVE ONLY NO YES NO NO NO NO
INTERSWITCH
CONFIGURATION
(This line is used as a HELP LINE) RESET DEFAULTS
Figure 4.4 Initialisation Mode (Transceiver Settings) Display
65800010B 4-17
Chapter 4
5.1 Menu Items
You must complete the following procedures for all available transceivers.
The input of a manufacturer’s password may be required, see Section 2.1.
5.1.1 Display Marker

Under the selected transceiver heading, left click in the DISPLAY MARKER
input field to toggle for SL (Stern Line) or HL (Heading Line).
5.1.2 TU (Turning Unit) Offsets

The turning unit offsets are the distances fore/aft and port/stbd of the TU
from the centre of the ship. They are essential to provide accurate
presentation of own ship’s profile and output information. The range is
limited to half ship’s length or beam.
1. Under the selected transceiver heading, left click on the F/A input field.
If ship’s length is set to 0, a message “Setup ship’s length first” appears
at the lower left of the screen.
required.
Alternatively a right click on the F/A input field will reveal a drop down
numeric keypad from which fore or aft offset can be entered.
If STATIC SITE is selected, then FORE (AFT) changes to NORTH

(SOUTH) and F/A changes to N/S.
1. Under the selected transceiver heading, left click on the P/S input field.
If ship’s beam is set to 0, a message “Setup ship’s beam first” appears
at the lower left of the screen.
required.
Alternatively, a right click on the P/S input field will reveal a drop down
numeric keypad from which a port or starboard offset can be entered.
If STATIC SITE is selected, then PORT (STBD) changes to EAST (WEST)

and P/S changes to E/W.
5.1.3 TXRX Location

Under the selected transceiver heading, left click in the TXRX LOCATION
field to toggle for ALOFT or BLKHD (Bulkhead) depending on where the
transceiver is located.
4-18 65800010B
5.1.4 RF Feeder Length
This can only be entered for bulkhead located transceivers.
1. Under the selected transceiver heading, a left click on the RF FEEDER
LENGTH input field.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to change the RF feeder length
value to that required (between 0 and 99 metres).
keypad from which an RF feeder length can be entered.
The RF Feeder length is used to calculate an approximate trigger delay.

The exact trigger delay should be set as described in this chapter at
Section 8.4.
5.1.5 Video Cable Length

Under the selected transceiver heading, left click in the VIDEO CABLE
LENGTH field to select a cable length range appropriate for the total length
of video cable between the transceiver and the display. A left click will cycle
through the values, however a right click will reveal a pop up menu as
shown displaying the four options. The correct option can be selected by
left clicking on it.
When setting the cable length ensure that the total 0 to 10m
video cable length is used (Transceiver to Display, via 11 to 40m
Interswitch if fitted). 41 to 70m
>70m
For cable types FSJ1/75A and FSJ4/75A, apply the
correction factor, as shown in the table below, to the actual cable length to
determine the VIDEO CABLE LENGTH setting. Further information about
the selection of cable type is shown in Chapter 3, Section 1.3.6.
Actual Cable Correct selection on
Service Code (Cable Type)
Length Transceiver Settings
0 to 10 m 0 to 10 m
3236862 (PT1YM)
11 to 40 m 11 to 40 m
*91005248 (PT1YM)
41 to 70 m 41 to 70 m
0 to 25 m 0 to 10 m
MA00012534 (FSJ1-75) 26 to 100 m 11 to 40 m
*MA00014142 (FSJ1RN-75A) 101 m to 175 m 41 to 70 m
> 175 m > 70 m
0 to 50 m 0 to 10 m
MA00012880 (FSJ4-75A) 51 to 200 m 11 to 40 m
*MA00016089 (FSJ4RN-75A) 201 to 350 m 41 to 70 m
> 350 m > 70 m
* Denotes zero halogen cables.
65800010B 4-19
Chapter 4
5.1.6 Antenna Beamwidth
Under the selected transceiver heading, left click in the ANTENNA
BEAMWIDTH field to select a beamwidth appropriate for the transceiver’s
antenna. A left click will cycle through the values
A right click will reveal a pop up menu 0.5°

as shown. This shows all the options, 1.0° (BM 8’ X)
1.3° (BM 6’ X)
including associated BridgeMaster 1.6°
antenna types. An option can then be 2.0° (BM 4’ X, BM 12’ S)
selected by left clicking on it. Always 2.4°
select the option closest to the antenna 2.8° (BM 9’ S)
beamwidth if the exact figure is not 3.3°
available.
5.1.7 Sector Blanking

This allows radar transmissions to be inhibited between specified start and
end bearings.
1. Under the selected transceiver heading, a left click on one of the
SECTOR BLANKING input fields. The first START and END are for
SECTOR 1, and the second for SECTOR 2.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to change the start (or stop) value to
that required.
Note – As the END value must be clockwise with respect to the START
value, it may be necessary to set the STOP value before the
START value. For example, when the system is first used, both
values of SECTOR 1 are set to 0°. If the user requires a blanking
sector between 20° and 40°, it will be necessary to set the END to
40° and then set the START to 20°.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 as required.
keypad from which a sector start (or sector end) value can be entered.
Note – The two sectors associated with a particular transceiver are not
allowed to overlap – a warning prompt is given if this is attempted.
4-20 65800010B
5.1.8 Interswitch Configuration
If an Interswitch Unit has been selected on the INTERSWITCH
System Configuration menu (see Section 3.2.2), left CONFIGURATION
click on the INTERSWITCH CONFIGURATION soft RESET DEFAULTS
key in the bottom right-hand corner of the Transceiver
Settings menu.
This will reveal a drop down menu (see example right) which gives the
current transceiver/display configuration of the whole system with the
user’s display channel(s) highlighted in the left hand column.
Note – A right click at any time will close the menu.
The example shows the menu for a Type INTERSWITCH

CONFIGURATION
65842 (4-display, 2-transceiver) Interswitch
with the Interswitch in global mode. The TRANSCEIVER
rows labelled A, B, C & D represent the User’s Display

Highlighted
system Display channels, and the
columns headed A(S) & B(X) represent the
Transceivers, one S-Band and one X-
Band.
A light blue dash shows that no interswitched connection is configured

between the display channel and transceiver on the corresponding row and
column.
A dark blue dash indicates that a display or transceiver is not fitted.
An M shows that an interswitched connection is configured between the

display channel and transceiver on the corresponding row and column, and
that the display has Master control of the transceiver.
An S shows that an interswitched connection is configured between the

display channel and transceiver on the corresponding row and column, and
that the display is slaved to the transceiver.
Each display indicates the type of transceiver ((X) or (S)) that is selected for
that display. Other transceivers are shown with (-).
Consequently the example shows that the user’s display channel B

(highlighted) is connected to transceiver B (X-band) as Master, display
channel A is connected to transceiver A (S-band) as Slave, display channel
C is connected to transceiver A as Master and display channel D is not
fitted.
For Dual Channel systems you must connect the displays consecutively
and the wire connection must be to the lower letter, i.e. C if C & D displays
are used.
65800010B 4-21
Chapter 4
The amount of configuration that can be set from the menu will depend on
the type of Interswitch fitted, and how it is connected and set-up. You may
only be able to configure your own display. In all cases, the connections
that CAN be configured are displayed in light blue. Automatic built-in
safeguards will prevent you from making inappropriate selections. As a
rule, make Master connections first, followed by any Slave connections.
Note – If the Interswitch is set to Local mode, the MASTER, SLAVE and
SEND SETTINGS soft keys are not displayed in the Interswitch
Configuration menu, and the menu is for information only. Changes
can only be made when the Interswitch is set to Global mode, in
which case the configuration for the whole system can be set from
one display.
Making Display/Transceiver Connections
Within the Interswitch Configuration menu,

1. Left click on the MASTER or SLAVE soft key as appropriate (Bottom
right hand side of menu).
2. Position the cursor over the box that links the required Display (row) to
the required Transceiver (column).
3. Left click to update the box. (If necessary, previously entered
connections will be updated automatically in line with the general points
raised below.)
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 as necessary to make all required changes.
5. When configuration is complete left click on SEND SETTINGS soft key
and then, right click to close the menu.
Note – A right click without using the SEND SETTINGS soft key, will exit
the Interface Configuration menu without any changes being made.
The procedure on the previous page is subject to the following general

points.
• Connections that CANNOT be made or changed are displayed in dark
blue.
• Connections that CAN be made or changed are displayed in light blue,
and are highlighted in yellow when the cursor is placed over them.
• A single channel display can only be connected to one transceiver. A
dual channel display can be connected to one or two transceivers.
• One (but ONLY one) of the displays connected to a transceiver MUST
be a MASTER, unless the transceiver is set as a SLAVE only (see
Section 5.1.9).
4-22 65800010B
5.1.9 Slave Only Transceiver
The Slave only line at the bottom of the Transceiver Settings Display will
appear if either a 65842 or 65846 Interswitch is fitted or the system is a dual
channel radar.
The default setting is NO, but can be toggled to YES. This should only be
set to YES when that particular transceiver will always be a slave, as a
separate system is driving the transceiver as a master. Because this is
applied globally, it only needs to be set from one display for the complete
system.
In an interswitched system this data is sent to and stored in the Interswitch,

but will only be effective if the Interswitch is set to Global mode, otherwise a
Not available prompt will be displayed.
For a non-interswitched Dual Channel Radar, if SLAVE ONLY is set to YES,

the setting for TX A determines that transceiver A and channel 1 together
will be set to SLAVE ONLY; and the setting for TX B determines that
transceiver B and channel 2 together will be set to SLAVE ONLY.
If NO is set then that channel and transceiver will always be a master. This
data is stored inside the display.
65800010B 4-23
Chapter 4
6 Reset Defaults
The system can be restored to the SYSTEM DEFAULTS using the RESET
DEFAULTS soft key located in the bottom right hand corner of the display. This
facility required the input of the Manufacturer’s password, see Section 2.1 earlier
in the chapter for further information.
RESET DEFAULTS
1. Left click on the RESET DEFAULTS soft key.
2. This will reveal a drop down alphanumeric keypad for the input of the
Manufacturer’s password.
ENTER PASSWORD
3. Use the keypad to enter the password. AGAIN TO RESET THE
SYSTEM TO ITS
4. On input of a correct password, the dialog box DEFAULT SETTINGS
shown right is revealed.
ACCEPT CANCEL
5. Within the dialog box, left click on the ACCEPT
caption.
6. This will again reveal the alphanumeric keypad for input of the
Manufacturer’s password.
7. Use the keypad to re-enter the password.
A left click on the CANCEL caption within the dialog box will close the dialog box
and exit the reset facility without further action. The double entry of
Manufacturer’s password is used to confirm a positive and deliberate action to
restore the system defaults. All user data is reset apart from the ‘Hours Run’ and
‘Hours in Transmit’ counters.
4-24 65800010B
7 Restarting
Whenever changes are made, the system must be re-started to invoke the new
settings.
After all changes entered during the INITIALISATION process have been made,
the system must be re-started as follows.
1. Left click on the SAVE CHANGES AND SAVE CHANGES AND RESTART
RESTART soft key located in the top left
hand corner of the display.
This will reveal the dialog box shown on the right.
2. Within the dialog box, left click on ACCEPT. THE SYSTEM WILL
NOW RESTART
This will cause the system to restart with the new
settings, and reinstate password protection. The ACCEPT CANCEL
system will restart in STANDBY mode.
Note – A left click on the CANCEL caption will close the dialog box without
further action
65800010B 4-25
Chapter 4
8 Initialisation in Transmit Mode

Some operational parameters require the radar picture to ensure that they are set
correctly. These include some of the transceiver settings and the video settings.
Setting up the performance monitor also requires the radar picture. All of the
parameters that required setting up with the radar picture are accessed from the
SYSTEM menu.
These parameters will not normally need to be altered once set and therefore
require the manufacturer’s password to be entered before they can be changed,
although the current settings can be viewed without entering a password.
8.1 Selecting Transmit Mode

On all but dual channel radars the TRANSMIT soft key is located in the
bottom left hand corner. On dual channel displays the key is also a tell back
and shows STANDBY for each channel in the top left hand corner of the
display.
Select TRANSMIT mode by left clicking on the STANDBY/TRANSMIT soft

key.
Note – A slave display can only be switched to TRANSMIT if its associated

master display is in Transmit mode. In dual channel radars, both
channels may be selected to transmit during the initialisation
process.
AZ PI TOOLS
8.2 Accessing the SYSTEM Menu TARGET SYSTEM NAV
1. Position the screen cursor over the SYSTEM soft TRIAL MAPS BRILL
key.
2. Left click to reveal the SYSTEM menu shown on SYSTEM
the right. DEGAUSS
Note – A left click on the EXIT SYSTEM soft key will MEMORY CARD
VIDEO SETTINGS
close the menu and exit system settings. TX SETTINGS
PERF MONITOR
SYSTEM STATUS
TEST DATA
EXIT SYSTEM
4-26 65800010B
8.3 Accessing the VIDEO SETTINGS Menu
The video settings menu is mainly for information only.
VIDEO SETTINGS
However, all parameters except decrement may be
VIDEO INTEGRATED
manually altered in exceptional circumstances. The DECREMENT 063
menu pictured shows the normal/default settings for ALGO 1 ON
the parameters of a single channel radar, when the ALGO 4 ON
range is set to 3nm or above. ALGO 4 HIGH RANGES
1. Position the screen cursor over the VIDEO

SETTINGS option in the SYSTEM menu. EXIT VIDEO SET
2. Left click to reveal the VIDEO SETTINGS menu

shown on the right.
Note – A left click on the EXIT VIDEO SET soft key will close the menu and
exit video settings. In dual channel displays, the menu heading
shows the channel number to which the menu relates, i.e. VIDEO
SETTINGS 1 or VIDEO SETTINGS 2. A left click on this line will
toggle the channel number.
8.4 Adjusting the TX Settings

A group of settings must be stored in each radar display for all the
transceivers with which the display can operate (up to a maximum of 6).
8.4.1 Selecting the Required Transceiver

This is only available on Interswitched Systems.
Depending on the type of Interswitch Unit fitted, settings can be entered for
up to six transceivers which are identified by letter in the range from A to F.
1. From the TRANSMIT mode display, position the screen cursor over the
TX n (n) soft key at the top left hand side of the screen.
2. Left click to reveal a drop down menu containing the current
transceiver/display configuration from which the required transceiver
can be selected.
3. From within the drop down menu, select the required transceiver.
Select Transceiver ‘A’ as a Master initially. See User Guide, Chapter 3.
Note – The settings for a given transceiver must be the same on all
displays in the system.
65800010B 4-27
Chapter 4
8.4.2 Accessing the TX n SETTINGS Menu
1. Position the Screen cursor over the TX SETTINGS option in the
SYSTEM menu.
2. Left click to reveal the TX n SETTINGS menu shown on the right. The
letter n in the menu heading indicates the transceiver currently
selected, SP is for Short Pulse, MP for Medium Pulse and LP for Long
Pulse.
Note – A left click on the EXIT TX SETTINGS soft TX n SETTINGS
key will close the menu and exit TX settings. OFFSET nnn.n°
SAMPLE START SP nnn
For a dual channel radar there will be two TX SAMPLE START MP nnn
SETTING menus, one for each channel and SAMPLE START LP nnn
SAMPLE WIDTH nnn
its associated transceiver. This menu can VIDEO I/P UNSET
TRIG DELAY nnn
be toggled by left clicking on the TX n TURNDOWN SP nn
TURNDOWN MP nn
SETTING caption. However, with the TURNDOWN LP nn
exception of the video input (see 8.4.5) there COARSE TUNE
A/C LAW n
is only one set of settings per transceiver. A/C SPIKE n
The video input shows as VIDEO I/P 1 or EXIT TX SETTINGS
VIDEO I/P 2 as selected by the TX n

SETTING.
Manufacturer’s Password
Data in the TX n SETTINGS menu can only be changed after the

manufacturer’s password has been entered. Any attempt to change the
data will reveal an alphanumeric keypad prompting the input of the
manufacturer’s password, see sub-section 2.1 earlier in the chapter.
8.4.3 Setting the TX Parameters

The procedure for adjusting all of the parameters in the TX SETTINGS
menu, except the VIDEO I/P and COARSE TUNE settings, is as follows.
1. Within the TX SETTINGS menu, position the screen cursor over the
setting to be changed.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the setting to that
required.
4. Left click to select.
Alternatively, a right click will reveal a drop down numeric keypad from
which a setting can be entered.
4-28 65800010B
Information on the individual parameters of the Tx n Settings menu is given
below.
OFFSET (Range 0.0° to 359.9°, default 0.0°)
Standard Setting (Not Static Site)
This is the value of the Heading/Stern Line Offset, and is the angular
amount required to align the heading/stern marker with the fore/aft line and
hence compass of the ship. This adjustment is present to allow
compensation for the combined errors in physical positioning of the scanner
unit and the ‘squint angle’ of the antenna. When a Stern Line is selected in
place of a Heading Line (see Section 5.1.1 earlier in the chapter), 180° must
be added to the offset value. The nominal offset value required for
BridgeMaster E scanning units is 350° (170° for Stern Line).
Static Site Setting
This offset is the angular value required to align the heading marker with the
‘straight ahead’ view from the static site window. The adjustment should be
made with the compass angle set to 000° and the display in N UP mode.
The compass angle should then be adjusted to give north-up view. This
allows the normal window view to be shown in C UP mode.
Note – When checking alignment, allowance should be made for the

position of the scanner unit in relation to the radar display.
SAMPLE START SP, MP, LP (Range 6 to 350, defaults 48, 90, 250
respectively)
Values from the following table should be input, according to the height of
the antenna above sea level.
Sample Start
Antenna Height
Short Pulse Medium Long
(metres)
(SP) Pulse (MP) Pulse (LP)
0 - 10 48 90 250
11 - 20 75 150 250
21 - 30 100 150 250
31 - 40 130 180 250
41 - 50 160 200 260
51 - 60 180 200 280
SAMPLE WIDTH (Range 6 to 70, default 14)
It should not normally be necessary to change this setting from its default
value.
65800010B 4-29
Chapter 4
TURNDOWN SP, MP, LP (Range 0 to 15, default 6 for SP, 7 for MP, 8 for
LP)
It should not normally be necessary to change these settings from their

default values.
Note – Older processor units (manufactured before 2000) used values of

14 for SP, 11 for MP and 8 for LP.
COARSE TUNING
The current level of coarse tuning is indicated by the shaded bar behind the
COARSE TUNE caption in the TX n SETTINGS menu. This bar indicates
the level in percentage terms with 0% on the left, 100% on the right. It will
only be possible to set the tuning if the Display is a MASTER to the
transceiver.
1. ENSURE that the fine tuning indicator in the bottom left hand corner of
the transmit display is set for MAN (Manual) tuning (i.e. AFC off) for that
transceiver.
2. Position the screen cursor over the COARSE TUNE caption in the TX n
SETTINGS menu.
3. Left click to make the bar active. The bar will appear yellow.
4. Move the cursor control left to reduce the yellow bar to a minimum.
Slowly increase the bar by moving the cursor to the right.
5. If radar returns are available, adjust the bar to maximise the display of
the radar returns.
6. If no radar returns are available, adjust the coarse tuning bar so that the
fine tuning bar (bottom left hand corner of screen) is at maximum after
its first minimum point has been reached.
7. On a dual channel radar there are two bars, the top relates to channel 1
and the bottom to channel 2.
8. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar. The bar will return to
its dimmed shaded state.
9. If radar returns are available, select AFC, and confirm that the radar
returns are not seriously degraded. If they are, repeat Step 4, and
ensure that the first tuning maximum is selected.
4-30 65800010B
A/C LAW (Range 0 to 7, default 3)
Use the table below for the required setting for the Anti-Clutter Law.
Antenna Height A/C LAW
above sea level (m) Setting
32 and above 7
28 – 31 6
24 – 27 5
20 – 23 4
16 – 19 3
12 – 15 2
4 – 11 1
3 and below 0
A/C SPIKE (Range 0 to 3, default 3)
It should not normally be necessary to change this setting from its default
value.
VIDEO I/P (Defaults to UNSET)
This menu item indicates whether the radar video input level to the display
processor has been set up. It is advisable to set the Coarse Tune level
before setting the Video I/P level. The VIDEO INPUT level should ONLY be
set when the Master is transmitting in LONG PULSE. The default is
UNSET, but after the set up procedure has been initiated, it will show SET
OK, SET LOW or SET HIGH as appropriate.
1. Within the TX SETTINGS menu, position the screen cursor over the
VIDEO I/P option.
2. Left click to initiate the set up procedure.
3. The result of the set up procedure, which can be SET OK, SET LOW or
SET HIGH, is shown after a period.
4. After the result of the Video I/P setting is shown in the menu, left click
on the EXIT TX SETTINGS soft key to close the menu.
TRIG DELAY (Range 6 to 350, default 12)
Note – Default is adjusted by RF feeder length in initialisation if Bulkhead

Tx is fitted.
For this setting, the radar must be set to the shortest practicable range, and
the value adjusted to display known features at the correct range. Echoes
from quaysides should appear straight with no ‘pushing’ or ‘pulling’ near the
centre of the picture.
65800010B 4-31
Chapter 4
8.4.4 Selecting and Setting the other Transceivers in Interswitched Systems
1. Use the procedure given at Section 8.4.1 to select the next transceiver.
2. Use the procedures given at Sections 8.4.2 and 8.4.3 to set the TX
parameters for the selected transceiver.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all system transceivers have been set up.
8.4.5 Dual Channel Display Settings
For non interswitched dual channel radars:
1. Position the screen cursor over the TX A SETTING caption in the menu.
2. Left click to reveal the TX B SETTING menu.
3. Use the procedure given in Section 8.4.3 to set the TX parameters for
TX B.
For interswitched dual channel radars, in addition to the parameters set up
already, the VIDEO I/P settings must be carried out for each transceiver on
each channel individually.
1. In the top left hand corner, set both channels to the same transceiver
(one Master, one Slave), TX n using the Interswitch configuration menu.
Refer to the User Guide, Chapter 3 if necessary.
2. Select the TX SETTINGS menu from the SYSTEM menu.
3. If UNSET appears on the VIDEO I/P 1 line, adjust the video input level,
as shown in Section 8.4.3.
4. Left click on the TX n SETTINGS menu heading.
5. If UNSET appears on the VIDEO I/P 2 line, adjust the video input level
as shown in Section 8.4.3.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Video I/P has been set for all transceivers.
4-32 65800010B
8.5 Selecting the Performance Monitoring Facility
1. If an Interswitch unit is fitted, select the required transceiver that is fitted
with the Performance Monitor you wish to set up (see Section 8.4).
Ensure that coarse tuning has been carried out. (See Section 8.4.3).
2. With reference to the User Guide, select the following operating
parameters:
•
Transmit Mode
•
12nm range scale, LP
•
AFC ON (Fine tuning)
•
Manual clutter processing with A/C Rain and A/C Sea set to
minimum.
3. Left click on the SYSTEM soft key to reveal the SYSTEM menu.
4. Select the PERF MONITOR option from the SYSTEM menu.
5. Enter the Manufacturer’s Password.
After the password has been entered the TX n PERF MONITOR

PERF MONITOR menu will be revealed, see
example right. TUNE
XR
6. On a dual channel display, it will be possible XT
to left click on the TX n PERF MONITOR
line in the menu to select the other MODE SYSTEM
transceivers performance monitor. EXIT PERF MONITOR
Warning Prompt
If sector blanking is active, the warning prompt shown below is displayed

continually while the Performance Monitor drop down menu is displayed.
Sector blanking inhibited
8.5.1 Selecting the Required Performance Monitor

1. Position the screen cursor over the MODE caption in the menu.
2. Left click to toggle to MODE SYSTEM or MODE RX as required. Set to
MODE RX initially.
Note – While the PM drop down menu is being displayed and the PM has
been set up, four arcs are shown on the radar screen. These arcs
are approximately 0.3nm apart and start at a range of 8nm. The
arcs extend from 290° to 320° (S Band), or from 155° to 185° (X
Band), with respect to the heading line. The precise bearing value
will alter depending on the Heading/Stern line offset value.
The shaded bars above the MODE SYSTEM or MODE RX caption in the
PM menu indicate the PM tuning point and attenuator levels. The particular
mode selected (SYSTEM or RX) will determine which of the shaded bars
(TUNE, XR and XT) can be activated.
65800010B 4-33
Chapter 4
8.5.2 Adjusting the Performance Monitor
1. Left click on the XT caption to make the shaded bar active. The bar will
appear yellow.
2. Use the cursor control (Joystick or Trackerball) to reduce the bar to
zero.
3. Left click to de-activate the bar.
4. Left click on the TUNE caption to make the shaded bar active. The bar
will appear yellow.
5. Use the cursor control to give maximum presentation of the four
Performance Monitor arcs that should be visible in the video circle
sector from 290° to 320° (S Band) or from 155° to 185° (X Band). See
note below.
6. Left click to de-activate the bar. The bar will be returned to its dimmed
shaded state.
Note – In both modes of operation (SYSTEM and RX), the performance
monitor shows a maximum of four arcs on the display. The TUNE
level should be adjusted for maximum visibility of the four arcs. The
arcs are spaced at 5dB intervals. If during operation performance
decreases below the second arc, it shows a 10dB drop in
performance.
7. Left click on the XT caption to make the shaded bar active. The bar will
appear yellow.
8. Use the cursor control to adjust the bar so that the outermost arc is just
visible.
shaded state.
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 inclusive until no further adjustment is required.
11. Left click on the MODE line of the menu to select MODE SYSTEM.
12. Left click on the XR caption to make the shaded bar active. The bar will
appear yellow.
13. Use the cursor control to reduce the bar to zero.
14. Left click to de-activate the bar.
15. Left click on the TUNE caption to make the shaded bar active. The bar
will appear yellow.
16. Use the cursor control to give maximum presentation of the four
Performance Monitor arcs that should be visible in the video circle
sector from 290° to 320° (S Band), or form 155° to 185° (X Band).
shaded state.
18. Left click on the XR caption to activate the shaded bar. The bar will
appear yellow.
19. Use the cursor control to adjust the bar so that the outermost arc is just
visible.
4-34 65800010B
shaded state.
21. Repeat steps 15 to 20 inclusive until no further adjustment is required.
22. Left click on the EXIT PERF MONITOR soft key (below the PM menu)
to complete the adjustment procedure and close the menu.
23. Left click on EXIT SYSTEM to return to normal transmit mode.
8.6 Operating the Performance Monitor
When viewing the Performance Monitor as described in the User Guide
(Chapter 3), the bar indicating the tuning level must be adjusted for maximum
presentation of the four arcs to correctly ascertain performance. No
password is required for this operation.
Note – If for a period of 10 seconds, neither key (left or right) is pressed nor
the screen cursor is moved, then the PM drop down menu is
removed from display automatically.
65800010B 4-35
Chapter 4

intentionally
4-36 65800010B
Chapter 4
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION REFERENCE No
REF PARAMETER OPTIONS/COMMENTS SETTING

3.2.1 STATIC SITE YES
NO
3.2.2 INTERSWITCH NOT FITTED
65842 2 –WAY
65846 6 – WAY
65642 2 – WAY
65416 2 – WAY
3.2.3 DISPLAY MODE MASTER
(If single channel without INTERSWITCH) SLAVE
3.2.4 LANGUAGE ENGLISH
JAPANESE
3.2.5 DISTANCE UNITS NM (Nautical Miles)
KM (Kilometres)
SM (Statute Mile)
3.2.6 REMOTE ALARMS (Tick individual alarms to indicate a YES selection)
CONTROL PANEL MVR TIME
PROCESSOR TRACKS FULL
DISPLAY RESET GUARD LINE
RADAR RESET ZONES FULL
GRAPHICS RESET AZ OVERLOAD
MEMORY GZ ENTRY
RADAR CONFIG AZ ENTRY
RADAR LINK LOST TARGET
STBY/TX ERR ROUTE ERROR
AZI ERROR APPROACH
TX COMMS OFF TRACK
INTERSWITCH LEG CHANGE
LOW VIDEO WATCH ALARM
COMPASS MOTION MODE
MISSING HL CHECKSUM
MISSING SL AIS INTEGRITY
NO SCAN HL AIS INPUT
TX BIST DEPTH INPUT
VISION WIND INPUT
TRIG ERROR ALARM INPUT
LOG ERROR VMS GRAPHIC
LOST REF PLOT UPDATE
BOW CROSS GPS QUALITY
CPA/TCPA AUTO TIDE
NAV INPUT TEMPERATURE
NAV SPEED CARD BATTERY
POSITION PC CARD
PL ERROR EXTERNAL MAP
TM RESET CARD FULL
3.2.7 SHIP LENGTH (Not Static Site) In METRES
3.2.8 SHIP BEAM (Not Static Site) In METRES
3.2.9 MAX RATE OF TURN (Not Static Site) In DEGREES/MINUTE
3.2.10 STANDARD RATE OF TURN (Not Static Site) In DEGREES/MINUTE
3.2.11 NAV SENSOR OFFSETS FORE or AFT (NORTH or SOUTH)
(w.r.t. centre ship) In METRES
PORT or STBD (EAST or WEST)
In METRES
3.2.12 VIGILANCE ALARM YES
(ONLY available if Interface Unit fitted or dual channel) NO
65800010B Sheet 1 of 20
Chapter 4
Complete this Sheet for Serial Port No 1
I/O OPTIONS INSTALLATION REFERENCE No
SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT No 1

4.1.1 INPUT DEVICE NO INPUT
(4800 BAUD) COMPASS
LOG
NAV SENSOR (input only)
DEPTH
WIND
TARGET RENAME
TARGET RENAME (VMS Source)
NAV LINES INTERFACE
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
ROUTE & WPT TRANSFER
(Other)
4.1.1 INPUT MESSAGE HEADERS
4.1.1 OUTPUT DEVICE NO OUTPUT

ALARMS STATUS
4.1.1 OUTPUT TYPE (RS) 422

(RS) 232
Sheet 2 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4

(4800 BAUD) COMPASS
LOG
DEPTH
WIND
TARGET RENAME
NAV LINES INTERFACE
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
(Other)

ALARMS STATUS

(RS) 232
65800010B Sheet 3 of 20
Chapter 4
(For Dual Channel Radar or if an interface unit is fitted)

4.1.1 BAUD RATE 4800
38k4
(Other)
COMPASS
LOG
DEPTH
WIND
TARGET RENAME
NAV LINES INTERFACE
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
AIS INPUT
(Other)

ALARMS STATUS
AIS OUTPUT

(RS) 232
Sheet 4 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4
(For Dual Channel Radar or if an Interface Unit is fitted)

38k4
(Other)
COMPASS
LOG
DEPTH
WIND
TARGET RENAME
NAV LINES INTERFACE
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
AIS INPUT
(Other)

ALARMS STATUS
AIS OUTPUT

(RS) 232
65800010B Sheet 5 of 20
Chapter 4
(For Dual Channel Radar or if an Interface Unit is fitted)

38k4
(Other)
COMPASS
LOG
DEPTH
WIND
TARGET RENAME
NAV LINES INTERFACE
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
AIS INPUT
(Other)

ALARMS STATUS
AIS OUTPUT

(RS) 232
(RS) 485
Sheet 6 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4
Complete this Sheet for the RADAR Port
The RADAR port has NO Input Device and therefore NO Input Message Header.
SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT No RADAR

(4800 BAUD) TRACK TABLE
4.1.1 REFERENCE: Turning Unit
Centre
4.1.1 TARGETS: Tracked targets only
AIS & Tracked targets only
(RS) 232
65800010B Sheet 7 of 20
Chapter 4

Analogue Inputs are NOT applicable to Static Sites
4.1.2 ANALOGUE I/P (COMPASS)
COMPASS FITTED STANDARD
SPECIAL
NONE
COMPASS TYPE If STANDARD compass M STEPPER
board fitted S STEPPER
SYNCHRO
If NO compass board fitted NONE
COMPASS RATIO/PULSES If SPECIAL compass board 180:1
fitted 90:1
36:1
1:1
4.1.3 ANALOGUE I/P (LOG)
LOG FITTED YES
NO
LOG TYPE NEG PULSES
POS PULSES
LOG RATIO/PULSES PPNM
Sheet 8 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4
The number of Transceivers in a system is dependent on the type of Interswitch
fitted.
Complete for Transceiver ‘A’.
TRANSCEIVER SETTINGS INSTALLATION REFERENCE No
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER ID A

5.1.1 DISPLAY MARKER SL (Stern Line)
HL (Heading Line)
5.1.2 TU (Turning Unit) OFFSETS FORE or AFT (NORTH or SOUTH)
(w.r.t. centre ship) In METRES m
In METRES m
5.1.3 TXRX LOCATION ALOFT
BULKHEAD
5.1.4 RF FEEDER LENGTH For Bulkhead Units ONLY. In METRES m
5.1.5 VIDEO CABLE LENGTH In Metres m
5.1.6 ANTENNA BEAMWIDTH In Degrees °
5.1.7 SECTOR BLANKING SECTOR 1 START °
END °
SECTOR 2 START °
END °
5.1.9 SLAVE ONLY YES/NO
Complete for Transceiver ‘B’.
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER ID B

HL (Heading Line)
In METRES m
BULKHEAD
END °
SECTOR 2 START °
END °
65800010B Sheet 9 of 20
Chapter 4
Complete for Transceiver ‘C’.
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER ID C

HL (Heading Line)
In METRES m
BULKHEAD
END °
SECTOR 2 START °
END °
Complete for Transceiver ‘D’.
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER ID D

HL (Heading Line)
In METRES m
BULKHEAD
END °
SECTOR 2 START °
END °
Sheet 10 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4
Complete for Transceiver ‘E’.
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER ID E

HL (Heading Line)
In METRES m
BULKHEAD
END °
SECTOR 2 START °
END °
Complete for Transceiver ‘F’.
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER ID F

HL (Heading Line)
In METRES m
BULKHEAD
END °
SECTOR 2 START °
END °
65800010B Sheet 11 of 20
Chapter 4
REF PARAMETER
5.1.8 INTERSWITCH CONNECTIONS
Indicate the Display/Transceiver links by drawing lines between appropriate displays (lettered boxes) and
transceivers (lettered triangles). Use solid lines to indicate master connections and dotted lines to
indicate slave connections. Circle the User’s Display.
A (X) B (X) C (X) D (X) E (X) F (X)

u u u u u u
A B C D E F
NOTE – The number of Displays and Transceivers is dependent on the type of Interswitch fitted. The
figure above allows for the maximum arrangement.
Sheet 12 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4
Initialisation settings in TRANSMIT MODE
TRANSMIT MODE INSTALLATION REFERENCE No

8.3 VIDEO SETTINGS VIDEO
(Range scale MUST be set to 3nm or above) ALGO 1
ALGO 4 (ON/OFF)
ALGO 4 (HIGH RANGES/ALL RANGES)
The number of Transceivers in a system is dependent on the type of Interswitch

fitted.

8.4.1 TRANSCEIVER Selected (TX) A
8.4.2 TX SETTINGS Menu Selected (From SYSTEM Menu)
8.4.3 OFFSET 0.0° to 359.9° (Default 0.0°)
SAMPLE START SP 6 to 250 (Default 48)
SAMPLE START MP 6 to 350 (Default 90)
SAMPLE START LP 6 to 350 (Default 250)
SAMPLE WIDTH 6 to 70 (Default 14)
VIDEO INPUT (1) SET OK
(Channel 1 on a dual channel radar) SET LOW
SET HIGH
TRIGGER DELAY 6 to 350 (Default 12)
TURNDOWN SP 0 to 15 (Default 6)
TURNDOWN MP 0 to 15 (Default 7)
TURNDOWN LP 0 to 15 (Default 8)
COARSE TUNING completed (COARSE TUNE)
A/C LAW 0 to 7 (Default 3)
A/C SPIKE 0 to 3 (Default 3)
8.4.5 VIDEO INPUT (2) SET OK
(Only applicable to channel 2 on a dual SET LOW
channel radar) SET HIGH
65800010B Sheet 13 of 20
Chapter 4

8.4.1 TRANSCEIVER Selected (TX) B
SET HIGH

8.4.1 TRANSCEIVER Selected (TX) C
SET HIGH
Sheet 14 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4

8.4.1 TRANSCEIVER Selected (TX) D
SET HIGH

8.4.1 TRANSCEIVER Selected (TX) E
SET HIGH
65800010B Sheet 15 of 20
Chapter 4

8.4.1 TRANSCEIVER Selected (TX) F
SET HIGH
Setting up the Performance Monitor (Where applicable)

8.5 TRANSCEIVER ‘A’ Selected (TX) A
COARSE TUNING carried out (Sub-section 8.4.3)
PERF MONITOR FACILITY selected (From SYSTEM menu)
8.5.1 MODE RX Selected
8.5.2 PERFORMANCE MONITOR TUNE Adjusted
PERFORMANCE MONITOR XT Adjusted
MODE SYSTEM Selected
PERFORMANCE MONITOR TUNE Adjusted
PERFORMANCE MONITOR XR Adjusted
Sheet 16 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4

8.5 TRANSCEIVER ‘A’ Selected (TX) B

8.5 TRANSCEIVER ‘A’ Selected (TX) C

8.5 TRANSCEIVER ‘A’ Selected (TX) D
65800010B Sheet 17 of 20
Chapter 4

8.5 TRANSCEIVER ‘A’ Selected (TX) E

8.5 TRANSCEIVER ‘A’ Selected (TX) F
Sheet 18 of 20 65800010B
Chapter 4
COMMENTS
Use this space to comment on any anomalies arising during the commissioning. Use the next sheet if
necessary.
COMMISSIONING ENGINEER
Printed Name: Signature: Date:
65800010B Sheet 19 of 20
Chapter 4
COMMENTS (continued)
Use this space to comment on any anomalies arising during the commissioning. Use a continuation
sheet if necessary.
COMMISSIONING ENGINEER
Printed Name: Signature: Date:
Sheet 20 of 20 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Operator Tests
CHAPTER 5
OPERATOR TESTS
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................3
2 Test Menus ..........................................................................................................4
2.1 System Status...........................................................................................................4
2.2 Test Data ..................................................................................................................5
3 Monitor Test Mode ..............................................................................................7

3.1 Accessing the Monitor Test Mode.............................................................................7
3.2 Return to Standby (Exit from the Monitor Test Mode)...............................................7
4 Testing an FPD monitor......................................................................................8

4.1 Testing Melford Kit Models .......................................................................................9
4.2 Testing Melford Desktop Models ............................................................................11
4.3 Testing Original Hatteland Models ..........................................................................13
4.4 Testing New Hatteland Models ...............................................................................15
4.5 Normal Operation – All FPD Models .......................................................................18
5 Testing a CRT Monitor......................................................................................19

5.1 CRT Test Pattern 1 .................................................................................................19
5.2 CRT Test Pattern 2 .................................................................................................21
5.3 CRT Test Pattern 3 .................................................................................................22
65800010B 5-1
Operator Tests Ship’s Manual

intentionally
5-2 65800010B
1 Introduction
A series of Test Menus let you monitor certain operating parameters of the radar
while the system is operating. The results of the selected transceiver’s Built-in
Self Tests (BIST) can also be viewed. This lets you check parameters affecting
the operation of the system, and any fault arising to be defined as external or
internal.
You can also select three test patterns to check the video operation of the
monitor. You access these patterns using the MONITOR TEST mode.
65800010B 5-3
2 Test Menus AZ PI TOOLS
You access the TEST MENU facilities from the SYSTEM TARGET SYSTEM NAV
menu. TRIAL MAPS BRILL
Accessing the SYSTEM Menu

SYSTEM
1. Position the screen cursor over the SYSTEM soft key.
DEGAUSS
2. Left click to reveal the SYSTEM menu shown on the
right. MEMORY CARD
VIDEO SETTINGS
Note – A left click on the EXIT SYSTEM soft key will close TX SETTINGS
the menu and exit the system facilities. PERF MONITOR
SYSTEM STATUS
TEST DATA
EXIT SYSTEM
2.1 System Status

1. Position the screen cursor over the SYSTEM SYSTEM STATUS
STATUS option in the SYSTEM menu.
2. Left click to reveal the SYSTEM STATUS menu SYSTEM STATUS n
shown on the right. DISPLAY C5.06
RADAR C5.06
3. In dual channel radars the channel number (that GRAPHICS C5.06
the radar processor information relates to) is INTERSWITCH V2.2
shown on the top line of the menu. Left click on VISION UNFITTED
VISION MEM UNFITTED
this line to toggle between the channels ATK FITTED
DONGLE ARPA
Note – A left click on the EXIT SYSTEM STATUS soft MONITOR TYPE 250
1365 × 1024 IL
key will close the menu and exit the system HOURS RUN 06038
HOURS IN TX 05827
status facility.
EXIT SYSTEM STATUS
Status Display
The SYSTEM STATUS menu gives an indication of prevailing conditions, as
listed below, which are for information only.
• The software version for the Display Processor
• The software version for the Radar Processor
• The software version for the Graphics Processor
• The software version for the Interswitch (if fitted)
• Whether Vision is fitted on Radar Processor board
• Whether extra Vision memory is fitted on Radar Processor board
• Whether Autotrack is fitted on Radar Processor board
• Type of dongle fitted (eg: ARPA)
• Monitor size and line rate (IL = interlaced)
• Hours run (Incremented by one for every full hour that the display is
ON)
• Hours in Transmit (Incremented for every hour in Transmit mode)
5-4 65800010B
2.2 Test Data
The test data facilities provide the means of monitoring system performance
and displaying the results of Built-in Self Tests (BIST). BIST tests the
selected transceiver’s hardware.
Selecting the Test Data Menu
TEST DATA
1. Position the screen cursor over the TEST DATA
option in the SYSTEM menu. TX n TEST DATA
2. Left click to reveal the TEST DATA menu shown AZI PPR ----
on the right. PRF
HDG MKR
----
----
3. In dual channel radars, left click on the top line of PULSE LOG
STD COMPASS
1
2
the menu to select the required transceiver.
STATUS
BIST
Note – A left click on the EXIT TEST DATA soft key
will close the menu and exit the test data
facility.
2.2.1 Input Status EXIT TEST DATA
The first half of the TEST DATA menu monitors the
status of the following inputs:
• Azimuth pulses per revolution
• Pulse repetition frequency
• Heading contact
• Log pulses
• Analogue compass
2.2.2 Transceiver Status
STATUS
1. Position the screen cursor over the STATUS
option in the TEST DATA menu.
TX n STATUS
2. Left click to reveal the drop down menu shown on
SART UNFITTED
the right. PERFMON FITTED
TX TYPE BME
3. In dual channel radars, left click on the top line of TX POWER X (10)
SLAVE ONLY NO
the menu to select the required transceiver.
EXIT TX STATUS
Note – A left click on the EXIT TX STATUS soft key
will close the menu and exit the TX status facility.
The parameters monitored in the TX STATUS menu are as follows:
• Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) fitted or not fitted
• Performance Monitor (PERFMON) fitted or not fitted
• Transceiver Type: BridgeMaster E (BME), BridgeMaster (BM) or
UNKNOWN
• Transmitter Power: X(10), X(25) or S(30)
• Slave only: YES or NO for Slave Transceiver only.
65800010B 5-5
2.2.3 Results of the TX BIST
BIST
The TX BIST (Transceiver Built-in Self Test) results
are shown for the selected transceiver. TX n BIST
1. Position the screen cursor over the BIST option MAGNETRON nA
MODULATOR nn V
in the TEST DATA menu. +30V LINE nn V
+12V LINE nn V
2. Left click to reveal the TX BIST menu shown on SPARK GAP PASS
the right. CORRUPT DATA
MESSG TO TXRX
PASS
PASS
3. In dual channel radars, left click on the top line of HDG MARKER
CHARGE TRIG
PASS
PASS
the menu to select the required transceiver. MODULATOR TRIG PASS
S/W VERSION nn.n
Note – A left click on the EXIT TX BIST soft key will
close the menu and exit the TX BIST facility. EXIT TX BIST
• The parameters monitored in the TX BIST menu are as follows:

• Magnetron Current. AMPS
• Modulator Voltage. VOLTS
• +30V supply line. VOLTS
• +12V supply line. VOLTS
• Spark Gap. PASS or FAIL
• Corrupt Data (Messages received by the transceiver are corrupt).
PASS or FAIL
• Messg to TxRx (Messages not being received by TxRx): PASS or
FAIL
• HDG Marker (Transceiver has detected a heading marker failure):
PASS or FAIL
• Charge Trigger. PASS or FAIL
• Modulator Trigger: PASS or FAIL
• Software Version (Version of software fitted to transceiver or
transceiver compatibility unit)
5-6 65800010B
3 Monitor Test Mode

Monitors are supplied fully set-up. If the picture appears to be incorrect, then
follow the procedures below.
Note – Make sure you use the specified video cables with these monitors –
otherwise you may not get the correct picture presentation.
You can check correct picture presentation on the monitor screen by selecting
the MONITOR TEST mode from the STANDBY display.
3.1 Accessing the Monitor Test Mode
From within the standby display, left click on the MONITOR TEST soft key
(bottom left hand corner). You will be prompted for the input of the
Manufacturer’s or Navigator’s password, see Chapter 4, Section 2.1.
After you enter the password, the Test Pattern 1 display is
revealed (one of three test patterns available) as shown in
the following sections.
Follow the appropriate part of Section 4 below for an FPD
monitor or Section 5 for a CRT monitor.
3.2 Return to Standby (Exit from the Monitor Test Mode)
From within the Monitor Test mode (Pattern 1 and Pattern 3 only).
1. Position the screen cursor over the EXIT soft key.
2. Left click to exit from the Monitor Test mode and
return to the STANDBY mode display.
65800010B 5-7
4 Testing an FPD monitor
The test method depends on the model of FPD. Identify the model and use the
appropriate section below.
Although there are three test patterns available, only Test Pattern 1 as shown
below is necessary to check an FPD monitor. Also the only functions in the
Monitor Test Menu that operate are HIDE MENU and PATTERN. For a full
description of these functions refer to Section 5 Testing a CRT Monitor. The EXIT
key is used to return to the STANDBY mode from the Monitor Test Mode.
Blue/Black
Blue/Black
+
Black level (blue)
Preset brightness
Black level (red)
PATTERN >>
Green/Black
GreenBlack
Preset contrast
-
Green gain
Blue gain
EXIT
Red gain
Red/Black
MONITOR TEST
Red/Black
Black
Black
Vert. Linearity
HIDE MENU
Vertical shift
E/W correction
DEGAUSS
Horiz. Phase
Trapezoidal
Blue
------------------------------------ 6 Shades of Grey--------------------------------
Height
Width
Red
Magenta
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
White
Green/Black Blue/Black
Green/Black Blue/Black
Red/Black
Red/Black
Note – That the black and white stripes across the bottom of the pattern
may not be visible on some monitors depending on the format. The
outside border should show as a double white line when properly
adjusted (except where noted).
5-8 65800010B
4.1 Testing Melford Kit Models
This section is for models 65815A & D and 65817A & D.
Remove the small cover held by two screws on the front of the monitor fascia
to reveal the ‘set-up’ controls. Turn the Contrast and Brightness controls fully
clockwise. Check that the 'ON' LED adjacent to the set-up controls is
illuminated. Illumination of the 'OFF' LED indicates a lack of video input sync
signals.
Test Pattern 1 should be fully visible, and completely fill the screen, when
you have adjusted the set-up controls correctly.
The set-up controls on the flat panel display are shown below:
The LEDs marked 'B', 'C', 'W', 'CLK', 'V-S' and 'H-S', and the DIP switches
are non-operational.
The set-up parameters are adjusted by means of on-screen menus.
The pushbuttons control the on-screen menus as indicated in the following
table:
Button Operation
SELECT Chooses a Menu.
UP/DOWN Changes value of Selected
Parameter.
RESET Used to return to previous menu.
Setting the parameters:
1. Push the ‘Select’ Button and the Main Menu
appears.
2. Use the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll through
each of the options. Use the ‘Select’ Button
to enter the required option.
3. Use the ‘Reset’ Button to exit the chosen
option and return to the Main Menu.
Note – Selection and adjustment is the same in all submenus. It is described

fully in the Brightness Menu description below.
65800010B 5-9
Brightness Menu:
Note – It should not be necessary to change this parameter from its factory
default setting.
By selecting Brightness from the Main Menu and
pressing ‘Select’, the Brightness menu appears.
Use the UP/DOWN keys to select one of the
parameters then use the ‘Select’ Button to
highlight the option. The arrow is removed and the
selected option is shown with black text in a yellow
box. Use the UP/DOWN keys to adjust its value.
Reset each of the parameters to its default setting
by selecting the required parameter and pressing ‘Select’ again. You are
asked if you want to reset the parameter. Selecting YES will set it to default
by using the UP/DOWN and the Select button. Selecting NO will set the
parameter to the value set by the user.
The ‘Reset’ button de-selects the current parameter and the arrow
reappears, as above, and allowing the next parameter to be selected.
Pressing ‘Reset’ again will return to the Main Menu.
Contrast Menu
Note – It should not be necessary to change this
parameter from its factory default setting.
This menu allows the user to control each
individual RGB, as shown in the above figure and
adjust its value. It can be reset back to its default
condition as described in the Brightness Menu.
Position Menu
The position menu allows the user to adjust the Horizontal Size,
Horizontal/Vertical Position and the Clock Phase.
Each of the parameters can be individually reset.
If all parameters need to be reset then selecting
Reset from the menu will list all the parameters to
be reset. Use the UP/DOWN buttons to select
YES and confirm with the ‘Select’ Button.
Note – Correct Clock Phase adjustment can only
be achieved if the Horizontal Size is
correctly set. After Clock Phase
adjustment has been carried out, it may
be necessary to re-adjust Horizontal
Position to re-centre the image.
Information Menu
The information menu displays the current pixel size of the image along with
Horizontal and Vertical frequencies.
All Reset
Selecting this option from the Main Menu allows the user to reset all
parameters in all menus to their default values.
5-10 65800010B
4.2 Testing Melford Desktop Models
This section is for models 65815C and 65817C.
Remove the bezel by undoing the four pozidriv screws. The bezel is attached
to the chassis with an electrical earth bond wire. Do not allow the bezel to
hang from the bond wire: either remove the bond wire or support the bezel.
Turn the brilliance control fully clockwise.
Test Pattern 1 should be fully visible, and completely fill the screen, when the
set-up controls are correctly adjusted.
Note – 65815C monitors use CRT Test Pattern 1 and do not show the black
and white striped pattern across the bottom of the screen and only
show a single line border. 65817C monitors show a black and white
striped pattern across the bottom of the screen and a double line
border.
To the left of the brilliance control, there are four pushbuttons marked MENU,
SELECT, MINUS and PLUS.
MENU is used to activate the On-Screen Display (OSD). Once the OSD is
shown, the MENU pushbutton is used to enter and Exit a specific submenu.
SELECT scrolls through top level and submenus.
MINUS & PLUS adjust the selected value.
The menu structure is illustrated below. To activate:
1. Press MENU.
2. Press SELECT to select the menu item (shown by the highlight).
3. Press MENU to open that submenu.
4. Use SELECT again to pick (highlight) the item required.
5. Use MINUS or PLUS to adjust the value (if applicable).
The menu screen will time-out after a default time of 60 seconds of inactivity.
PICTURE BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
H POSITION
V POSITION
PHASE
FREQUENCY
MENU OPTION OSD POSITION

OSD H POSITION
OSD V POSITION
OSD TIMEOUT
OSD BACKGROUND
RESET
INFO TECHNICAL DATA
65800010B 5-11
The typical values are:
Setting
Parameter 65815C 65817C
Brightness 17 18
Contrast 70 68
H Position 50 50
V Position 50 50
Frequency 1260 1744
OSD Position Top Left Top Left
OSD Timeout 60 60
OSD Background Opaque Opaque
Mode 7 13
Resolution 1024x768 1280x1024
H Frequency kHz 30,703 42,426 or 42,444
V Frequency Hz 38 39
Phase control
The phase control does not have a typical value as it varies from unit to unit.
Adjust this parameter to make the picture as sharp as possible.
Reset
The RESET function, on the Option submenu, relies on the monitor being
presented with full screen graphics in order to assess how the signal should
be shown.
Do NOT perform a RESET while showing the Radar graphics as it has poorly
defined “edges”. Instead, use Test Pattern 1 (with the continuous border).
After performing a reset, the brightness, contrast, OSD Position and OSD
Timeout settings must be re-adjusted to their nominal values shown above.
Refitting the Bezel
When the picture has been properly aligned, ensure that the LCD surface
and the inside face of the glass are clean before refitting the bezel. Do not
rub the surface of the LCD with anything that can generate static electricity.
The LCD surface should not be touched with bare fingers. The bezel glass
can be cleaned with a soft lint free cloth. Dust on these surfaces is best
removed with an air duster.
5-12 65800010B
4.3 Testing Original Hatteland Models
This section is for models 65819A that are fitted with five BNC connectors for
the video and sync signals. 65819A models that are fitted with a 15-way
D-Sub connector are described in Section 4.4 below.
to reveal the ‘set-up’ controls. Turn its Contrast/Brightness/Brilliance
control(s) fully clockwise. Check that the LED adjacent to the set-up controls
is illuminated green. A red illumination indicates a lack of video input sync
signal(s).
set-up controls are correctly adjusted.
Use the set-up buttons MENU, +/DOWN, -/UP and ENTER as follows:
Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu. Select ‘SETUP’ from this
menu using +/DOWN or +/UP buttons, and press ENTER.
On the SETUP menu now displayed, check that the parameters are as
follows:
SETUP
423
1744
22
200
0
Entry: 0
Store
Restore
Preset
Adj. H-Position
If necessary, parameters can be adjusted by using the +/DOWN and +/UP

buttons. Ensure that the left and right edges visible.
If any changes are made, select the ‘Store’ line in the menu and press the
ENTER button.
An accurately positioned Radar Standby screen should now be displayed on
the monitor.
65800010B 5-13
Press the MENU button to return to the main menu, select the PICTURE
menu, and check that the parameters are as follows:
PICTURE
48
80
A B C
User
R 100
G 100
B 100
Store
Adj. Brightness
If necessary, parameters can be adjusted by using the +/DOWN and +/UP

buttons.
ENTER button.
A final check may now be required of the Clock Phase parameter on the
SETUP menu.
If necessary, concentrate on the four RGB groups of squares in the test
pattern (or on the screen-wide strip of white vertical lines at the bottom of the
pattern, if present) when adjusting the clock phase, and adjust for maximum
clarity and minimum noise (position and amplitude) on the fine vertical lines.
As a final check, ensure that the vertical white lines on the pattern are noise
free and have a similar appearance to each other across the screen.
ENTER button.
Note – Re-adjustment of the clock phase and horizontal position parameters
may be required if the video cable is changed.
5-14 65800010B
4.4 Testing New Hatteland Models
This section is for models 65817G or H, 65819A and 65823A, B or E. This
65819A has a 15-way D-SUB connector for the video and sync signals; the
original had five BNC connectors and is described in Section 4.3 above.
For the 65823B desktop variant only, remove the bezel by undoing the five
screws (two on the lower front surface and three across the top).
to reveal the ‘set-up’ controls. Turn the Brilliance control fully clockwise.
Check that the LED adjacent to the set-up controls is illuminated green. Red
illumination indicates a lack of video input sync signals.
set-up controls are correctly adjusted. The black and white striped band
across the bottom of the pattern is not visible on the 65823 because of its
picture format.
Use the set-up buttons “MENU”, “UP”, “DOWN”, “+” and “-“ to display an “On
Screen Display” menu (OSD menu) and change parameters as follows:
• Press the “MENU” button to display the Main Menu.
• The selected sub menu icon is highlighted. The sub menu function is
written toward the upper left of the OSD menu.
• Move to successive icons by pressing “MENU”.
• Each OSD shows the present function of the “UP”, “DOWN”, “+” and “-
“ buttons. Typically, select options within a sub menu by pressing “UP”
or “DOWN” buttons and adjust values by pressing the “+” and “-“
buttons.
• Press the MENU button to return to the main menu from a sub menu.
There are two OSD main menus:
• Simplified OSD menu with a Hatteland logo, three icons across the top
of the OSD and six icons across the bottom of the OSD.
• Advanced OSD menu without a logo, six icons across the top of the
OSD and six icons across the bottom of the OSD.
It should not normally be necessary to access the Advanced OSD menu. Only
those functions that are relevant to the operation of the BridgeMaster radar are
described in detail in Section 4.4.2. To access the Advanced OSD menu, press
and hold the "DOWN" button while switching the power on.
65800010B 5-15
4.4.1 Simplified OSD menu
Frequency and Phase
These functions modify the image horizontal size and fine-tune the image
quality.
FREQUENCY has a default value of 0 and should not be changed.
PHASE adjusts the image quality. Concentrate on the four RGB groups of
squares in the test pattern (or on the screen-wide strip of white vertical lines
at the bottom of the pattern, if present) and adjust for maximum clarity and
minimum noise (position and amplitude) on the fine vertical lines. As a final
check, ensure that the vertical white lines on the pattern are noise free and
have a similar appearance to each other across the screen. It is not
possible to give a typical figure for this parameter, as each unit may be
different.
SHARPNESS has a default value of 1 and should not be changed.
PICTURE TYPE should be at a default setting of “Still”.
Status
This sub menu displays, but cannot adjust, the resolution and frequency as
follows:
Parameter Variant Horizontal Vertical
65817, 65819 1280 1024
Resolution
65823 1296 972
Frequency All 42.4kHz 39 or 40Hz
Position
These functions move the image within the display area.
The “+” and “-“ buttons move the image right and left respectively. Ensure
that the double lines are visible at left and right edges.
The “UP” and “DOWN” buttons move the image up and down respectively.
Ensure that the picture is symmetrical with a white double line at top and
bottom edges for the 65817 and 65819. The 65823 should have a white
single line at the top and bottom edge.
Picture in Picture
The picture-in-picture parameters are set by this function but they are not
used for BridgeMaster displays. There are two menu styles.
Ensure that PIP Size is set to “Off” if the menu displays Off, Size1, Size2
and Size 3.
Ensure that PIP Size is set to “0” if the menu displays a horizontal slider.
Language
This menu allows the user to choose between English, Danish and
Simplified Chinese for the text and messages in the OSD menus.
5-16 65800010B
Video Source
This menu displays the video source. It is preset to Analog RGB and must
not be changed.
Utilities
This menu displays several sub menus but only one may be of use for a
BridgeMaster display.
The “OSD Setting” sub menu displays the following parameters with their
default values:
Parameter Default value Notes
OSD H-Position 100 Do not change
OSD V-Position 100 Do not change
OSD Background Translucent User may prefer Opaque
OSD Menu Rotate Normal Do not change
User time Out 10s User may need to increase this
Do not use sub menus “Direct Access 1”, “Direct Access 2”, “Calibrate RGB
gain”, “Load Defaults” and “Test Pattern”.
Volume
This menu has no function for a BridgeMaster display.
Exit Menu
Selecting this menu will exit the OSD menu. Press “+” or “-“ to save the
current settings and then exit.
4.4.2 Advanced OSD menu
If “Load Defaults” is activated in error, or the brilliance or aspect ratio are
wrongly set, then it will be necessary to use the Advanced OSD menu
functions to check and, if necessary, set some of the parameters.
All of the Simplified Menu functions are repeated on the Advanced OSD
menus. Refer to Section 4.4.1 above for their descriptions. Only the
additional functions are described below.
Brightness and Contrast
The values set by activating Load Defaults are 50 for the Brilliance and 50
for the Contrast.
Color Temperature
The default value is 8000K and must be set to this value.
Graphic Scaling Modes
The default setting is ‘Fill to Aspect Ratio’ and must be set to this value.
65800010B 5-17
Utilities
Additional sub menus are shown compared with the Simplified OSD menu
but the parameters must be set to their default values as follows:
Sub menu Parameter Default setting
DPMS Enable
Display Input Enable
User Setting
Auto Source Select Off
Gamma 1.0
Freeze Not frozen
Zoom Level 0
Zoom Horizontal Pan 0
Vertical Pan 0
Display Orientation Orientation Normal
4.5 Normal Operation – All FPD Models
Normal operation of the Flat Panel Display Monitor requires only the
operation of its On/Off switch, Contrast and Brightness controls.
The Contrast and Brightness controls should be adjusted to maintain picture
visibility in response to varying ambient lighting conditions.
Note – Power to these monitors is not switched by the On/Off switch
associated with the radar display processor. To prolong the life of
the backlight in these displays, it is recommended that the monitors
be switched off when not in use.
5-18 65800010B
5 Testing a CRT Monitor
Picture adjustment can be made to BridgeMaster E CRT monitors.
5.1 CRT Test Pattern 1
Red/Black Green/Black Blue/Black White ------------------------------------ 6 Shades of Grey-------------------------------- Black Red/Black Green/Black Blue/Black
MONITOR TEST
Vertical shift Preset brightness
E/W correction Preset contrast
Width Red gain
Height Green gain
Vert. Linearity Blue gain
Horiz. Phase Black level (red)
Trapezoidal Black level (blue)
HIDE MENU EXIT - +

DEGAUSS PATTERN >>
Red/Black Green/Black Blue/Black White Yellow Cyan Green Magenta Red Blue Black Red/Black GreenBlack Blue/Black
Test Pattern 1 consists of various lines, circles and coloured rectangles. A

MONITOR TEST Parameter Menu and several soft keys are also displayed.
5.1.1 Selecting a Test Parameter
1. Within the MONITOR TEST menu (shown below), position the screen
cursor over the required parameter.
2. Left click to select that parameter MONITOR TEST
for adjustment. The selected E/W correction Preset contrast
parameter will be highlighted. Width Red gain
Height Green gain
HIDE MENU EXIT - +

DEGAUSS PATTERN >>
65800010B 5-19
5.1.2 Adjusting a Selected Parameter
Once a parameter has been selected, it can be changed
using the plus (+) and minus (-) soft keys.
1. Position the screen cursor over the ‘+’ or ‘-’ soft key.
2. Left click to increase or decrease the selected parameter.
Note – The ‘+’ and ‘-’ soft keys will auto-repeat for as long as the left button
is kept pressed.
5.1.3 Hiding Menu & Lines
Note – The HIDE MENU soft key may show any one of three different
captions - HIDE MENU, HIDE LINES or SHOW LINES.
1. Position the screen cursor over the HIDE MENU soft
key.
2. Left click to toggle between HIDE LINES, SHOW
LINES and HIDE MENU.
Initially, Test Pattern 1 (as shown above) is displayed and the soft key
caption is HIDE MENU. A left click on this soft key will remove the menu
and all of its associated soft keys except the HIDE soft key which now
shows the caption HIDE LINES. A left click on this soft key will remove all
lines from the test pattern and change the soft key caption to SHOW LINES.
A left click on this soft key will restore Test Pattern 1 (as shown above,
complete with menu and all lines). The soft key caption is also restored to
HIDE MENU.
5.1.4 Degaussing the Monitor
1. Position the screen cursor over the DEGAUSS soft
key.
2. Left click to initiate a degauss. See Chapter 14 of the
User Guide.
Note – There is a 30 second inhibit on this function after use.
5.1.5 Selecting Test Pattern 2
1. Position the screen cursor over the PATTERN >> soft
key.
2. Left click to display Test Pattern 2.
5.1.6 Returning to Standby (Exit from Monitor Test)
5-20 65800010B
Test Pattern 2 consists of a chequered pattern of black and dark grey

squares. It is important that the darkest possible grey can just be seen
against the black background so, initially, NO menu or soft keys are
displayed. After a short delay the ‘+’, ‘-‘ and PATTERN > > soft keys will
appear.
5.2.1 Changing the Preset Brightness
1. Position the screen cursor over the ‘+’ or ‘-’ soft key.
2. Left click to increase or decrease the preset
brightness until the dark grey of the chequerboard can
just be seen against the black background in the darkest of operating
conditions.
Note – Note: The ‘+’ and ‘-’ soft keys will auto-repeat for as long as the left
button is kept pressed.
5.2.2 Selecting Test Pattern 3

key.
2. Left click to display Test Pattern 3.
65800010B 5-21
MONITOR TEST
E/W correction Preset contrast
Width Red gain
Height Green gain
HIDE MENU EXIT - +

DEGAUSS PATTERN >>
Test Pattern 3 consists of the lines and circles associated with Test Pattern
1, plus a large, solid-white rectangle in the centre of the screen. The
rectangle can be hidden or made to flash, and all menu items associated with
Test Pattern 1 can be selected.
5.3.1 Controlling the Large White Rectangle
1. Position the screen cursor over the HIDE RECT soft
key.
2. Left click to toggle between FLASH RECT, SHOW RECT and HIDE
RECT.
5.3.2 Returning to Test Pattern 1
key.
2. Left click to return to Test Pattern 1.
5.3.3 Returning to Standby (Exit from Monitor Test)
5-22 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Fault Reporting and First Line Servicing
CHAPTER 6
FAULT REPORTING AND FIRST LINE SERVICING
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................7
1.1 Contact......................................................................................................................7
1.2 Information Required for Service ..............................................................................7
2 Fault Identification and Isolation .......................................................................8

2.1 BME System Fundamentals .....................................................................................8
2.2 Display Unit.............................................................................................................10
2.3 Error Messages and Tellbacks for ‘S’ and ‘X’ Band Transceivers ..........................15
2.3.1 Error Messages........................................................................................................15
2.3.2 BIST DATA...............................................................................................................16
2.3.3 TELLBACKS ............................................................................................................17
2.4 S-Band Scanner Unit ..............................................................................................18
2.4.1 Technical Description...............................................................................................18
2.4.2 Fault Isolating Flowcharts (S-Band Scanners) ........................................................32
2.5 X-Band Scanner Unit ..............................................................................................59
2.5.1 Technical Description...............................................................................................59
2.5.2 Fault Isolation Flowcharts (X-Band Scanners) ........................................................74
3 First Line Servicing.........................................................................................101

3.1 Display Units .........................................................................................................101
3.1.1 Preliminary Notes...................................................................................................101
3.1.2 Removal and Replacement of Processor Electronics Unit Sub-assemblies .........101
3.1.3 Removal and Replacement of Kit Control Panel Modules.....................................103
3.1.4 Removal and Replacement of Operator controls on 340 Display Units ................104
3.1.5 Removal of CRT Display Monitor Unit Sub-assemblies ........................................104
3.1.6 Replacing and Setting-up of CRT Display Monitor Unit Sub-assemblies..............105
3.1.7 Removal and Replacement of Flat Panel Monitors ...............................................107
3.2 S-Band Scanner Unit ............................................................................................116
3.2.1 Magnetron Replacement........................................................................................116
3.2.2 Magnetron Replacement (Bulkhead Transceiver) .................................................116
3.2.3 Bearing and Heading Marker PCB – Replacement ...............................................117
3.2.4 Heading Marker Alignment ....................................................................................117
3.3 X-Band Scanner Unit ............................................................................................141
3.3.1 Access to Masthead Transceiver...........................................................................141
3.3.2 Access to Bulkhead Transceiver ...........................................................................141
3.3.3 Removing and Replacing the Transceiver from Masthead Turning Unit...............141
3.3.4 Removing and Replacing the Transceiver from Bulkhead Transceiver Chassis...142
6-1 65800010B
Fault Reporting and First Line Servicing Ship’s Manual
3.3.5 Magnetron Replacement – Masthead and Bulkhead Transceivers ...................... 143
3.3.6 Setting the Magnetron Current.............................................................................. 144
3.3.7 Trigger PCB – Replacement ................................................................................. 144
3.3.8 Trigger PCB – Link Settings.................................................................................. 144
3.3.9 Modulator PCB – Replacement............................................................................. 144
3.3.10 Modulator PCB – Link Settings............................................................................. 144
3.3.11 PSU PCB – Replacement..................................................................................... 144
3.3.12 PSU PCB – Link Settings ..................................................................................... 144
3.3.13 Bearing and Heading Marker PCB – Replacement .............................................. 145
3.3.14 Heading Marker Alignment ................................................................................... 145
3.3.15 Receiver Assembly – Replacement (Masthead) .................................................. 145
3.3.16 Receiver Assembly – Replacement (Bulkhead) ................................................... 146
3.3.17 Performance Monitor – Replacement ................................................................... 146
3.3.18 Motor Drive Board – Replacement ....................................................................... 147
3.3.19 Motor and Gearbox Assembly – Replacement..................................................... 147
3.3.20 Drive Belt – Replacement ..................................................................................... 148
3.4 2-Way Interswitch 65842A ................................................................................... 171
3.6 Interface Unit 65847A........................................................................................... 171
4 Limited Spares List for Field Replacement .................................................. 172

4.1 CRT Monitors ....................................................................................................... 172
4.2 FPD Monitors ....................................................................................................... 172
4.5 Interface Unit 65847A........................................................................................... 172
4.6 Spares for Transceivers and Turning Units.......................................................... 173
4.6.1 S-Band Turning Units (Masthead and Bulkhead) ................................................. 173
4.6.2 Standard X-Band Turning Units and Transceivers ............................................... 174
4.7 Processor Electronics Unit ................................................................................... 175
4.8 Extended Processor Electronics Unit ................................................................... 175
4.9 Kit Control Panel Modules.................................................................................... 176
4.10 Deck Mounting 340 Display Control Panel........................................................... 176
Figures
Figure 6.1. Processor Electronics Unit – Disassembly ........................................ 108
Figure 6.2. Split Cabinet Console – Monitor Access ........................................... 109
Figure 6.3. Block Diagram – 180 Monitor (14” High Resolution) ......................... 110
Figure 6.4. Block Diagram – 250 Monitor (21” Medium Resolution) .................... 111
Figure 6.5. Block Diagram – 250 Monitor (21” High Resolution) ......................... 112
Figure 6.6. Block Diagram – 340 Monitor (29” Medium Resolution) .................... 113
65800010B 6-2
Figure 6.7. Interconnection Diagram – Processor Electronics Unit ......................114
Figure 6.8. Access to Transceiver (Turning Unit with Integral Transceiver) .........118
Figure 6.9. Access to Transceiver (Bulkhead Transceiver)..................................119
Figure 6.10. Location of Major Parts ..................................................................120
Figure 6.11. Removing Transceiver from Turning Unit .......................................121
Figure 6.12. Removing Transceiver Assembly 65830630 (Bulkhead Transceiver)
.......................................................................................................122
Figure 6.13. Magnetron Replacement ................................................................123
Figure 6.14. Setting Magnetron Current .............................................................124
Figure 6.15. Replacing Trigger PCB...................................................................125
Figure 6.16. Link Settings Trigger PCB ..............................................................126
Figure 6.17. Replacing Modulator PCB ..............................................................127
Figure 6.18. Link Settings – Modulator PCB.......................................................128
Figure 6.19. Replacing Power Supply PCB ........................................................129
Figure 6.20. Link Settings – Power Supply PCB ................................................130
Figure 6.21. (Sheet 1 of 2) – Replacement of Receiver Assembly 65830616 ....131
Figure 6.22. (Sheet 2 of 2) – Replacement of Receiver Assembly 65830616 ....132
Figure 6.23. Access to Performance Monitor and Bearing and Heading Marker
PCB................................................................................................133
Figure 6.24. Replacing Bearing and Heading PCB ............................................134
Figure 6.25. Replacing Performance Monitor .....................................................135
Figure 6.26. Replacement of Fan Assembly ......................................................136
Figure 6.27. S-Band Turning Unit Schematic .....................................................137
Figure 6.28. S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Schematic ......................................139
Figure 6.29. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – Internal view showing Transceiver
.......................................................................................................149
Figure 6.30. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – View showing Main Assemblies 150
Figure 6.31. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – Fitment of Main Assemblies ......151
Figure 6.32. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – View inside upper casting with
Transceiver removed .....................................................................152
Figure 6.33. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – Side view showing Motor Drive
Board retaining screws...................................................................153
Figure 6.34. X-Band Bulkhead Turning Unit – View showing Main Assemblies .154
Figure 6.35. X-Band Bulkhead Turning Unit – View showing assemblies fitted to
lower casting ..................................................................................155
Figure 6.36. Bulkhead Transceiver – View with Cover Removed (earlier version)
.......................................................................................................156
Figure 6.37. Bulkhead Transceiver – View with Cover Removed.......................157
Figure 6.38. Setting Magnetron Current .............................................................158
Figure 6.39. Replacing Trigger PCB...................................................................159
Figure 6.40. Link Settings – Trigger PCB ...........................................................160
Figure 6.41. Replacing Modulator PCB ..............................................................161
Figure 6.42. Link Settings – Modulator PCB.......................................................162
Figure 6.43. Replacing PSU PCB.......................................................................163
Figure 6.44. Link Settings – PSU PCB ...............................................................164
Figure 6.45. X-Band Turning Unit (Aloft) Schematic...........................................165
Figure 6.46. X-Band Transceiver Schematic ......................................................167
Figure 6.47. X-Band Turning Unit (Bulkhead) Schematic ...................................169
6-3 65800010B
Flowcharts
Flowchart 1 DISPLAY UNIT FAULTS (No Picture).............................................. 11
Flowchart 2 MONITOR UNIT FAULTS (No Picture)............................................ 12
Flowchart 3 MONITOR UNIT (CRT) FAULTS (WITH PICTURE) ........................ 13
Flowchart 4 MONITOR UNIT (FPD) FAULTS (WITH PICTURE) ........................ 14
Flowchart 5 OVERALL FLOWCHART – S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS .............. 33
Flowchart 6 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS .......................................................... 34
Flowchart 7 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Azi error’ shown) ............................ 35
Flowchart 16 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘STBY/TX error’ shown) .................. 44
Flowchart 17 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Spark gap test’ failure) ................... 45
Flowchart 18 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Missing HMKR error’ shown).......... 46
Flowchart 20 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Trigger error’ shown) ...................... 48
Flowchart 21 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘TX error’/’Low video error’ shown) . 49
Flowchart 24 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Low video error’ shown) ................. 52
Flowchart 28 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘TX comms error’ shown) ................ 56
Flowchart 29 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘TX BIST error’ shown).................... 57
Flowchart 31 OVERALL FLOWCHART – X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS .............. 75
Flowchart 32 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS .......................................................... 76
Flowchart 33 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘AZI error’ shown)............................ 77
Flowchart 42 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘STBY/TX error shown) ................... 86
Flowchart 43 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Spark gap test’ failure) ................... 87
Flowchart 44 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Missing HMKR error’ shown).......... 88
Flowchart 46 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Trigger error’ shown) ...................... 90
Flowchart 47 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘TX error’/’Low video error’ shown) . 91
65800010B 6-4
Flowchart 50 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘Low video error’ shown)..................94
Flowchart 51 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS...........................................................95
Flowchart 54 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘TX Comms error’ shown) ................98
Flowchart 55 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS (‘TX BIST error’ shown) ....................99
Flowchart 56 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS.........................................................100
6-5 65800010B

intentionally
65800010B 6-6
1 Introduction
Fault diagnosis to component level is not possible without the use of specialised
test equipment.
The majority of the PCBs are assembled using surface mount techniques.
Service repair is therefore by module (PCB) replacement only.
The module may be covered by the Service Exchange scheme.
1.1 Contact
If a unit exhibits a fault, please contact you supplier or local dealer, or if on
International trade, contact:
SERVICE CONTROL Telephone: +(44)(0) 208 329 2400
Burlington House Or +(44)(0) 208 329 2000
118 Burlington Road
New Malden Fax: +(44)(0) 208 329 2458
Surrey KT3 4NR
England
or:
Request support on line by going to www.sperry-marine.com, and clicking on
the customer support link.
For general non-urgent enquiries, the following e-mail address is also
available:
service@sperry-marine.com
1.2 Information Required for Service
Please give the following details when reporting a fault:
1. Name of vessel (Satcom or Fax number if fitted).
2. Equipment type, including prefix and suffix letters.
3. Software status (version number).
4. Next port of call, ETA and ship’s agents.
5. Fault description (with as much detail as possible).
6. Contact name.
6-7 65800010B
2 Fault Identification and Isolation

Refer to the following associated manuals for assistance in identifying and
isolating System faults.
65601012 BridgeMaster II S-Band Supplement (Hybrid Systems) Chapter 6

Additionally covers DCU and Scanner Control Unit faults.
65601013 BridgeMaster II X-Band Supplement (Hybrid Systems) Chapter 6
Additionally covers DCU faults.
65800011 Ship’s Technical Manual
65800012 Ancillary Units and Radar Systems Manual
Covers DCU, TCU, 2- & 6-way Interswitch, Interface Unit,
and Radar Slave Interface Unit.
!WARNING!
Lethal voltages are exposed when the covers are removed from the units.
Only qualified persons should work on the equipment when power is applied.
ALWAYS isolate the unit from the mains supply when removing or replacing the
cover. To make the units safe it is necessary to isolate them from the mains
supply. It is not adequate to turn the unit off, as there are high voltages present
at any Power Supply that is not mains isolated.
2.1 BME System Fundamentals

In order to simplify the diagnosis of system faults, the following paragraphs
describe some fundamental characteristics of the BME units.
Power Supply Start-up
!WARNING!
Once mains is applied to the PSU board in either the Transceiver, the
Display or the TCU, high voltage DC is present on all primary power
components. This voltage is present even when the unit is switched off.
This fact should be noted when servicing the Display, the Transceiver
and the TCU. The high voltage is only removed if the unit is isolated
from the mains supply.
For the Power Supply to operate, the DU Data+ and DU Data- signal lines
must be active. It is not necessary for serial data to be present, the presence
of a DC voltage >2.5V between the lines will start the Power supply.
Note – A test link LKA on Power Supply PCB’s can be set to position 1 – 2
to make the Power Supply operate independently of the DU Data
input. This link must only be used in this position as a service aid. It
must be reset afterwards to position 2 – 3 for normal operation
otherwise the display will not be able to switch the transceiver on or
off.
65800010B 6-8
Azimuth and Comms
There are four separate signals between a BME Display and Transceiver:
• serial control messages from the Display;
• video;
• RS422 trigger; and
• serial tellback messages from the Transceiver.
The tellback messages are a serial message stream. They contain the
azimuth and heading marker information as well as BIST and status tellback
bits. The messages are made up of a number of characters. As the antenna
rotates, azimuth pulses are produced. Each pulse causes the Transceiver or
TCU to send one character of data. If the antenna stops rotating synthetic
azimuth pulses are produced by the Pulse Bearing PCB to maintain the serial
comms between the Transceiver and the Display. The frequency of the
messages is reduced under this condition.
Loss of azimuth pulses will result in no messages being sent to the display,
which results in the display raising a “TX Comms” alarm.
Fault Identification and Isolation
Each of the various signals in the radar system may pass through a number
of units before reaching its final destination. Therefore, a low video alarm on
a display could be caused by a failure in the Transceiver, TCU, Interswitch or
cabling. The fault in a particular unit may then be due to defective hardware
or lack of power to that unit.
With many of the faults it is only possible to identify a particular missing
signal. It is then simply a case of using an oscilloscope to trace inputs to and
outputs from each unit in turn in order to isolate the fault. Once this has been
done, the faulty unit can be examined in more detail using the diagnosis
charts in the relevant manual.
It is assumed that the engineer will make sure that ships mains is present at
each of the units where expected and that all isolating switches are in the
correct operating position before proceeding with fault diagnosis.
6-9 65800010B
2.2 Display Unit
Flowcharts for the isolation of Display Unit faults are given on the following
pages. Flowcharts 1 & 2 cover the situation where there is no picture, and
Flowchart 3 & 4, where there is a picture but there are other faults.
The Flowcharts should be read in conjunction with the following notes.
Notes –Before using the following fault finding flow chart visually check the
units to make sure there are no loose plugs or connections.
A YELLOW LED shows when the power supply is active It is found

approximately 100mm from the right-hand side of the power supply,
towards the rear of the PSU. It can be seen through the front grill of
the PSU.
A RED LED shows if there is a power supply trip. It can be found

approximately 125mm from the right-hand side of the power supply,
towards the rear of the PSU. It can be seen through the front grill of
the PSU.
The DISPLAY EHT SUPPLY has a thermal trip circuit. After the
removal of an overload, it automatically resets after 15 seconds.
The DISPLAY POWER SUPPLY has a thermal trip that shuts down
the power supply if the heat sink temperature exceeds 110°C. This
thermal trip will not activate the PCU RED TRIP LED. The YELLOW
LED is similarly not affected. The PSU will automatically reset when
the heat sink cools to approximately 90°C.
For a Flat Panel Monitor that is powered directly from an AC or DC

input, ensure that the power is applied and that the power LED is lit.
Refer to Chapter 5, Section 4 for its position.
Use the following table to help with decisions on Flowchart 3 and 4.
Decision Answers Example Symptoms

Is the display Digital Distortion Broken or missing text, misaligned
distorted? text.
Analogue Distortion Non-circular range rings.
Are the colours Incorrect Colours Different colours shown from those
correct? set.
Discolouration Set colours vary.
Where is the Within Radar Missing targets, no gain, strange
fault? Picture patterns.
Text and Synthetics Missing text, non-function of menus,
strange patterns.
65800010B 6-10
FLOWCHART 1 DISPLAY UNIT FAULTS (NO PICTURE)
START
TURN BRILLIANCE CONTROL

FULLY CLOCKWISE
TO MAXIMUM
YES
IS THERE A PICTURE? END
NO
SWITCH-OFF.
WAIT 30 SECONDS AND THEN
SWITCH-ON AGAIN.
IS THE
PROCESSOR UNIT FAN NO CHECK MAINS SUPPLY.
RUNNING (AT THE FRONT)? CHECK PROCESSOR UNIT FUSE
(AT REAR OF UNIT)
YES
UNSCREW FRONT PANEL OF YES NO REPLACE FUSE/RE-ESTABLISH

PROCESSOR UNIT, BUT LEAVE ARE BOTH CORRECT? MAINS SUPPLY
CABLES CONNECTED.
OBSERVE YELLOW & RED LEDS
THROUGH FRONT GRILL.
NO THE POWER SUPPLY IS FAULTY

IS YELLOW LED ILLUMINATED?
YES
NO
IS RED TRIP LED ILLUMINATED? CHECK MONITOR CONNECTIONS
YES
SWITCH-OFF NO REFER TO MONITOR FAULT

IS THERE A PICTURE? FINDING CHART
YES
END
GO TO ‘FLOW CHART 2’
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
6-11 65800010B
FLOWCHART 2 MONITOR UNIT FAULTS (NO PICTURE)
‘FLOW CHART 2’
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
DISCONNECT THE DISPLAY

MONITOR VIA SKR (AT REAR)
SWITCH-ON
DID YES THE MONITOR IS FAULTY

THE RED TRIP LED
GO OUT?
NO
SWITCH-OFF
DISCONNECT THE DISPLAY

PROCESSOR PCB BY UNPLUGGING
FROM THE BACK PLANE (INCLUDE
ANY CABLES AT THE FRONT).
SWITCH-ON
DID YES THE MONITOR IS FAULTY

THE RED TRIP LED
GO OUT?
NO
SWITCH-OFF
DISCONNECT THE RADAR

PROCESSOR PCB BY UNPLUGGING
FROM THE BACK PLANE (INCLUDE
ANY CABLES AT THE FRONT).
SWITCH-ON
NO DID YES
THE POWER SUPPLY THE RADAR PROCESSOR IS FAULTY
THE RED TRIP LED
IS FAULTY
GO OUT?
65800010B 6-12
FLOWCHART 3 MONITOR UNIT (CRT) FAULTS (WITH PICTURE)
START
DIGITAL DISTORTION IS THE DISPLAY DISTORTED? ANALOGUE DISTORTION

(SEE TEXT) YES YES (SEE TEXT)
NO
THERE IS A THERE IS A
DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD CRT BASE OR DRIVER BOARD
FAULT FAULT
DEGAUSS - DISPLAY
MENU FUNCTION
INCORRECT COLOURS ARE COLOURS DISCOLOURATION

(SEE TEXT) NO CORRECT? NO (SEE TEXT)
DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD CRT BASE OR DRIVER BOARD
FAULT FAULT
WITH TEXT & SYNTHETICS WHERE IS THE WITH THE RADAR PICTURE
(SEE TEXT) FAULT? (SEE TEXT)
THERE IS A DO TX/RX BIST TESTS ON THE TEST

DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD DATA MENU.
FAULT (Ref. Chapter 5 - Operator Tests)
FAIL
RESULTS?
PASS
THERE IS A SCANNER THERE IS A

UNIT FAULT, PROBABLY RADAR PROCESSOR BOARD
IN THE TRANSCEIVER FAULT
GO TO CHANGE RADAR PROCESSOR

TX FAULT FINDING CHART BOARD
‘TOP SHEET’
6-13 65800010B
FLOWCHART 4 MONITOR UNIT (FPD) FAULTS (WITH PICTURE)
START
CHECK CABLE, OTHERWISE THERE

MESSAGE: ‘NO RGB INPUT’
IS A DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD
YES DISPLAYED
FAULT.
NO
DIGITAL DISTORTION IS THE DISPLAY DISTORTED? ANALOGUE DISTORTION

(SEE TEXT) YES (SEE TEXT)
YES
NO
DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD FPD MONITOR FAULT
FAULT
DOES THE TEST PATTERN FILL THE HAS THE CORRECT CABLE BEEN
SCREEN NO FITTED?
NO
YES
FIT CORRECT CABLE

YES
INCORRECT COLOURS ARE COLOURS
(SEE TEXT) NO CORRECT?
THERE IS A
YES MONITOR UNIT IS NOT CORRECTLY
DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD
FAULT SET UP. REFER TO CHAPTER 5,
SECTION 4
WITH TEXT & SYNTHETICS WHERE IS THE WITH THE RADAR PICTURE
(SEE TEXT) FAULT? (SEE TEXT)
THERE IS A DO TX/RX BIST TESTS ON THE TEST

DISPLAY PROCESSOR BOARD DATA MENU.
FAULT (Ref. Chapter 5 - Operator Tests)
FAIL
RESULTS?
PASS
THERE IS A SCANNER THERE IS A

UNIT FAULT, PROBABLY RADAR PROCESSOR BOARD
IN THE TRANSCEIVER FAULT
GO TO CHANGE RADAR PROCESSOR

TX FAULT FINDING CHART BOARD
‘TOP SHEET’
65800010B 6-14
2.3 Error Messages and Tellbacks for ‘S’ and ‘X’ Band
Transceivers
2.3.1 Error Messages
The following errors are reported by the transceiver:
Message Failure
The transceiver expects to receive a message from the display at least
once per second. If the message rate drops below this the transmitter is
switched to Standby and a Message Fail error is shown. The Transmitter
will remain in Standby until the next message is received which contains a
‘transmit request bit’ set to transmit.
Possible causes:
• Controlling device failure.
• Inter unit cabling.
• Inter PCB cabling in transceiver.
• Defective Input PCB (signal is only looped through).
• Defective Trigger PCB.
Corrupt Data
The transceiver checks the parity of each character in an incoming
message and verifies the checksum for each complete message. If enough
corrupt messages are received a Corrupt Data error is returned. The
transceiver stays in the state it was in when it received the last valid
message. Normal operation will be resumed, and the Corrupt Data error will
be cleared when the next valid message is received.
Possible causes:
• Controlling device failure.
• Bad connections or earth bonding on inter unit cabling between
Transceiver and controlling device.
• Defective Inter PCB cabling in transceiver.
• Defective Input PCB (signal looped through only).
Spark Gap Detect
The Modulator incorporates a spark gap to protect the pulse transformer
from the excessive voltage that is generated if the magnetron misfires.
If the spark gap operates for more than two seconds this is detected and
Spark Detect error is signalled, and the Transmitter is switched to Standby.
Possible causes;
• Magnetron instability at end of its life.
• Missing magnetron heaters, due to Modulator PCB failure.
• Failure of Magnetron Heater Supply from the Power Supply PCB.
• Defective Inter PCB cable from Power Supply to Modulator PCB.
• Defective Modulator PCB.
6-15 65800010B
HMKR Failure
When operating normally the transmitter will not transmit unless the
antenna is rotating.
Antenna rotation is confirmed by checking for the presence of the Heading
Marker.
If the Heading Marker is missing but azimuth pulses are still present the
Transceiver will be switched to Standby and a HMKR Failure error message
is shown on the display.
Transmission is restored if a Heading Marker is detected, provided the
display has not switched the transmitter to standby.
Possible causes:
• Defective Inter unit cabling from Transceiver to Scanner unit.
• Defective Digitiser or Pulse Bearing Board in Turning Unit.
• Incorrectly configured Input PCB.
• Defective Input PCB.
Mod Trig Fail, Charge Trig Fail
The Trigger PCB generates the Modulator, and Charge Triggers. If either
pulse is detected as missing a Mod Trig Fail, or Charge Trig Fail error is
returned as applicable.
Possible causes;
• Defective Trigger PCB
2.3.2 BIST DATA
The following information is transmitted from the transceiver to the display
unit to be shown in the TX BIST box.
Parameter Normal Remarks
Range
Magnetron Current 6.0A – 9.5A 25kW and 30kW
Magnetron Current 4.0A – 7A 10kW
+12V +11V - +13.4V
+30V +26V - +36V
MOD HT -500V - -680V
Mod Trigger Pass
Charge Trig Pass
BIST data is only approximate and must not be used for making
adjustments.
A deviation from the above values shows a possible fault condition.
65800010B 6-16
2.3.3 TELLBACKS
Within the serial data transmitted by the transceiver are a number of status
tellbacks to show the Transceiver status. This data is monitored and shown
on the display unit.
The following tellbacks are used:
Transmit
This bit is set if the controlling device requests transmit and:
• The transceiver has completed its warm up.
• The Heading Marker has not failed.
• There is not a Message Fail error.
• There is not a Spark Gap error.
Inhibit
This bit is set whenever the display unit requests ‘Transmit’ and the
transmitter is inhibited. For example, when the Radar Silence input is active
on units fitted with the additional features option.
Medium Pulse and Short Pulse
These bits reflect the status of the pulse length control signals within the
transceiver.
They show the status as follows:
Selection SP Bit MP Bit Receiver
Bandwidth
Short Pulse 1 0 Wide
Medium Pulse 0 1 Wide
Long Pulse 0 0 Narrow
(Illegal Code) 1 1 Undefined
Wide-band
This bit shows the bandwidth selected for the receiver, when set to “1”
“wideband” is selected.
The selected bandwidth is linked to the pulse-width as shown in the table
above.
AFC On
This bit indicates the tuning mode selected for the receiver. When set to “1”
AFC mode is selected. For some transceivers, this bit may be permanently
set to “1” as a result of internal link settings.
Timer
This bit indicates the status of the magnetron “warm-up” timer within the
transceiver. It is set to “0” for a preset period of 180 seconds after the
transceiver is turned on. The timer lets the magnetron cathode reach its
operating temperature before the HT is applied.
After the warm-up delay the transceiver can be turned off. If it is turned back
on within 10 seconds the timer will be overridden, letting it immediately
return to the transmit condition.
6-17 65800010B
2.4 S-Band Scanner Unit
2.4.1 Technical Description
There are two basic types of S-Band Scanner Unit:
• With an integral transceiver module
• Without an integral transceiver
Each type has variants dependent on motor supply and the options that are
fitted.
The Scanner Unit is comprises of an Antenna, an antenna support casting,
and a Turning Unit.
The Turning Unit contains the following items:
• a motor and gearbox
• a Bearing and Heading Marker PCB
• an Input PCB
• an optional Performance Monitor
• an optional integral transceiver module.
The Transceiver Unit contains the following items:
• a base casting
• a cover
• a transceiver module
• an Input PCB.
A serial data link is used to communicate between the Transceiver and the
Display. If a separate Transceiver Unit is used, an RF feeder (coaxial) is
used to transfer the microwave energy between the Transceiver Unit and
the Turning Unit.
The Scanner Unit and the Transceiver Unit are compatible with
BridgeMaster display units if a Display Compatibility Unit is used.
Physical Arrangements
The Turning Unit is constructed from a central aluminium casting, to one
side of which is attached a motor and gearbox. The terminal strips for
interconnecting cables to other units are under a cover on the opposite side
to the motor and gearbox.
At either end of the Turning Unit there is an aluminium cover. The
performance monitor is housed under the front cover. When fitted, the
Transceiver Unit is housed under the rear cover. If no transceiver module is
fitted, a shallower cover is used. The transceiver module can be removed
for below decks servicing.
Four M16 bolts are used to attach the Scanner Unit to the radar platform or
wheelhouse roof. The Antenna is attached to the Turning Unit by the
antenna support casting. An RF feeder cable is used to transfer the
microwave signals between the Turning Unit and the Antenna.
65800010B 6-18
Interconnections between the Scanner Unit and other units in the system
are made using screened cables. All the cables that enter the Scanner Unit
do so via waterproof cable glands that use an EMC gasket that makes
contact with the cable braid.
The separate Transceiver is designed to be Bulkhead mounted and is
attached using four M8 bolts, studs or screws (coachbolts).
TRANSCEIVER MODULE OVERVIEW (S-Band)
The transceiver module can be fitted in the Turning Unit, or mounted on a
casting for below decks bulkhead mounting as a separate unit. The module
contains:
• the Modulator PCB;
• a Power Supply PCB;
• the Trigger PCB;
• the Receiver; and
• the microwave components.
Communication between the Transceiver Unit and the Display Unit uses
two serial data links:
• one from the Transceiver to the Display Unit
• one from the Display Unit to the Transceiver.
This information is transmitted using a special data cable that incorporates
four twisted pairs:
• two pairs are used for data transmission
• one pair is used for the trigger
• the other pair is spare.
The data passed from the Transceiver to the Display includes:
• Heading Marker
• Increment Bearing
• Transceiver Status
• Error Messages
• Built In Test Equipment (BITE) data
• Tuning Indicator
The data transmitted from the Display to the Transceiver includes:
• Standby/Transmit
• Pulse Length
• Tuning
• AFC/Manual
• Sector Blanking
• Performance Monitor control, and Installation Settings
6-19 65800010B
Power Supply
The power supply operates from the ship’s AC mains, and provides all of
the power requirements for the electronic modules within the Turning Unit
and Transceiver. The AC mains is always present at the power supply
even when the radar is switched off at the display.
The presence of data on the serial data link when the display is switched on
is detected by the power supply, which then becomes active. The power
supply includes a Power Factor Correction circuit, and a number of
switching regulators to generate the necessary voltage supplies.
Overcurrent detection circuits protect the power supply against overloads
on its outputs.
Trigger PCB
The Trigger PCB processes the serial data from the Display Unit, and
generates the required control signals for the Transceiver. It monitors
functions within the Transceiver, the Heading Marker, and encodes the
information for transmission to the Display Unit. The data is transmitted
each time a bearing pulse is received from the Turning Unit. The trigger
PCB generates the various timing signals required by the transceiver,
including the Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF).
Modulator PCB
The modulator PCB generates high voltage negative pulses required to
drive the magnetron. The modulator pulse widths and timing signals are
controlled from the trigger PCB. A spark gap on the modulator is fired if the
magnetron fails to operate. Continual operation of the spark gap is
detected and a signal is fed back to the trigger PCB. When the trigger PCB
detects this signal it switched the radar to standby, and generates an error
signal to be transmitted to the Display Unit via the serial data link. The error
signal causes the Display Unit to switch to standby and generate an error
alarm.
Microwave
The transceiver uses a conventional three-port circulator to direct the path
of the microwave energy to and from the antenna. A magnetron coupled to
the circulator provides the RF energy to be transmitted. A solid-state limiter
coupled to the circulator protects the receiver from high-powered microware
signals from the magnetron, or adjacent radars. A signal from the trigger
PCB is used to enable swept attenuation to be applied to the solid-state
limiter to reduce the system sensitivity at short ranges.
Receiver
The receiver consists of:
• a low noise amplifier;
• a mixer;
• a linear preamplifier;
• a logarithmic amplifier; and
• a video amplifier.
The mixer has a 60MHz output, which is amplified by the linear pre-amplifier
followed by the logarithmic amplifier. When the output is detected, the
65800010B 6-20
resulting video signal is then further amplified before transmission to the
Display or Compatibility Unit.
The receiver also incorporates an AFC system. Once the receiver has
been tuned, the AFC system makes sure the receiver remains in tune
during variations in tuning due to thermal drift of the mixer, magnetron etc.
The operator can select between manual tuning and automatic tuning. A
signal from the trigger PCB is used to select the mode of operation. A
signal from the AFC circuit is fed to the trigger circuit to indicate the state of
tune of the receiver. This signal is at its minimum value when the receiver
is correctly tuned.
AUTOMATIC START-UP SEQUENCE (S-Band)
The automatic start-up sequence described below, should be read in
conjunction with Figure 6.28 S-Band Turning Schematic’.
Start-up
!WARNING!
When mains power is applied to the PSU board the Power Factor
Correction (PFC) circuitry starts and generates 390V. When mains power
is applied the PFC is active and cannot be manually switched off. The start
circuitry only controls the flyback converter so High Voltage DC is present
on primary power components whenever mains power is present on the
board. This fact should be noted when servicing the Transceiver.
The Power Supply in the Transceiver is only active during normal operation
when there is a Display (or Compatibility Unit) connected to it. The RS422
serial data stream from the Display is used to drive an opto-coupler in the
PSU, which detects the presence of either polarity voltage and enables the
flyback converter in the PSU.
The RS422 serial data stream from the Display enters the Input Board on
connector TSB1, 2 (as “DU DATA +” and “DU DATA-”). It is then passed to
the Trigger Board via PLYB 16, 17, and then on to the PSU via PLTH 11, 12
(as “PSU START” and “PSU START RTN”). For test purposes the PSU can
be turned on in the absence of a serial data stream by linking pins 1-2 on
LKA (PSU).
Transmit Enable
When the operator selects Transmit, the TU Enable signal is activated LOW
on the Trigger PCB (PLYH 10). On the S-Band Scanner Unit, this signal is
fed via the Power Supply Unit to the Input PCB and (via TSB 10) to the
Scanner Control Unit to start the antenna rotating. Once the antenna has
done one complete revolution transmission is started. When standby is
selected, transmission is immediately halted and, after one complete
revolution of the antenna, TU Enable is disabled.
The Modulator starts to generate radar pulses when the Trigger PCB sends
it MOD TRIGGER pulses (to PLVC 9). Note that the CHARGE TRIGGER
pulse (on PLVC 8) is present even in Standby mode.
6-21 65800010B
A signal indicating that the Magnetron has fired is fed via MAG SAMPLE
from PLVC 7 on the Modulator PCB to the Trigger PCB. This signal is
processed on the Trigger PCB and outputted as TX TRIG (PLYB 20 & 21)
to the Input PCB (PLZB 20 & 21) and then to the Display Unit via
TSB 5 & 6.
Note – TX DATA is sent from the Transceiver to the Display Unit.
DU DATA is sent from the Display Unit to the Transceiver Unit.
The Trigger PCB processes the serial data input from the display, and
generates the required control signals for the Transceiver. The data is
transmitted each time a bearing pulse is received from the Turning Unit.
The Trigger PCB generates the various timings signals required by the
Transceiver including the Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF).
Magnetron Operation
The Modulator PCB generates the high-voltage negative pulses required to
controlled from the Trigger PCB. A spark gap on the Modulator is fired if
the magnetron fails to operate. Continual operation of the spark gap is
detected and a signal is fed back to the Trigger PCB.
On detection of this signal, the Trigger PCB switches the radar to Standby,
and generates an error signal, which is transmitted to the Display Unit via
the serial data link. The error signal causes the Display Unit to switch to
Standby and generates an error alarm.
When Standby is selected, rotation of the Antenna is inhibited.
Transmission from the radar is inhibited if the Antenna is not rotating
(unless in Test Mode).
On the Trigger PCB, there is a timer circuit. This is basically a capacitor that
slowly discharges (between 4s and 18s) when power is removed from the
PCB. On power-up the microcontroller measures the charge remaining on
the capacitor. It determines whether the transceiver has been switched off
for long enough to require inhibiting transmit for three minutes until the
magnetron heaters have had time to warm up again.
The other analogue signals into the Trigger PCB come from the Modulator.
The Modulator supply voltage and the magnetron current (only when
transmitting) are measured and sent to the Display as an aid to fault finding.
The spark gap detect signal is generated by the modulator when the
magnetron arcs over. If it reaches a predetermined level the microcontroller
inhibits transmission for approximately one second and sends an error
messages to the Display.
65800010B 6-22
TURNING UNIT OVERVIEW (S-Band)
Drive System
The scanner motor is an AC induction motor. It drives either a 12:1 or a
20:1 reduction gearbox. The output of the gearbox drives the final output
helical gear via a pinion to give an overall reduction between the motor and
Antenna of approximately either 30:1 or 60:1 dependent on whether the
Turning Unit is a high speed variant or not.
A Scanner Control Unit connects the scanner motor to the ship’s AC
Supply. This unit incorporates a contactor controlled by the Transceiver to
switch the scanner motor on.
When standby is selected, rotation of the Antenna is inhibited.
(unless in test mode). An isolating switch is provided for AC systems to
switch the scanner motor supply off for safe servicing.
Bearing and Heading Marker System
A disc with 128 teeth is attached to the antenna torque tube and, combined
with an opto-coupler, generates 128 pulses per rotation of the Antenna.
A second opto-coupler together with a flag on the toothed disc generates a
Heading Marker approximately 10° before the Antenna is pointing dead
ahead. Correct alignment of the Heading Marker is set at installation by
electronic adjustment within the Display Unit.
Where it is not possible to adjust the Heading Marker alignment at the
display, optional extra circuitry can be fitted to the Input PCB to let the
alignment to be made electronically within the Turning Unit. When this
option is fitted an additional (isolated) Heading Marker output is provided.
As an option for special applications a size 11 synchro can be fitted as an
alternative source of bearing information.
Interconnections
AC power to the motor is by direct connection to terminal strips in the
terminal box attached to the motor. The terminations for interconnections
for the transceiver and the Turning Unit are under a cover on the side of the
Turning Unit. The AC power from the isolating switch is terminated at a
terminal block within the filter box. All other connections are made to plugs
or removable terminal strips on the input PCB.
6-23 65800010B
TRIGGER PCB (S-Band)
General Description
The Trigger PCB controls the operation of the Transceiver under instruction
from the Display. There are two serial links, which are used to transfer
control messages from the Display to the Trigger PCB and Transceiver
information back to the Display. The Trigger PCB generates the control and
tuning signals required by the Modulator, Receiver, Performance Monitor
and Biased Limiter. The PSU is enabled with a signal from the Trigger
PCB.
Signals To/From the Trigger PCB
To/From Display
• Serial Data to Display
• Serial Data from Display
• Trigger to Display
To/From Modulator
• Pulse Length select lines
• Charge and Modulator Triggers
• Magnetron Heater Turndown signal (only used for S-Band, Long
Pulse operation)
• Voltage/Current Monitor signals
• 10/25kW and S-/X-Band Configuration signals
To/From Receiver
• Tuning Voltage signal
• Bandwidth Control signal
• AFC/Manual control
• AFC Trigger
• Tune Indicator signal
To Biased Limiter
• Trigger signal
To Performance Monitor
• On/Off signal
• Mode Control signal
• Tuning Voltage signals
To/From Power Supply PCB
• +30V, +12V, +5V, 0V & -12V Supply lines
• Turning Unit Enable
• Power Supply Start and Return
65800010B 6-24
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (S-Band Trigger PCB)
The 80C51 family microcontroller provides overall control of the Trigger
PCB functions. Program memory and RAM are included within the
microcontroller IC. Serial I/O is handled by the microcontrollers internal
UART and an external RS422A driver and receiver. Baud rate is fixed at
76800 baud for operational use but is link selectable to 19200 or 38400
baud for test purposes. The serial data format is 8-bit data, 1 stop bit and
even parity.
The Display sends serial messages comprising four or five characters
depending on message content. Control messages are four bytes long and
tuning messages are five. The tuning voltage levels are sent as 12-bit
values, which are converted on the Trigger PCB using a four channel DAC
before amplification/buffering and distribution to the Receiver and
Performance Monitor.
The Bearing signal from the Turning Unit is used to initiate serial
transmission from the Trigger PCB. Each time one of the 4096 azimuth
pulses per rev is generated and fed into one of the microcontroller’s
interrupt pins, a character (one byte) is sent to the Display. One bit in each
of the characters sent is dedicated to the heading marker. On every new
heading marker pulse from the Turning Unit, the bit is toggled.
serial input from the Display is used to drive an opto-isolator, which detects
the presence of either polarity voltage and enables the PSU.
Trigger Outputs
There are a number of trigger signals generated by the Trigger PCB:
• Pre-Trigger
• Charge Trigger
• Modulator Trigger
• Display Trigger
• Performance Monitor Trigger
• AFC Trigger
• Swept Attenuation Initiate
The Charge Trigger is the timing signal used to recharge the Modulator
PFN. This is generated by the microcontroller using an internal timer
routine set to the appropriate PRF for the pulse length selected. A
wobbulation factor is added to the basic timing to ensure that no two radar
transmissions are locked together. The wobbulation is calculated according
to the number of serial messages received before going to transmit and the
position of the antenna between each trigger pulse.
An optional Pre-trigger will be produced approximately 11µs before the
modulator trigger. This is not normally fitted and is intended for use in
Special Options applications.
6-25 65800010B
The Modulator Trigger is used to let the charge out of the PFN into the
magnetron and is the trigger that starts the modulator firing. It is delayed
from the Charge Trigger by 100µs and gated off when the transceiver is in
standby.
In standby, the Display and Performance Monitor Triggers are generated
from the Mod Trigger pulse. When the transceiver is in transmit mode the
triggers begin on the leading edge of the magnetron sample pulse and end
after a preset time, adjustable using RV1.
The AFC Trigger is used by the receiver when in AFC mode and is only
generated when the transceiver is in transmit mode. The pulse is started on
the front edge of the Modulator Trigger and terminates on the back edge of
the magnetron sample pulse.
The Swept Attenuation Initiate pulse is the timing signal fed to the Limiter
Drive PCB, which generates the control for the biased limiter. It is started
by the edge of the Pre-trigger (approximately 2µs prior to magnetron firing)
and terminated 2.5µs after the leading edge of the magnetron sample pulse.
The Display and PM Triggers are essentially the same trigger and are
present at all times when the radar is powered up. They are initiated by the
Modulator Pulse and last for approximately 2.5µs.
Analogue Outputs
The Trigger PCB generates four tuning signals:
• LO Tune
• PM Tune
• Xr Adjust
• Xt Adjust
These signals are coded as 12-bit digital values and incorporated into the
serial messages from the Display. A 12-bit, four channel DAC is used to
generate the tuning signals from the message data. Additional buffering is
added to the LO and PM Tune outputs of the DAC and x3.5 amplification to
the Xr and Xt Adjust signals.
LO Tune is the 0V to +5V receiver tuning control and PM Tune the 0V to
+5V Performance Monitor main tuning control. Xr and Xt Adjust are 0V to
+15V signals used to control the receive and transmit attenuators in the
65800010B 6-26
Analogue Inputs
There are various analogue inputs to the Trigger PCB from other PCBs in
the transceiver. There are also some on-board signals that are fed into an
eight channel 8-bit ADC, and converted to digital values. These are used for
further processing by the microcontroller or are passed to the Display via
the serial message link.
The signals on the Trigger PCB that are measured are the dropout timer
and +12V and +30V supplies. The timer circuit is basically a capacitor that
the capacitor to determine whether the transceiver has been switched off for
long enough to warrant inhibiting transmit for three minutes until the
magnetron heaters have had time to warm up again. The power supply
levels are measured and the results sent to the Display as an aid to fault
diagnosis.
One channel of the ADC is used to detect whether a Performance Monitor
has been fitted to the system. The voltage on this channel will be lower
than a preset value if a Performance Monitor is present otherwise it will be
pulled to the +5V supply rail. This information is encoded and sent as part
of the configuration message to the Display.
The Receiver sends a tune indicator signal to the Trigger PCB, which
shows how close it is to being on tune. This signal is coded as part of the
serial message and sent to the Display.
message to the Display.
6-27 65800010B
Digital Outputs
The digital outputs from the Trigger PCB are all simple on/off control signals
to various parts of the transceiver.
Signals to the Receiver select wide or narrow bandwidth (Wideband) and
AFC or manual tuning mode (AFC On). Narrowband is selected when the
modulator is transmitting in long pulse and briefly during pulse length
changing. AFC or manual mode is selected by the radar operator and is
part of the control message sent from the Display.
Modulator signals MP and SP are used to set the pulse length as requested
by the radar operator:
• SP set to 0V indicates short pulse operation
• MP set to 0V indicates medium pulse operation
• Both SP and MP set to +5V indicates long pulse operation.
• SP and MP both set to 0V is an illegal state and will not happen in
normal operation.
Turndown enable is used to reduce the heater current in the magnetron and
is only set when an S-Band magnetron is fitted and is transmitting in long
pulse.
The control signals PM On/Off and PM Tx/Rx are used to switch the
Performance Monitor on and to switch it between system test mode and
receiver test mode.
TU Enable is the control signal fed to the Motor Drive PCB to start the
antenna rotating. When the operator selects transmit, the TU Enable signal
is activated to start the antenna rotating.
Once the antenna has done one complete revolution transmission is
started. When standby is selected, transmission is immediately halted and,
after one complete revolution of the antenna, TU Enable is disabled.
Optional I/O
There are several optional I/O signals for use with Special Options variants
of the PCB:
• Pre-trigger (as describe in the section on triggers)
• External Trigger Input
• Radar Inhibit.
The External Trigger input is used when the modulator needs to be
triggered from an external source rather than the Trigger PCB. Trigger
signals fed to this input are PRF limited to prevent damage to the
modulator. Radar Inhibit is a method of inhibiting transmission without
using the appropriate command in the serial message. An active signal at
this input will cause the microcontroller to inhibit transmission within one
trigger pulse at either of the internal PRFs.
65800010B 6-28
Built In Self Test (BIST)
The microcontroller performs a number of self-test operations and reports
the results to the Display as part of the serial message link.
Error situations that are monitored in the transceiver are:
• Serial message corruption
• Loss of Display messages
• Loss of Heading Marker signal
• Loss of either Charge or Modulator Trigger
• Magnetron arcing
Error situations will in all cases cause the microcontroller to inhibit
transmission until the error has been cleared. The other signals that are
monitored and sent directly to the Display without further action by the
microcontroller are the power supply lines and magnetron current as
described in the section on analogue inputs.
Test Modes
There are two test modes for the Trigger PCB. The production test mode is
used solely during production testing of the PCB and is initiated by fitting
the test link LK4. This must only be done on the production test bed as
connecting this link when incorporated into a transceiver could lead to
unpredictable and possibly dangerous operation.
The second test mode, of use to service engineers, can be initiated by
fitting the two links LK5 and LK6 to position 2-3. When in this mode the
transceiver can be removed from the turning unit, reconnected to the
Display below decks (with suitable test cables) and run as per normal
operation. A dummy load MUST be connected to the RF output. Since the
Transceiver has been removed from the Turning Unit and the Pulse Bearing
PCB outputs, the bearing and heading marker information normally required
for Trigger PCB operation is simulated on a section of test circuitry on the
Trigger PCB.
6-29 65800010B
TRANSCEIVER POWER SUPPLY (S-Band)
General Information
The power supply is an AC to DC inverter that generates the supplies for
the Transceiver. The inverter is housed on a single board and is powered
by an AC supply of nominal 115V or 230V in the frequency range 47-64Hz.
The power unit uses a boost converter front-end to provide a regulated high
voltage DC to a flyback converter providing the output supplied. Some of
these supplies use additional switch mode converters to provide regulated
outputs.
The outputs supplied by this power supply are:
• variable –600V;
• +30V;
• +20V;
• magnetron heaters (via further regulator, +12V, -12V and +5V); and
• +50V for the Motor Drive PCB (for the X-Band Turning Unit variant).
The power unit has the following features:
• -600V adjustable over the range -550V to -650V for control of
magnetron current via modulator.
• Output short circuit protection.
• Universal input from 95V to 276V without tap changing. Power factor
corrected providing a PF of better than 0.9.
The opto-coupler detects the presence of a serial data stream from the
display at PLTH 11, 12 and switches the flyback converter on. On detection
of the data stream the photo-transistor in U5 is turned on, pulling down the
gate of Q2 below its threshold voltage. Q2 turns off allowing the
compensation pin 1 of U4 to lift enabling output of the IC U4. In the PSU off
state Q2 is held on by current in R37 from Vcc.
For test purposes the PSU can be turned on in the absence of a serial data
stream by linking 1-2 on LKA.
Note – After the mains supply is applied to the PSU board, the Power
Factor Correction (PFC) circuit starts and generates 390V. While
mains power is applied, the PFC is active and cannot be manually
switched off. The start circuitry only controls the flyback converter
and so High Voltage DC is present on primary power components
whenever mains is present on the board. This fact should be
noted when servicing the Transceiver.
65800010B 6-30
MODULATOR PCB (S-Band)
Functional Description
The principal function of the Modulator PCB is to generate an 8kV, 8A
negative pulse to drive the cathode of the magnetron. An SCR is used to
resonantly charge a Pulse Forming Network (PFN) to –1200V from the –
600V Modulator HT supply. The Charge Trigger starts the charging cycle.
The number of sections of the PFN is selectable by the replays controlled
by the Pulse Length Control Lines. The number of sections of the PFN
used defines the length of the output pulse.
At a define time after the PFN is fully charged it is discharged by three
series-connected Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors through a pulse
transformer. The Modulator Trigger starts the discharge. The Pulse
Transformer, which has a set-up ratio of 12:1, transforms the resulting pulse
to 8kV. A saturable reactor connected across the primary of the pulse
transformer speeds up the back edges of the medium and short pulses.
Other functions include:
• regulating the magnetron heater supply;
• monitoring a spark gap to ensure correct operation of the magnetron;
and
• generation of a timing reference for the Radar Trigger.
Inputs to the Modulator PCB
• -600V Modulator HT Supply
• +20V Modulator Trigger Supply
• +16V - +27V Magnetron Heater Bulk Supply
• +12V
• -12V
Short Pulse Control Line When 0V selects short pulse.
Medium Pulse Control Line When 0V selects medium pulse.
Charge Trigger Starts charging of Pulse Forming Network.
Typically 1Amp current pulse.
Modulator Trigger Starts discharging of Pulse Forming Network.
Typically 4µs, 3.5V positive pulse.
Turn Down Enable DC voltage controls the magnetron heater
voltage. 0V on long pulse, 3.5V Standby
Medium and Short Pulse.
6-31 65800010B
Outputs from the Modulator PCB
Primary sample Positive pulse sample from pulse transformer
used to initiate Radar Trigger. Typically 40V
amplitude.
Magnetron current sample A DC voltage proportional to the magnetron
current derived from the secondary of the pulse
transformer. Typically +2.5V.
TX Active A signal that is normally 0V that rises to >2.5V if
the spark gap operates continuously for 2
seconds. This signal is used by the Trigger
PCB to indicate a transmitter fault to the display.
HT Sense Sample of Modulator HT Supply fed to Trigger
PCB for inclusion in BITE message sent to
display.
TX Define Link settings used to define modulator type to
Trigger PCB. 0V or 3.5V dependant on link
settings.
Magnetron Heater Supply
The magnetron heaters are derived from the Magnetron Heater Supply at
PLVD1 and PLVD2. This supply may vary between 16V and 27V.
The setting of link LK1 (fitted to the Modulator PCB) configures the
Modulator PCB for the intended magnetron. Refer to Figure 6.19 ‘Link
Settings – Modulator PCB’, in this chapter, for further information.
!WARNING!
On no account should the heater voltage be measured while the
Transceiver is transmitting.
System Mode Required Magnetron heater

voltage (measured between
TSJ1 and TSJ2)
10kW X-Band Standby, Short Pulse, 6.1V
Medium Pulse and Long
Pulse
25kW X-Band Standby, Short Pulse 6.1V
and Medium Pulse
Long Pulse Can be reduced to 5.1 V
depending on the type of
magnetron fitted
30kW S-Band Standby, Short Pulse 6.1V
and Medium Pulse
magnetron fitted
2.4.2 Fault Isolating Flowcharts (S-Band Scanners)
Flowcharts for isolating faults on S-Band Scanner Units are given on the
following pages. Flowchart 5 shows the overall flow through Flowchart 6 to
Flowchart 30 .
65800010B 6-32
FLOWCHART 5 OVERALL FLOWCHART – S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS
FLOWCHART 6
START DISPLAY FAULT
FLOWCHART 7
‘A’
FLOWCHART 8
‘A’
FLOWCHART 9
END
FLOWCHART 10
‘A’
FLOWCHART 11
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 12
‘A’
‘B’ END
FLOWCHART 13
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 14
‘A’
FLOWCHART 15
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 16
DISPLAY FAULT ‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 17
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 18
‘A’
FLOWCHART 19
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 20
FLOWCHART 21
DISPLAY FAULT ‘A’
FLOWCHART 22
‘A’
DISPLAY FAULT
‘B’
FLOWCHART 23
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 24
‘A’
FLOWCHART 25
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 26
FLOWCHART 27
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 28
FLOWCHART 29
‘A’
FLOWCHART 30
‘A’
6-33 65800010B
FLOWCHART 6 S-BAND SCANNER FAULTS
! WARNING !
When the covers are removed from the equipment, dangerous voltages are exposed.
Always isolate the turning unit from the ship’s supply before working on it.
Always isolate the transceiver from the ship’s supply while removing or replacing the transceiver cover.
CHECK CONNECTIONS
START TO SHIP’S SUPPLY
! WARNING !
THIS TEST EXPOSES
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES NO
IS MAINS
NO AT THE DISPLAY REMOVE PRESENT BETWEEN
DOES DISPLAY RUN UP?
THE COVER FROM THE TSP L & N AT DISPLAY
MAINS FILTER BOX FILTER BOX?
YES YES
IS DISPLAY PICTURE NO
NORMAL IN STANDBY? DISPLAY FAULT
YES
IS IS IS
’STBY/TX ERROR’ NO ’AZI ERROR’ NO ’Tx COMMS ERROR’ NO
DISPLAYED? DISPLAYED? DISPLAYED?
YES YES YES
GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 16’ GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 7 GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 28’

ENTRY POINT ‘A’ ENTRY POINT ‘A’ ENTRY POINT ‘A’
IS IS IS
NO ’Tx BIST ERROR’ NO ’MISSING HL, SL or NO ’LOW VIDEO ERROR’
DISPLAYED? NO SCAN HL ERROR’ DISPLAYED?
DISPLAYED?
YES YES YES
GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 29’ GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 18’ GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 21’

NO IS YES
’TRIG ERROR’ GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 20’
END ENTRY POINT ‘A’
DISPLAYED?
65800010B 6-34
(‘AZI ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
SWITCH TO TRANSMIT
YES GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 14’

IS ANTENNA ROTATING? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO
AT THE DISPLAY, SELECT ARE +12V NO ARE BOTH YES

TEST DATA 1, TX BIST. AND +30V CORRECT? VOLTAGES INCORRECT?
CYCLE THROUGH TESTS
YES NO
AT THE SCANNERCONTROL UNIT, SET GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 8 GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 10’

THE ISOLATION SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND ENTRY POINT ‘A’ ENTRY POINT ‘A’
LOCK IT TO MAKE SCANNER UNIT SAFE
FOR SERVICING
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, REMOVE THE ! WARNING !

FILTER BOX COVER. THIS TEST EXPOSES
MEASURE SHIP’S MAINS BETWEEN
TSE3 AND TSE4. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
IS MAINS PRESENT NO CHECK CONNECTIONS

BETWEEN TSE3 AND TSE4 END
TO SHIP’S SUPPLY
AT SCANNER UNIT?
YES YES
IS FUSE IN YES DOES REPLACING

SCANNER UNIT THE FUSE CLEAR
BLOWN? FAULT?
NO
NO
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, UNPLUG

CABLE 230 (MASTHEAD) or 228 GO TO ‘FLOW CHART12’
(BULKHEAD) FROM TSB (INPUT PCB) ENTRY POINT ‘B’
MEASURE VOLTAGE BETWEEN TSB1
AND TSB2 ON THE CABLE.
IS VOLTAGE NO CABLE 228 (BULKHEAD) or

BETWEEN TSB1 230 (MASTHEAD)
AND TSB2 2.0V-4.5V? IS FAULTY
YES
IS VOLTAGE
RECONNECT TSB. BETWEEN TSB1 NO
CHANGE INPUT PCB
AT THE INPUT PCB REMOVE PLZB AND TSB2 2.0V-4.5V?
YES
REPLACE PLZB.
IS VOLTAGE
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S NO
BETWEEN TSB1
MAINS AND REMOVE COVER. CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
AND TSB2 2.0V-4.5V?
RESTORE SHIP’S MAINS.
AT TRIGGER PCB REMOVE PLYH.
YES
IF FAULT NOT CLEARED

CHANGE POWER SUPPLY PCB REPLACE PLYH GO TO ‘FLOW CHART12’
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
6-35 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 7
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT

PRESS RESET
YES
IS ANTENNA ROTATING? END
NO
OPEN THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT. ! WARNING !

MEASURE SHIP’S MAINS BETWEEN THIS TEST EXPOSES
SAR-SAT, SAT-SAS, SAR-SAS (3 PHASE),
SAT-SAS (SINGLE PHASE) DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
NO CHECK SHIP’S SUPPLY

IS SHIP’S MAINS CORRECT?
FROM SWITCH FUSE
YES
IS +12V PRESENT NO
BETWEEN SAN AND
CHASSIS?
YES
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, SET ISOLATION

SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND LOCK IT TO
MAKE THE SCANNER UNIT SAFE FOR
SERVICING.
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT,
REMOVE THE FILER BOX COVER AT
THE TURNING UNIT
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS BELOW,
REMOVE THE FILTER BOX COVER AT
THE TRANSCEIVER.
NO
IS THE VOLTAGE
AT TSA1 0V?
YES
FAULT IS IN GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 9’
SCANNER CONTROL UNIT ENTRY POINT ‘A’
CHECK CONTACTOR.
CHECK THERMAL OVERLOAD.
65800010B 6-36
FROM FLOWCHART 8
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS +12V ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S

IS +12V PRESENT NO NO
PRESENT BEWEEN CHASSIS SUPPLY.
BEWEEN CHASSIS AND PLZG3(INPUT PCB)?
AND TSB9? REMOVE TRANSCEIVER COVER.
RESTORE SHIP’S SUPPLY.
YES YES
CHANGE INPUT PCB
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE NO IS THE VOLTAGE

AT TSB10 0V? AT PLZG3 (INPUT PCB 0V?
YES
NO
CHECK CONTINUITY OF CABLE TO

DISPLAY, SCANNER CONTROL UNIT.
REMOVE COVER FROM

TRANSCEIVER UNIT
IS THE VOLTAGE YES YES IS +12V PRESENT

CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN CHASSIS AND
AT PLTG3 (PSU PCB) 0V?
PLTG3 (PSU PCB)?
NO NO
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLTH10 (PSU PCB) 0V? CHANGE PSU PCB
NO
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLTY10 (TRIG PCB) 0V? CHANGE CABLE
NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
6-37 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 7
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S

MAINS AND REMOVE COVER.
IS THE NO
AT THE POWER SUPPLY FIT LKA 1-2. AT THE POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE AT TP6
RESTORE SHIP’S MAINS. UNPLUG PLTG
+11.4V - +12.6V?
AT THE POWER SUPPLY MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE BETWEEN TP6 AND EARTH
AND TP4 AND EARTH. YES
GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 11’
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
YES IS THE NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB VOLTAGE AT TP4 AT THE TRIGGER PCB
+28.5V - +31.5V? UNPLUG PLYA
YES IS THE NO
CHANGE RECEIVER VOLTAGE AT TP4 AT THE TRIGGER PCB
+28.5V - +31.5V? UNPLUG PLYH
YES IS THE NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB VOLTAGE AT TP4 CHANGE POWER SUPPLY PCB
+28.5V - +31.5V?
65800010B 6-38
FROM FLOWCHART 10
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS THE YES CHANGE INPUT PCB.

VOLTAGE AT TP6 IF FAULT PERSISTS CHANGE SCANNER
+11.4V - +12.6V? CONTROL UNIT.
CHECK WIRING TRANSCEIVER TO
SCANNER CONTROL UNIT.
NO
AT THE TRIGGER PCB

UNPLUG PLYB
IS THE YES CHANGE INPUT PCB.

VOLTAGE AT TP6 IF FAULT PERSISTS CHANGE
+11.4V - +12.6V? PERFORMANCE MONITOR.
CHECK WIRING BETWEEN INPUT PCB
NO AND PERFORMANCE MONITOR.
AT THE TRIGGER PCB

UNPLUG PLYA
IS THE YES CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN RECEIVER

VOLTAGE AT TP6 AND TRIGGER PCB
+11.4V - +12.6V?
NO
AT THE TRIGGER PCB

UNPLUG PLYH
IS THE YES
VOLTAGE AT TP6 CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
+11.4V - +12.6V?
NO
CHANGE POWER SUPPLY
6-39 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 7
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT INPUT PCB MEASURE IS THE NO

VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLZB17 VOLTAGE AT PLZB17- CHANGE INPUT PCB
AND PLZB18 PLZB18 2.0V-4.5V?
YES
IS THE
VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLYB17- NO
CHANGE CABLE
PLYB18 AT THE TRIGGER
PCB 2.0V - 4.5V?
YES
IS THE
VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLYH11- NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
PLYH12 AT THE TRIGGER
PCB APPROX 1.0V?
YES
IS THE
CHANGE CABLE
PLYH12 AT POWER SUPPLY PCB
APPROX 1.0V?
YES
IS THE
NO
VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLTA4- ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S
PLTA6 115V - 230V? SUPPLY.
CHECK MAINS FILTER, WIRING ON
MAINS FILTER PANEL, CABLE FROM
YES MAINS FILTER PANEL TO PLTA.
GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 13’ YES ON PSU PCB, NO

ENTRY POINT ‘A’ IS VOLTAGE BETWEEN TP14- CHECK THAT LKB IS FITTED ON POWER
TP2 380VDC - 418V? SUPPLY PCB.
IF LINK IS FITTED CHANGE POWER
SUPPLY PCB.
FROM FLOWCHART 7
ENTRY POINT
‘B’
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S YES

IS THE VOLTAGE CHANGE PSU
SUPPLY AND REMOVE TRANSCEIVER
115VAC - 240VAC?
COVER.
REMOVE PLTA FROM PSU.
RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY. NO
MEASURE VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLTA4 -
PLTA6.

SUPPLY.
MAINS FILTER PANEL TO PLTA.
65800010B 6-40
FROM FLOWCHART 12
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
! WARNING !
DURING THIS TEST, OUTPUT
AT PSU FIT LKA VOLTAGES WILL BE PRESENT
AT THE POWER SUPPLY WHEN
THE RADAR IS TURNED OFF.
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
POWER SUPPLY PCB OR
4.75V - 5.25V? RECEIVER PCB
NO
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES
UNPLUG PLTB AND PLTD CHANGE MODULATOR PCB
POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
NO
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON NO
UNPLUG PLTH UNPLUG PLTG
POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
YES
IS THE CHANGE INPUT PCB.

NO VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES CHANGE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT.
CHANGE PSU POWER SUPPLY PCB CHECK WIRING TO SCANNER
4.75V - 5.25V? CONTROL UNIT
IS THE
RECONNECT PLYA, AND AT CHANGE RECEIVER
TRIGGER PCB UNPLUG PLYA POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
NO
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES CHANGE PERFORMANCE MONITOR
RECONNECT PLYA, AND AT
INPUT PCB UNPLUG PLZD POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
NO
CHANGE INPUT PCB
6-41 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 7
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT SET

THE ISOLATOR SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND
LOCK IT TO MAKE SCANNER UNIT YES
SAFE TO SERVICE. REMOVE IS FAULT CLEARED? END
PERFORMANCE MONITOR COVER.
ON THE PULSE BEARING PCB CHECK
LK1 - IS SET
2 -3 FOR HIGH SPEED TURNING UNITS NO
1 -2 FOR LOW SPEED TURNING UNITS
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

IF FAULT IS NOT CLEARED:
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S CHECK DATA CABLE FROM DISPLAY
SUPPLY AND REMOVE TRANSCEIVER TO TRANSCEIVER.
COVER. YES ENSURE THAT BRAIDS ARE
IS FAULT STILL PRESENT? PROPERLY BONDED.
AT THE TRIGGER PCB SET LK5, AND
LK6 TO 2 - 3. CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
AT THE MODULATOR PCB UNPLUG & PULSE BEARING PCB.
PLVB. CHECK FOR DAMAGED OR MISSING
NO TEETH ON THE PULSE DISK.
IF FAULT PERSISTS THERE IS A
DISPLAY FAULT.
IS THE IS THE
YES VOLTAGE AT PLRE2 ON PULSE YES
VOLTAGE AT PLZE2 ON THE
INPUT PCB 11.2V - 12.5V? BEARING PCB 11.2V - 12.5V?
NO NO
CHANGE CABLE
RESET LK5 ON TRIGGER PCB BETWEEN INPUT PCB AND PULSE
TO POSITION 1 -2 BEARING PCB
IS THE
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB NO YES
VOLTAGE AT PLZB9 ON
CHECK CABLE FROM TRIGGER PCB INPUT PCB 11.2V - 12.5V? CHANGE INPUT PCB
TO INPUT PCB
IS THE YES
VOLTAGE AT PLZE1 ON THE GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 15’
INPUT PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO
UNPLUG PLZE
IS THE YES
NO
CHANGE INPUT PCB VOLTAGE AT PLZE1 ON THE
INPUT PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? CHANGE PULSE BEARING PCB
65800010B 6-42
FROM FLOWCHART 14
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
THE FAULT IS PROBABLY ON PULSE

BEARING PCB.
ALSO CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUITS
IS THE VOLTAGE AT NO IS THE VOLTAGE AT YES ON:
PLRE4 ON PULSE BEARING PLRE1 ON PULSE BEARING TRIGGER PCB,
PCB APPROX 2.5V? PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? INPUT PCB IN THE TURNING UNIT,
INPUT BOARD IN THE TRANSCEIVER,
YES WHERE THE TRANSCEIVER IS BELOW
NO
DECKS.
CHANGE CABLE
BETWEEN INPUT PCB AND
PULSE BEARING PCB
IS THE VOLTAGE CHANGE INPUT PCB.

YES NO
IS TRANSCEIVER ALOFT? AT PLZB11 ON INPUT PCB IN CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
TURNING UNIT AND PULSE BEARING PCB
APPROX 2.5V?
NO YES

AT TSC11 ON INPUT PCB IN NO
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
TURNING UNIT
AND PULSE BEARING PCB
APPROX 2.5V?
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE CHECK PULSE DISC FOR DAMAGE.

YES IS THE VOLTAGE NO
AT PLZB11 ON INPUT PCB IN CLEAN OPTO COUPLERS ON THE
AT PLYB11 ON TRIGGER PCB
TRANSCEIVER UNIT PULSE BEARING PCB.
APPROX 2.5V?
APPROX 2.5V?
CHANGE PULSE BEARING PCB.
IF FAULT IS NOT CLEARED CHANGE
NO NO TRIGGER PCB.
CHANGE INPUT PCB IN TRANSCEIVER

CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN TURNING
INPUT PCB AND TRIGGER PCB
UNIT AND TRANSCEIVER.
6-43 65800010B
(‘STBY/TX ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
CHECK DATA CABLES BETWEEN

TRANSCEIVER AND DISPLAY
IS ‘STBY/TX’ NO
ERROR DISPLAYED? END
YES
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN

TRANSCEIVER INPUT PCB
AND TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘STBY/TX’ NO
YES
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘STBY/TX’ NO
YES
DISPLAY FAULT
65800010B 6-44
(‘SPARK GAP TEST’ FAILURE)
FROM FLOWCHART 29
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT, SET

ISOLATION SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND
LOCK IT TO MAKE SCANNER UNIT
SAFE FOR SERVICING.
COVER.
RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY TO THE
TRANSCEIVER.
MEASURE THE VOLTAGE

BETWEEN TSJ1 - TSJ2
ON THE EHT PCB
IS THE VOLTAGE NO IS THE VOLTAGE YES

BETWEEN TSJ1 - TSJ2 ON BETWEEN PLVD1 - PLVD4 ON CHANGE MODULATOR PCB
EHT PCB >4.7V? MODULATOR PCB >16V?
YES NO
UNPLUG PLVD FROM

CHANGE MAGNETRON
THE MODULATOR PCB
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

BETWEEN PLVD1 - PLVD4 ON CHANGE MODULATOR PCB
THE CABLE >16V?
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
IF THE ABOVE TESTS FAIL

TO LOCATE THE CAUSE OF
THE SPARK GAP TEST FAILURE
FAULT IS ON MODULATOR PCB OR

TRIGGER PCB
6-45 65800010B
(‘MISSING HMKR ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6 OR 30
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, SET THE ! WARNING !

ISOLATION SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND THIS TEST EXPOSES
LOCK IT TO MAKE THE SCANNER UNIT
SAFE TO SERVICE. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
COVER.
AT THE MODULATOR PCB UNPLUG
PLVD.
AT THE TRIGGER PCB, SET LK5 AND

LK6 TO POSITION 2 - 3.
RESTORE POWER TO TRANSCEIVER.
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

NO CHECK DATA CABLE BETWEEN DISPLAY AND TRANSCEIVER, ENSURE THAT
IS FAULT CLEARED? BRAIDS ARE PROPERLY BONDED.
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB AND TRIGGER PCB.
CHECK BEARING CABLE FROM DISPLAY.
IF FAULT PERSISTS THERE IS A DISPLAY FAULT
YES
RESET LK5 AND LK6

TO POSITION 1 - 2
IS THE VOLTAGE YES IS THE VOLTAGE NO CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN INPUT

AT PLZE2 ON INPUT PCB AT PLA2 ON BEARING PCB
11.2V - 12.5V?
PCB AND PULSE BEARING PCB
11.2V - 12.5V?
NO YES
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLZB9 ON INPUT PCB CHANGE INPUT PCB
11.2V - 12.5V?
NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB IS THE VOLTAGE YES

CHECK CABLE FROM TRIGGER PCB AT PLZE1 ON INPUT PCB GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 19’
TO INPUT PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO
UNPLUG PLZE
NO IS THE VOLTAGE YES

CHANGE INPUT PCB AT PLZE1 ON PLUG ON INPUT PCB CHANGE PULSE BEARING PCB
4.5V - 5.25V?
65800010B 6-46
FROM FLOWCHART 18
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
MONITOR VOLTAGE AT TSC12 ON

THE INPUT PCB WHILE ROTATING CHANGE INPUT PCB.
THE ANTENNA BY HAND THROUGH CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
ONE REVOLUTION AND PULSE BEARING PCB
YES
MONITOR VOLTAGE AT PLRE5 ON
DOES THE VOLTAGE NO THE PULSE BEARING PCB WHILE DOES THE VOLTAGE
SWITCH BETWEEN 5V - 0V ONCE ROTATING THE ANENNA BY SWITCH BETWEEN 5V - 0V ONCE
PER REVOLUTION? HAND THROUGH ONE REVOLUTION PER REVOLUTION?
YES
NO
IF FAULT PERSISTS CHECK FOR SHORT
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS ON INPUT BOARD IN TURNING YES IS VOLTAGE AT
FROM SHIP’S SUPPLY UNIT, AND WHEN THE TRANSCEIVER IS
PLRE1 ON PULSE BEARING PCB
BELOW DECKS ON THE INPUT BOARD IN
4.5V - 5.25V?
THE TRANSCEIVER.
IF FAULT IS STILL PRESENT CHANGE
TRIGGER PCB. NO

PULSE BEARING PCB AND
INPUT PCB
YES IS THERE NO
IS TRANSCEIVER ALOFT? CONTINUITY BETWEEN TSC12 AND CHANGE INPUT PCB
PLZB12 TURNING UNIT
INPUT PCB?
NO YES
IS THERE
CONTINUITY BETWEEN NO CHANGE CABLE
TSC12 ON TURNING UNIT INPUT PCB BETWEEN TURNING UNIT
AND TSC12 ON TRANSCEIVER AND TRANSCEIVER
INPUT PCB?
YES
IS THERE NO CHANGE
CONTINUITY BETWEEN TSC12 AND
PLZB12 ON TRANSCEIVER
INPUT PCB?
YES
IS THERE CABLE IS FAULTY

CONTINUITY BETWEEN NO BETWEEN INPUT PCB
PLZB12 ON INPUT PCB AND AND TRIGGER PCB
PLYB12 ON TRIGGER
PCB?
YES
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
6-47 65800010B
(‘TRIGGER ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
REMOVE COVER FROM

TRANSCEIVER FILTER BOX
IS VOLTAGE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING IS FAULTY:

YES CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB AND
BETWEEN TSB5 AND TSB6 AT
THE TRANSCEIVER INPUT TRIGGER PCB.
PCB 2.0V - 4.0V? INPUT PCB.
TRIGGER PCB.
NO MODULATOR PCB.
DISPLAY UNIT.
AT THE INPUT PCB,

DISCONNECT WIRES TO
TSB9 AND TSB10
RECONNECT WIRES:
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT:
AT THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT SET THE ISOLATING TO ‘OFF’
IS VOLTAGE
NO AND LOCK IT TO MAKE THE SCANNER UNIT SAFE TO SERVICE.
BETWEEN
TSB5 AND TSB6
2.0V - 4.0V? ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S SUPPLY AND REMOVE
TRANSCEIVER COVER.
REMOVE FILTER BOX COVER.
YES RESTORE SHIP’S SUPPLY.
CHECK DATA CABLE BETWEEN AT THE TRIGGER YES

PCB, IS THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN
CHANGE INPUT PCB.
DISPLAY AND INPUT PCB CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN
PLY20 AND PLYB21
2.0V - 4.0V? INPUT PCB AND TRIGGER PCB
NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
NO
CABLE OK? CHANGE CABLE
YES
DISPLAY FAULT
65800010B 6-48
(‘TX ERROR’/’LOW VIDEO ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS NORMAL YES GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 24’

BACKGROUND NOISE ENTRY POINT ‘A’
VISIBLE? DISPLAY FAULT
NO
YES
IS AN IS THERE
YES AT THE DISPLAY UNPLUG PLV.
OSCILLOSCOPE APPROX 0.5V PEAK-PEAK
MONITOR THE SIGNAL ON THE CABLE
AVAILABLE? VIDEO NOISE?
TO PLV
NO NO
CHECK VIDEO CABLES FROM SKV AT THE TRANSCEIVER, UNPLUG THE

DISPLAY UNIT TO SKV TRANSCEIVER VIDEO LEAD TO THE DISPLAY.
FOR CONTINUITY AND SHORT MONITOR THE SIGNAL ON THE VIDEO
CIRCUITS OUTPUT TO THE DISPLAY
FAULT IS IN THE CABLE YES IS THERE

BETWEEN THE DISPLAY AND APPROX 0.5V PEAK-PEAK
VIDEO NOISE?
THE TRANSCEIVER
NO
NO IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT:

ARE CABLES OK? REPAIR CABLE AT THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT,
SET THE ISOLATING SWITCH TO ‘OFF’
AND LOCK IT TO MAKE THE SCANNER
UNIT SAFE TO SERVICE
YES
SUPPLY.
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT: REMOVE THE FILTER BOX COVER AT
CHECK VIDEO COAXIAL CABLES THE TRANSCEIVER.
AT THE SCANNER CONTROL UNIT, FROM TRANSCEIVER/TURNING UNIT
SET THE ISOLATING SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ REMOVE TRANSCEIVER COVER,
SKV, AND FROM SKZV ON I/P PCB TO RESTORE SHIP’S SUPPLY TO THE
AND LOCK IT TO MAKE TE SCANNER SKXV ON RECEIVER FOR CONTINUITY
UNIT SAFE TO SERVICE. TRANSCEIVER
AND SHORT CIRCUITS.
ON THE I/P PCB CHECK FOR
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S CONTINUITY BETWEEN SKV AND
SUPPLY. SKZV. CHECK THAT SKZV IS NOT
SHORTED TO EARTH.
THE TRANSCEIVER.
REMOVE TRANSCEIVER COVER, GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 22’
RESTORE SHIP’S SUPPLY TO ENTRY POINT ‘A’
TRANSCEIVER.
REPAIR CABLE. NO ARE CABLES YES GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 22’

CHANGE INPUT PCB AND SOCKETS OK? ENTRY POINT ‘B’
6-49 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 21 FROM FLOWCHART 21

ENTRY POINT ENTRY POINT
‘A’ ‘B’
AT THE RECEIVER UNPLUG PLXV.

MONITOR THE SIGNAL A SKXV ON THE
RECEIVER
CHANGE THE INPUT PCB.

CHECK THE VIDEO CABLE BETWEEN
IS THERE APPROX YES THE TRANSCEIVER AND DISPLAY
0.5V PEAK-PEAK UNIT, AND THE VIDEO CABLE
VIDEO NOISE? BETWEEN THE RECEIVER AND THE
INPUT PCB.
NO
MONITOR THE FOLLOWING

VOLTAGES AT PLPB ON THE
RECEIVER FILTER PCB.
PLPB1 -11.2V - -12.6V
PLPB2 11.2V - 12.6V
PLPB3 27.5V - 31.5V DISPLAY FAULT
PLPB4 4.7V - 5.25V
NO
ARE THE YES CHANGE IS THE

VOLTAGES CORRECT? RECEIVER ASSEMBLY FAULT CLEARED?
NO YES
YES CHANGE END

ARE ANY OF THE
VOLTAGES CORRECT?
POWER SUPPLY
NO
UNPLUG PLPB AND MONITOR THE

VOLTAGES ON THE SAME PINS ON
PLPB ON THE RECEIVER FILTER PCB
ARE THE YES CHANGE

VOLTAGES CORRECT? RECEIVER ASSEMBLY
NO

VOLTAGES AT PLPA ON THE
RECEIVER FILTER PCB. ARE THE YES CHANGE
PLPB1 -11.2V - -12.6V VOLTAGES CORRECT? RECEIVER FILTER PCB
PLPB2 11.2V - 12.6V
PLPB3 27.5V - 31.5V
PLPB4 4.7V - 5.25V
NO
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
65800010B 6-50
FROM FLOWCHART 22 or 29
ENTRY POINT
‘A’

VOLTAGES AT PLTH ON THE POWER
SUPPLY PCB.
PLTH9 -11.2V - -12.6V
PLTH4 11.2V - 12.6V
PLTH2 27.5V - 31.5V
PLTH6 4.7V - 5.25V
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

ARE THE YES CHECK CABLE FROM PLTH TO
VOLTAGES CORRECT? TRIGGER PCB.
CHECK CABLE FROM TRIGGER PCB
TO PLPA.
NO
CHANGE INPUT PCB, OR SCANNER

ARE THE YES CONTROL UNIT.
UNPLUG PLTG VOLTAGES CORRECT?
AT POWER SUPPLY PCB CHECK CABLE FROM INPUT PCB TO
SCANNER CONTROL UNIT.
NO
UNPLUG PLYB
AT TRIGGER PCB
ARE THE YES CHANGE INPUT PCB, OR

VOLTAGES CORRECT? PERFORMANCE MONITOR, OR INPUT
BOARD IN TRANSCEIVER.
CHECK CABLE FROM INPUT PCB TO
PERFORMANCE MONITOR.
NO
ARE THE YES RECEIVER FILTER PCB

UNPLUG PLYA VOLTAGES CORRECT?
AT TRIGGER PCB IS FAULTY
NO
UNPLUG PLTD
AT POWER SUPPLY PCB
ARE THE YES CHANGE

VOLTAGES CORRECT?
MODULATOR PCB
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
6-51 65800010B
(‘LOW VIDEO ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 21
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE DISPLAY,
SELECT THE TRANSCEIVER
TEST DATA Tx BIST MENU
IS ‘CHARGE NO
TRIGGER’ CORRECT? CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
YES
IS ‘MODULATOR YES IS ‘MAGNETRON YES

TRIGGER CORRECT? CURRENT 6A - 9.5A? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO NO

THE ISOLATION SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND
LOCK IT TO MAKE THE SCANNER SAFE
TO SERVICE. GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 25’
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S ENTRY POINT ‘A’
COVER.
RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY.
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

CHANGE MODULATOR.
65800010B 6-52
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
CHANGE
MODULATOR PCB
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE AT NO IS THE VOLTAGE

UNPLUG PLVB BETWEEN PLVB1 AND PLVB4 ON
PLVB1 ON THE MODULATOR FROM THE POWER SUPPLY
PCB -540V - -650V? THE CABLE -540V - -650V?
YES NO
AT THE MODULATOR PCB, MONITOR

THE VOLTAGE AT PLVD1, AND AT CHANGE
PLVD5 POWER SUPPLY PCB
IS VOLTAGE AT YES
PLVD1 16V - 26V
CHANGE
PLVD5 18V - 22V? MODULATOR PCB
NO
UNPLUG PLVD, MONITOR ON THE

CABLE THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN
PLVD1 - PLVD4, AND PLVD5 TO
GROUND.
IS VOLTAGE AT YES
PLVD1 16V - 26V
CHANGE
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
6-53 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 24
ENTRY POINT
‘A’ END
YES
IF RADAR TUNING YES AT THE DISPLAY, IS RADAR

PROCEDURE IS PERFORMED, SELECT AFC TUNING PICTURE STILL OK?
IS FAULT CLEARED?
NO NO
CHANGE RECEIVER OR,

CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
AT THE DISPLAY, SELECT TX

SETTINGS, COARSE TUNE -
ENTER PASSWORD AND SET TUNING DISPLAY FAULT
CONTROL TO MINIMUM.
NO
IS THE VOLTAGE YES AT THE DISPLAY, SET THE IS THE VOLTAGE

AT PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER TUNING CONTROL TO MAXIMUM AT PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER
PCB < 0.5V? PCB > 4.75V?
NO YES
AT THE DISPLAY, SET THE

TUNING CONTROL TO MAXIMUM

THE ISOLATION SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ AND
LOCK IT TO MAKE SCANNER UNIT
SAFE TO SERVICE.
CHECK CABLE TO RECEIVER FILTER ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S
IS THE VOLTAGE YES
BOARD. SUPPLY AND REMOVE TRANSCEIVER
AT PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER
CHECK CABLE FROM RECEIVER COVER.
PCB > 4.75V?
FILTER BOARD TO RECEIVER. RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY.
CHANGE RECEIVER FILTER BOARD.
NO CHANGE RECEIVER.
ON THE TRIGGER PCB, DISCONNECT

CABLE TO PLYA AND MEASURE THE GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 27’
VOLTAGE ON PLYA7. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
YES RECONNECT PLYA.

IS THE VOLTAGE DISCONNECT PLYB
> 4.75V?
NO
CHANGE
TRIGGER PCB
CHANGE YES IS THE VOLTAGE AT NO CHANGE

RECEIVER PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER RECEIVER FILTER PCB
PCB > 4.75V?
65800010B 6-54
FROM FLOWCHART 26
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS THE VOLTAGE CHANGE RECEIVER, OR

YES
AT PLYA3 ON THE TRIGGER CHANGE LIMITER, OR
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V? CHANGE MAGNETRON
NO
UNPLUG PLYA AT IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLYA3 ON THE TRIGGER CHANGE RECEIVER
THE TRIGGER PCB
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V?
NO
UNPLUG PLYH AT NO IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLYH2 ON THE TRIGGER CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
THE TRIGGER PCB
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V?
IS THE VOLTAGE YES CHANGE TRIGGER PCB

AT PLYTH2 ON THE POWER SUPPLY
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V?
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
6-55 65800010B
(‘TX COMMS ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
CHECK DATA CABLE BETWEEN

IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
ERROR’ DISPLAYED? END
YES
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN

AND TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
CHANGE
IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
DISPLAY FAULT
SUSPECT DISPLAY INPUT PCB.
65800010B 6-56
(‘TX BIST ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 6
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
SELECT SYSTEM MENU.

SELECT TEST DATA MENU.
SELECT TX BIST MENU.
IS THE MAGNETRON NO GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 17’

SUSPECT MAGNETRON.
CURRENT BETWEEN 6A - 9.5A ENTRY POINT ‘A’
SUSPECT MODULATOR.
ON LONG PULSE?
YES
IS THE MODULATOR NO GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 25’

SUSPECT MODULATOR.
VOLTAGE BETW EEN SUSPECT POWER SUPPLY. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
540V - 640V?
YES
IS THE +30 VOLT NO GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 23’

LINE BETWEEN SUSPECT POWER SUPPLY. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
+26 - +36V?
YES

+11 - +13.4V?
YES
DOES NO GO TO ‘FLOW CHART 17’

SPARK GAP PASS? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
YES
GO TO ‘FLOW CHART 30’

ENTRY POINT ‘A’
6-57 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 29
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
NO CHECK DATA CABLE FROM DISPLAY. CHANGE TRIGGER BOARD.

DOES DATA PASS? SUSPECT TRIGGER PCB.
SUSPECT INPUT PCB. CHANGE INPUT BOARD.
YES
IS NO CHECK PERFORMANCE MONITOR & GO TO ‘FLOW CHART 18’

HEADING MARKER BEARING CABLE IN BULKHEAD ENTRY POINT ‘A’
CORRECT? SYSTEMS.
SUSPECT PULSE BEARING PCB.
SUSPECT INPUT PCB.
YES
END
YES
DOES NO DOES
CHARGE TRIGGER PASS? CHANGE TRIGGER PCB CHARGE TRIGGER PASS?
YES NO
MODULATOR TRIGGER
FAILURE
DOES NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB MODULATOR TRIGGER PASS? CHANGE MODULATOR
YES
END
65800010B 6-58
2.5 X-Band Scanner Unit
2.5.1 Technical Description
There are two basic types of X-Band Scanner Unit:
• With an integral transceiver module.
• Without an integral transceiver.
Each type can have a number of variants dependent on motor supply and
the options that are fitted.
The Scanner Unit includes:
• an Antenna
• an antenna support casting
• a Turning Unit.
Included in the Turning Unit is:
• a motor and gearbox
• a Bearing and Heading Marker PCB
• an Input PCB
• a Performance Monitor and integral transceiver module (optional).
The Transceiver Unit includes:
• a base casting
• a cover
• a transceiver module
• an Input PCB.
Communication between the Transceiver and the Display is by means of a
serial data link. Where a separate Transceiver Unit is used, an RF feeder
(waveguide) is used to transfer the microwave energy between the
Transceiver Unit and the Turning Unit.
The Scanner Unit and the Transceiver Unit are compatible with
BridgeMaster Display Units if a Display Compatibility Unit is used.
Physical Arrangements
The Turning Unit is constructed from upper and lower aluminium castings.
The upper casting is hinged at one end to the lower casting for service and
installation. The motor, gearbox and drive assembly are bolted to the upper
casting. The transceiver module, when fitted, is bolted to the upper casting
and can be removed as a unit for below-decks servicing.
The terminal strips for the interconnecting cables to other units are under a
screen cover on the base of the lower casting. The Performance monitor is
housed beneath the upper casting and has a microwave transparent cover
protecting it, fitted on the top surface of the upper casting.
Four M10 x 45 bolts are used to attach the Scanner Unit to the radar
platform or wheelhouse roof. The Antenna Support Casting attaches the
Antenna to the Turning Unit. This directly transfers the microwave signals
between the Turning Unit and the Antenna.
6-59 65800010B
Interconnections between the Scanner unit and other units in the system
are made using screened cables. The exception is the Bulkhead system,
where the microwave signals are carried between the Turning Unit and the
Transceiver via a waveguide.
All the cables that enter the Scanner Unit through waterproof cables glands.
These incorporate an EMC gasket that makes contact with the cable braid.
The separate Transceiver is designed to be bulkhead mounted and is
attached using four M8 bolts, studs or screws (coachbolts).
TRANSCEIVER MODULE OVERVIEW (X-Band)
The transceiver module can be fitted in the Turning Unit, or mounted on a
casting for below-decks bulkhead mounting as a separate unit.
The module consists of:
• the Modulator PCB
• a Power Supply PCB
• Trigger PCB
• the Receiver
• the microwave components.
Communication between the Transceiver Unit and the Display Unit is by
means of two serial data links:
• one from the Transceiver to the Display Unit; and
• one from the Display Unit to the Transceiver.
This information is transmitted using a special data cable that incorporates
four twisted pairs:
• two pairs are used for data transmission
• one pair is used for trigger
• the other pair is spare.
The data passed from the Transceiver to the Display includes:
• Heading Marker
• Incremental Bearing
• Transceiver Status
• Error Message
• Built In Test Equipment (BITE) data
• Tuning Indicator
The data transmitted from the Display to the Transceiver includes:
• Standby/Transmit
• Pulse Length
• Tuning
• AFC/Manual
• Sector Blanking
• Performance Monitor Control, and Installation Settings
65800010B 6-60
Power Supply
The power supply operates from the ship’s AC mains, and provides all of
the power requirements for the electronics modules within the Turning Unit
and Transceiver. The AC mains is always present at the power supply
even when the radar is switched off at the display.
The presence of data on the serial data link when the display is switched on
is detected by the power supply, which then becomes active.
The power supply includes a Power Factor Correction circuit, and a number
of switching regulators to generate the necessary voltage supplies.
Overcurrent detection circuits protect the power supply against overloads
on its outputs.
Trigger PCB
The Trigger PCB processes the serial data from the Display Unit, and
generates the required control signals for the Transceiver. It monitors
functions within the Transceiver, the Heading Marker, and encodes the
information for transmission to the Display Unit. The data is transmitted
each time a bearing pulse is received from the Turning Unit. The trigger
PCB generates the various timing signals required by the transceiver
including the Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF).
Modulator PCB
The modulator PCB generates the high voltage negative pulses needed to
controlled from the trigger PCB.
A spark gap on the modulator is fired if the magnetron fails to operate.
Continual operation of the spark gap is detected and a signal is fed back to
the trigger PCB. When the trigger PCB detects this signal it switches the
radar to standby, and generates an error signal to be transmitted to the
Display Unit via the serial data link. The error signal causes the Display
Unit to switch to standby and generate an error alarm.
Microwave Circuit
The transceiver uses a conventional three-port circulator to direct the path
of the microwave energy to and from the antenna. A magnetron coupled to
the circular provides the RF energy to be transmitted. A solid-state limiter
coupled to the circulator protects the receiver from high-powered microwave
signals from the magnetron, or adjacent radars.
On Scanner Units and Transceivers fitted with additional features options,
or for use with Vision processing, a biased limiter is fitted in place of the
standard limiter. Under the control of a signal from the trigger PCB the
limiter applies swept RF attenuation to radar returns to reduce the system
sensitivity at short ranges.
6-61 65800010B
Receiver
The receiver consists of:
• a low noise amplifier
• a mixer
• a linear preamplifier
• a logarithmic amplifier
• a video amplifier.
The linear preamplifier followed by a logarithmic amplifier amplifies the
60MHz output of the mixer, the output of which is detected. The resulting
video signal is then further amplified before transmission to the Display or
Compatibility Unit.
The receiver also incorporates an AFC system. Once the receiver has
been tuned, the AFC system makes sure that the receiver remains on tune
during variations in tuning due to thermal drift of the mixer, magnetron etc.
The operator can select between manual tuning and automatic tuning. A
signal from the trigger PCB is used to select the mode of operation. A
signal from the AFC circuit is fed to the trigger circuit to indicate the state of
tune of the receiver. This signal is at its minimum value when the receiver
is correctly tuned.
AUTOMATIC START-UP SEQUENCE (X-Band)
The automatic start-up sequence described below, should be read in
conjunction with Figure 6.46 ‘X-Band Turning Unit (Aloft) Schematic’.
Start-up
!WARNING!
Once mains power is applied to the PSU board the Power Factor Correction
(PFC) circuitry starts and generates 390V. It should be noted that while
mains is applied the PFC is active and cannot be manually switched off.
The start circuitry only controls the flyback converter so High Voltage DC is
present on primary power components whenever mains power is present on
the board. This fact should be noted when serving the Transceiver.
when there is a Display (or Compatibility Unit) connected to it. The
presence of a voltage on DU DATA input from the Display is used to drive
an opto-coupler in the PSU. This detects the presence of either polarity
voltage and enables the flyback converter in the PSU.
The DU DATA signals from the Display enter the Input Board on connector
TSB 1, 2 (as “DU DATA +” and “DU DATA-”). It is then passed to the
Trigger Board via PLYB 16, 17, and then on to the PSU via PLTH 11, 12 (as
“PSU START” and “PSU START RTN”). It is the presence of a voltage on
the DU DATA inputs, not the presence of serial data, that starts the Power
Supply.
stream by linking pins 1-2 on LKA (PSU).
65800010B 6-62
Transmit Enable
When the operator selects Transmit, the TU Enable signal is activated LOW
on the Trigger PCB (PLYH 10). On the X-Band Scanner Unit, this signal is
fed to the Power Supply Unit and via the Turning Unit On/Off and Input PCB
to the Motor Drive PCB to start the antenna rotating.
Once the antenna has done one complete revolution, transmission is
The Modulator starts to generate radar pulses when the Trigger PCB sends
it MOD TRIGGER pulses (to PLVC 9). Note that the CHARGE TRIGGER
pulses (on PLVC 8) are present even in Standby mode.
A signal indicating that the Magnetron has fired is fed via MAG SAMPLE
from PLVC 7 on the Modulator PCB to the Trigger PCB. This signal is
processed on the Trigger PCB and outputted as TX TRIG (PLYB 20 & 21)
to the Input PCB (PLZB 20 & 21) and then to the Display Unit via TSB 5 & 6
Note – TX DATA is sent from the Transceiver to the Display Unit.
DU DATA is sent from the Display Unit to the Transceiver Unit.
The Trigger PCB processes the serial data input from the display, and
generates the required control signals for the Transceiver. The data is
transmitted each time a bearing pulse is received from the Turning Unit.
The Trigger PCB generates the various timing signals required by the
Transceiver including the Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF).
Magnetron Operation
The Modulator PCB generates the high-voltage negative pulses required to
controlled from the Trigger PCB. A spark gap on the Modulator is fired if
the magnetron fails to operate. Continual operation of the spark gap is
detected and a signal is fed back to the Trigger PCB.
On detection of this signal, the Trigger PCB switches the radar to Standby,
and generates an error signal that is transmitted to the Display Unit via the
serial data link. The error signal causes the Display Unit to switch to
Standby and generate an error alarm.
When Standby is selected, rotation of the Antenna is inhibited.
(unless in Test Mode).
On the Trigger PCB, there is a timer circuit that is basically a capacitor that
the capacitor. It determines if the transceiver has been switched off for long
enough to warrant inhibiting transmit for three minutes until the magnetron
heaters have had time to warm up again.
6-63 65800010B
messages to the Display.
TURNING UNIT OVERVIEW (X-Band)
Drive System
The scanner motor is a 3-phase electronically commutated DC motor. The
motor commutation drive signals are provided by the Motor Drive PCB,
which has the capability of providing High and Low speed operation by link
selection.
The motor drives an integral 32:1 reduction gearbox. The output of the
gearbox drives a pulley system with a single toothed belt having a reduction
ratio of 3:1. The final pulley is attached to the Antenna torque tube
assembly. The overall reduction between the motor and Antenna is
approximately 96:1.
When standby is selected, rotation of the Antenna is inhibited.
(unless in test mode).
A switch is provided on the Scanner Unit to inhibit rotation for safe
servicing.
Motor Drive Board (Incorporating the Dynamic Brake facility)
The Motor Drive PCB generates the supply and control signals for the 3-
phase electronically commutated DC motor that turns the Scanner Unit.
Link LK1 is used to select between High or Low speed operation. The link
should be set between pins 1 & 2 for Low Speed operation (Factory
Default). For High Speed operation, the link is parked on pin 1, or not fitted.
For remotely selectable antenna speed the link should be set between pins
2 & 3. Note that if no link is fitted, the default is High Speed operation.
On Scanner units fitted with the additional features option additional circuitry
allows the links to be selected by a remotely mounted switch. This gives the
operator the option to change the antenna rotation speed.
The Motor Drive PCB is supplied with +50VDC from the Transceiver power
supply (in both Aloft and Bulkhead fits).
Pulling control line ‘TU Enable’ below 1.5 volts starts a slow build up of
speed up to the maximum set by the speed selection link. The 6 output
FET switches, which perform the commutation, are protected by a current
sensing and limiting circuit, in the event of overload or stall.
65800010B 6-64
Signals form the Hall Sensors in the motor are used to control the
commutation sequence, and are also used to provide a degree of speed
compensation in high wind load conditions. An additional feature of the
PCB is a Dynamic Brake that prevents the antenna from ‘windmilling’ when
the radar is turned off or on standby. This circuit is passive and will operate
with no supply voltage.
Bearing and Heading Marker System
A disc with 128 teeth is attached to the Antenna torque tube and combined
with an opto-coupler generates 128 pulses per rotation of the Antenna.
A second opto-coupler together with a flag on the toothed disc generates a
Heading Marker approximately 10° before the Antenna is pointing dead
ahead. Correct alignment of the Heading Marker is set at installation by
electronic adjustment with the Display Unit.
Both opto-couplers are on the Pulse Bearing PCB. The Pulse Bearing PCB
multiplies the 128 bearing pulses by 32 to generate 4096 pulses per
antenna revolution. The 4096 azimuth pulses and the heading marker are
routed through the Input PCB to the Trigger PCB. They are then
incorporated into the serial data to be transmitted to the Display Unit.
Link LK1 is used to select between High or Low speed operation. The link
should be set between pins 1 & 2 for Low Speed operation (Factory
Default). For High Speed operation, the link is parked on pin 1. For
remotely selectable antenna speed, the link should be set between pins 2 &
3. Note that if no link is fitted, the default is High Speed operation.
On Scanner units fitted with the additional features option an additional
relay allows the links to be selected by the same remotely mounted switch
used to select the antenna rotation rate. This makes sure speed settings
match those remotely selected on the motor drive PCB.
On scanner units fitted with the additional features option, a method is given
(on the Input PCB) to allow the heading marker alignment to be made
electronically within the Turning Unit. When this option is fitted an
additional (isolated) Heading Marker output is provided. As an option for
special applications a size 11 synchro can be fitted as an alternative source
of bearing information.
Interconnections
The terminations for interconnections for the Transceiver and the Turning
Unit are under a cover on the inside of the lower casting of the Turning Unit.
The AC power from the isolating switch is terminated at a terminal block
within the filter box on the inside of the lower casting of the Turning Unit. All
other connections are made to plugs or removable terminal strips on the
input PCB.
6-65 65800010B
TRIGGER PCB (X-Band)
General Description
The trigger PCB controls the operation of the Transceiver under instruction
from the Display. There are two serial links, which are used to transfer
control messages from the Display to the Trigger PCB and Transceiver
information back to the Display. The Trigger PCB generates the control and
tuning signals required by the Modulator, Receiver, Performance Monitor
and Biased Limiter. The PSU is enabled with a signal from the Trigger
PCB.
Signal To/From the Trigger PCB
To/From Display
• Serial Data to Display
• Serial Data from Display
• Trigger to Display
To/From Modulator
• Pulse Length select lines
• Charge and Modulator Triggers
• Magnetron Heater Turndown signal (only used for S-Band, Long
Pulse operation)
• Voltage/Current Monitor signals
• 10/25kW and S-/X-Band Configuration signals
To/From Receiver
• Tuning Voltage signal
• Bandwidth Control signal
• AFC/Manual control
• AFC Trigger
• Tune Indicator signals
To Biased Limiter
• Trigger signal
To Performance Monitor
• On/Off Signal
• Mode Control signal
• Tuning Voltage signals
To/From Power Supply PCB
• +30V, +12V, +5V, 0V & -12V Supply lines
• Turning Unit Enable
• Power Supply Start and Return
65800010B 6-66
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (X-Band Trigger PCB)
The 80C5 family microcontroller provides overall control of the Trigger PCB
functions. Program memory and RAM are included within the
microcontroller IC. Serial I/O is handled by the micrcontrollers internal
UART and an external RS422A driver and receiver. Baud rate is fixed at
76800 baud for operational use but is link selectable to 19200 or 38400
baud for test purposes. The serial data format is 8-bit data, 1 stop bit and
even parity.
The Display sends serial messages comprising four or five characters
depending on message content. Control messages are four bytes long and
tuning messages are five. The tuning voltage levels are sent as 12-bit
values, which are converted on the Trigger PCB using a four-channel DAC
before amplification/buffering and distribution to the Receiver and
The Bearing signal from the Turning Unit is used to initiate serial
transmission from the Trigger PCB. Each time one of the 4096 azimuth
pulses per rev is generated and fed into one of the microcontrollers interrupt
pins, a character (one byte) is sent to the Display. One bit in each of the
characters sent is dedicated to the heading marker on every new heading
marker pulse from the Turning Unit (the bit is toggled).
serial input from the Display is used to drive an opto-islolator that detects
the presence of either polarity voltage and enables the PSU.
Trigger Outputs
There are a number of trigger signals generated by the Trigger PCB:
• Pre-Trigger
• Charge Trigger
• Modulator Trigger
• Display Trigger
• Performance Monitor Trigger
• AFC Trigger
• Swept Attenuation Initiate
The Charge Trigger is the timing signal used to recharge the Modulator
PFN. This is generated by the microcontroller using an internal timer
routine set to the appropriate PRF for the pulse length selected. A
wobbulation factor is added to the basic timing to ensure that no two radar
transmissions are locked together. The wobbulation is calculated according
to the number of serial messages received before going to transmit and the
position of the antenna between each trigger pulse.
Transceivers fitted with additional features provide a Pre-trigger
approximately 11µs before the modulator trigger.
6-67 65800010B
The Modulator Trigger is used to let the charge out of the PFN into the
magnetron and is the trigger that starts the modulator firing. It is delayed
from the Charge Trigger by 100µs and gated off when the transceiver is in
standby.
In standby, the Display and Performance Monitor Triggers are generated
from the Mod Trigger pulse. When the transceiver is in transmit mode the
triggers begin on the leading edge of the magnetron sample pulse and end
after a preset time, adjustable using RV1.
The AFC Trigger is used by the receiver when in AFC mode and is only
generated when the transceiver is in transmit mode. The pulse is started on
the front edge of the Modulator Trigger and terminates on the back edge of
the magnetron sample pulse.
The Swept Attenuation Initiate pulse is the timing signal fed to the Limiter
Drive PCB which generates the control for the biased limiter. It is started by
the front edge of the Pre-trigger (approximately 2µs prior to magnetron
firing) and terminated 2.5µs after the leading edge of the magnetron sample
pulse.
The Display and PM Triggers are essentially the same trigger and are
present at all times when the radar is powered up. They are initiated by the
Modulator Pulse and last for approximately 2.5µs.
Analogue Outputs
The Trigger PCB generates four tuning signals:
• LO Tune
• PM Tune
• Xr Adjust
• Xt Adjust.
These signals are coded as 12-bit digital values and incorporated into the
serial messages from the Display. A 12-bit, four channel DAC is used to
generate the tuning signals from the message data. Additional buffering is
added to the LO and PM Tune outputs of the DAC and x3.5 amplification to
the Xr and Xt Adjust signals.
LO Tune is the 0V to +5V receiver tuning control and PM Tune the 0V to
+5V Performance Monitor main tuning control. Xr and Xt Adjust are 0V to
+15V signals used to control the receive and transmit attenuators in the
65800010B 6-68
Analogue Inputs
There are various analogue inputs to the Trigger PCB. These are from other
PCBs in the transceiver and some on-board signals. The on-board signals
are fed into an eight channel 8-bit ADC. They are then converted to digital
values either for further processing by the microcontroller or to be passed to
the Display via the serial message link.
The signals on the Trigger PCB that are measured are the dropout timer
+12V and +30V supplies. The timer circuit is basically a capacitor that
the capacitor to determine whether the transceiver has been switched off for
long enough to warrant inhibiting transmit for three minutes until the
magnetron heaters have had time to warm up again. The power supply
level is measured and the results are sent to the Display as an aid to fault
diagnosis,
One channel of the ADC is used to detect whether a Performance Monitor
has been fitted to the system. The voltage on this channel will be lower
than a preset value if a Performance Monitor is present otherwise it will be
pulled to the +5V supply rail. This information is encoded and sent as part
of the configuration message to the Display.
The Receiver sends a tune indicator signal to the Trigger PCB that shows
how close it is to being on tune. This signal is coded as part of the serial
message and sent to the Display.
message to the Display.
Digital Outputs
The digital outputs from the Trigger PCB are all simple on/off control signals
to various parts of the transceiver.
Signals to the Receiver select wide or narrow bandwidth (Wideband) and
AFC or manual tuning mode (AFC On). Narrowband is selected when the
modulator is transmitting in long pulse and briefly during pulse length
changing. AFC or manual mode is selected by the radar operator and is
part of the control message sent from the Display.
Modulator signals MP and SP are used to set the pulse length as requested
by the radar operator.
• SP set to 0V indicates short pulse operation
• MP set to 0V indicates medium pulse operation
• both SP and MP set to +5V indicates long pulse operation.
• SP and MP both set to 0V is an illegal state and will not happen in
normal operation.
6-69 65800010B
Turndown enable is used to reduce the heater current in the magnetron and
is only set when an S-Band magnetron is fitted and is transmitting in long
pulse.
The control signals PM On/Off and PM Tx/Rx are used to switch the
Performance Monitor on and to switch it between system test mode and
receiver test mode.
TU Enable is the control signal fed to the Motor Drive PCB to start rotation
of the antenna. When the operator selects transmit the TU Enable signal is
activated to start the antenna rotation.
Once the antenna has done one complete revolution, transmission is
Optional I/O
There are several optional I/O signals for use with the additional features
variant of the PCB:
• Pre-trigger – described in the section on triggers.
• External Trigger Input – used when the modulator needs to be
triggered from an external source rather than the Trigger PCB.
Trigger signals fed to this input are PRF limited to prevent damage to
the modulator.
• Radar Silence – used to inhibit transmission without using the
appropriate command in the serial message. An Active signal at this
input will cause the microcontroller to inhibit transmission within one
trigger pulse at either of the internal PRFs.
Built In Self Test (BIST)
The microcontroller performs a number of self test operations and reports
the results to the Display as part of the serial message link. Error situations
that are monitored in he transceiver are:
• Serial message corruption.
• Loss of Display messages.
• Loss of Heading Marker signal.
• Loss of either Charge orModulator Trigger.
• Magnetron arcing.
Error situations will in all cases cause the microcontroller to inhibit
transmission until the error has been cleared. The other signals that are
monitored and sent directly to the Display without further action by the
microcontroller are the power supply lines and magnetron current (as
described in the section on analogue inputs)
65800010B 6-70
Test Modes
There are two test modes for the Trigger PCB.
The production test mode is used solely during production testing of the
PCB and is initiated by fitting the test link LK4. This must only be done on
the production test bed. Connecting this link when incorporated into a
transceiver could lead to unpredictable and possibly dangerous operation.
The second test mode, of use to service engineers, can be initiated by
fitting the two links LK5 and LK6 to position 2-3. These links allow the
Trigger PCB to generate azimuth pulses and heading marker pulses
internally. When in this mode the transceiver will transmit without the
antenna rotating. The transceiver assembly can then be removed from the
turning unit, and be connected to the Display below decks (with suitable test
cables) and run as per normal operation. A dummy load MUST be
connected to the waveguide outlet of the transceiver. Failure to do so may
result in serious personal injury and could cause severe damage to the
transceiver..
6-71 65800010B
TRANSCEIVER POWER SUPPLY (X-Band)
General Information
The power supply is an AC to DC inverter that generates the supplies for
the Transceiver. The inverter is housed on a single board and is powered
by an AC supply of nominal 115V or 230V in the frequency range 47-64Hz.
The power unit uses a boost converter front end to provide a regulated high
voltage DC to a flyback converter providing the output supplied. Some of
these supplies use additional switch mode converters to provide regulated
outputs.
The outputs supplied by this power supply are:
• variable
• –600V
• +30V
• +20V
• magnetron heaters (via further regulator, +12V, -12V and +5V)
• +50V for the Motor Drive PCB (for the X-Band Turning Unit variant).
The power unit has the following features:
• -600V adjustable over the range –550V to –650V for control of
magnetron current via modulator.
• Output short circuit protection.
• Universal input from 95V to 276V without tap changing. Power factor
corrected providing a PF of better than 0.9.
The opto-coupler detects the presence of a serial data stream from the
display at PLTH 11, 12 to switch the flyback converter on. On detection of
the data stream the photo transistor within U5 is turned on, pulling down the
gate of Q2 below its threshold voltage. Q2 turns off allowing the
compensation pin 1 U4 to rise enabling output of the IC U4. In the PSU off
state Q2 is held on by current in R37 from Vcc.
stream by linking 1-2 on LKA.
Note that once the mains supply is applied to the PSU board, the PFC
(Power Factor Correction) circuit starts and generates 390V. While mains
is applied, the PFC is active and cannot be manually switched off. The start
circuitry only controls the flyback converter and so High Voltage DC is
present on primary power components whenever mains is present on the
board. This fact should be noted when servicing the Transceiver.
65800010B 6-72
MODULATOR PCB (X-Band)
Functional Description
The principal function of the Modulator PCB is to generate an 8kV, 8A
negative pulse to drive the cathode of the magnetron. An SCR is used to
resonantly charge a Pulse Forming Network (PFN) to –1200V from the –
600V Modulator HT supply. The Charge Trigger initiates the charging
cycle. The number of sections of the PFN is selectable by the relays
controlled by the Pulse Length Control Lines. The number of sections of
the PFN used defines the length of the output pulse.
At a defined time after the PFN is fully charged it is discharged by three
series-connected Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors through a pulse
transformer. The Modulator Trigger initiates the discharge. The Pulse
Transformer, which has step up ratio of 12:1, transforms the resulting pulse
to 8kV. A saturable reactor connected across the primary of the pulse
transformer speeds up the back edges of the medium and short pulses.
Other functions include regulating the magnetron heater supply, monitoring
a spark gap to ensure correct operation of the magnetron, and generation of
a timing reference for the Radar Trigger.
Inputs to the Modulator PCB
• -600V Modulator HT Supply
• +20V Modulator Trigger Supply
• +16V - +27V Magnetron Heater Bulk Supply
• +12V
• -12V
Short Pulse Control When 0V selects short pulse.
Medium Pulse Control When 0V selects medium pulse.
Line
Charge Trigger Initiates charging of Pulse Forming Network.
Typically 1Amp current pulse.
Modulator Trigger Initiates discharge of Pulse Forming Network.
Typically 4µs, 3.5V positive pulse.
Turn Down Enable DC voltage controls the magnetron heater voltage.
0V on long pulse, 3.5V Standby Medium and Short
Pulse.
6-73 65800010B
Outputs from the Modulator PCB
Primary sample Positive pulse sample from pulse transformer used
to initiate Radar Trigger. Typically 40V amplitude.
Magnetron current A DC voltage proportional to the magnetron
sample current derived from the secondary of the pulse
transformer. Typically +2.5V.
TX Active A signal that is normally 0V that rises to >2.5V if
the spark gap operates continuously for 2
seconds. This signal is used by the Trigger PCB
to indicate a transmitter fault to the display.
HT Sense Sample of Modulator HT Supply fed to Trigger
PCB for inclusion in BITE message sent to
display.
TX Define Link settings used to define modulator type to
Trigger PCB. 0V or 3.5V dependant on link
settings.
Magnetron Heater Supply
The magnetron heaters are derived from the Magnetron Heater Supply at
PLVD1 and PLVD2. This supply may vary between 16V and 27V.
The setting of link LK1, fitted to the Modulator PCB, configures the
Modulator PCB for the intended magnetron. Refer to Figure 6.19 ‘Link
Settings Modulator PCB’, in this chapter, for further information.
!WARNING!
On no account should the heater voltage be measured whilst the
Transceiver is transmitting.
System Mode Required Magnetron heater

voltage (measured between
TSJ1 and TSJ2)
10kW X-Band Standby, Short Pulse, 6.1V
Medium Pulse and Long
Pulse
25kW X-Band Standby, Short Pulse 6.1V
and Medium Pulse
magnetron fitted
30kW S-Band Standby, Short Pulse 6.1V
and Medium Pulse
magnetron fitted
2.5.2 Fault Isolation Flowcharts (X-Band Scanners)
Flowcharts for isolating faults on X-Band Scanner Units are given on the
following pages. Flowchart 31 shows the overall flow through Flowchart 32
to Flowchart 56 .
65800010B 6-74
FLOWCHART 31 OVERALL FLOWCHART – X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS
FLOWCHART 32
START DISPLAY FAULT
FLOWCHART 33
‘A’
FLOWCHART 34
‘A’
FLOWCHART 35
END
FLOWCHART 36
‘A’
FLOWCHART 37
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 38
‘A’
‘B’ END
FLOWCHART 39
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 40
‘A’
FLOWCHART 41
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 42
FLOWCHART 43
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 44
‘A’
FLOWCHART 45
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 46
FLOWCHART 47
FLOWCHART 48
‘A’
DISPLAY FAULT
‘B’
FLOWCHART 49
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 50
‘A’
FLOWCHART 51
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 52
FLOWCHART 53
‘A’ END
FLOWCHART 54
FLOWCHART 55
‘A’
FLOWCHART 56
‘A’
6-75 65800010B
FLOWCHART 32 X-BAND SCANNER FAULTS
!WARNING!
When the covers are removed from the equipment, dangerous voltages are exposed.
Always isolate the turning unit from the ship’s supply before working on it.
Always isolate the transceiver from the ship’s supply while removing or replacing the transceiver cover.
CHECK CONNECTIONS
START TO SHIP’S SUPPLY
! WARNING !
THIS TEST EXPOSES
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES NO
IS MAINS
NO AT THE DISPLAY REMOVE PRESENT BETWEEN
DOES DISPLAY RUN UP?
THE COVER FROM THE TSP L & N AT DISPLAY
MAINS FILTER BOX FILTER BOX?
YES YES
IS DISPLAY PICTURE NO
NORMAL IN STANDBY? DISPLAY FAULT
YES
IS IS IS
’STBY/TX ERROR’ NO ’AZI ERROR’ NO ’Tx COMMS ERROR’ NO
DISPLAYED? DISPLAYED? DISPLAYED?
YES YES YES

IS IS IS
NO ’Tx BIST ERROR’ NO ’MISSING HL, SL or NO ’LOW VIDEO ERROR’
DISPLAYED? NO SCAN HL ERROR’ DISPLAYED?
DISPLAYED?
YES YES YES

NO IS YES
’TRIG ERROR’ GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 46’
END ENTRY POINT ‘A’
DISPLAYED?
65800010B 6-76
(‘AZI ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 32
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
SWITCH TO TRANSMIT
YES GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 40’

IS ANTENNA ROTATING? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO
AT THE DISPLAY, SELECT ARE +12V NO ARE BOTH YES

TEST DATA 1, TX BIST. AND +30V CORRECT? VOLTAGES INCORRECT?
CYCLE THROUGH TESTS
YES NO
AT THE SCANNER, SET SCANNER GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 34’ GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 36’

ON/OFF SWITCH TO OFF TO MAKE ENTRY POINT ‘A’ ENTRY POINT ‘A’
SCANNER UNIT SAFE FOR SERVICING
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, REMOVE THE ! WARNING !

FILTER BOX COVER. THIS TEST EXPOSES
MEASURE SHIP’S MAINS BETWEEN
TSE3 AND TSE4. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
IS MAINS PRESENT NO CHECK CONNECTIONS

BETWEEN TSE3 AND TSE4 END
TO SHIP’S SUPPLY
AT SCANNER UNIT?
YES YES
IS FUSE IN YES DOES REPLACING

SCANNER UNIT THE FUSE CLEAR
BLOWN? FAULT?
NO
NO
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, UNPLUG

CABLE 230 (MASTHEAD) or 228 GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 38’
(BULKHEAD) FROM TSB (INPUT PCB) ENTRY POINT ‘B’
MEASURE VOLTAGE BETWEEN TSB1
AND TSB2 ON THE CABLE.
IS VOLTAGE NO CABLE 228 (BULKHEAD) or

BETWEEN TSB1
AND TSB2 2.0V-4.5V?
230 (MASTHEAD)
IS FAULTY
YES
IS VOLTAGE
RECONNECT TSB. BETWEEN TSB1 NO
AT THE INPUT PCB REMOVE PLZB
CHANGE INPUT PCB
AND TSB2 2.0V-4.5V?
YES
REPLACE PLZB.
IS VOLTAGE
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S NO
BETWEEN TSB1
AND TSB2 2.0V-4.5V? CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
RESTORE SHIP’S MAINS.
AT TRIGGER PCB REMOVE PLYH.
YES
IF FAULT NOT CLEARED

CHANGE POWER SUPPLY PCB REPLACE PLYH GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 38’
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
6-77 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 33
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
YES
IS ANTENNA ROTATING? END
NO
SET SCANNER ON/OFF SWITCH TO OFF. ! WARNING !

RAISE SCANNER TOP AND ENSURE THIS TEST EXPOSES
SAFETY LOCK IS ENGAGED.
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
NO CHECK SHIP’S SUPPLY

IS SHIP’S MAINS CORRECT?
FROM SWITCH FUSE
YES
AT THE MOTOR
DRIVER
IS +12V PRESENT NO
BETWEEN Pin 11 of IC.U1 AND
CHASSIS?
YES
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, SET SCANNER

ON/OFF SWITCH TO ‘OFF’.
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT,
REMOVE THE FILER BOX COVER AT
THE TURNING UNIT
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS BELOW,
THE TRANSCEIVER.
AT THE MOTOR
DRIVER
IS THE VOLTAGE NO
ON EITHER PIN OF D6
+45V TO +65V?
(2-PIN POWER DEVICE
YES ON HEAT SINK)
AT THE MOTOR
DRIVER
IS THE VOLTAGE NO
ON Pin 2 of IC.U1 CHANGE
+4.75V To +5.3V? MOTOR DRIVER BOARD
YES
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
65800010B 6-78
FROM FLOWCHART 34
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE
INPUT PCB
IS +12V ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S
IS +12V PRESENT NO NO
PRESENT BEWEEN CHASSIS SUPPLY.
BEWEEN CHASSIS AND PLZG3(INPUT PCB)?
AND PLZL6? REMOVE TRANSCEIVER COVER.
YES YES
CHANGE INPUT PCB
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE NO IS THE VOLTAGE NO REMOVE COVER FROM

AT TSB10 0V? AT PLZG3 (INPUT PCB 0V? TRANSCEIVER UNIT
YES
AT SCANNER, SET ON/OFF

SWITCH TO ‘ON’
IS THE VOLTAGE NO
CHANGE INPUT BOARD.
AT PLZL5 0V? CHECK WIRING TO ON/OFF SWITCH
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE NO CHECK WIRING BETWEEN PLZL5

ON PIN 23 OF IC.U1 <0.5? (INPUT BOARD) AND PLN5
(MOTOR DRIVE BOARD)
YES
IF STILL NO ANTENNA ROTATION,

CHANGE MOTOR DRIVE BOARD
IS THE VOLTAGE YES YES IS +12V PRESENT

AT PLTG3 (PSU PCB) 0V? CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN CHASSIS AND
PLTG3 (PSU PCB)?
NO NO
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLTH10 (PSU PCB) 0V? CHANGE PSU PCB
NO
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLTY10 (TRIG PCB) 0V? CHANGE CABLE
NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
6-79 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 33
ENTRY POINT
‘A’

IS THE NO
AT THE POWER SUPPLY FIT LKA 1-2. AT THE POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE AT TP6
RESTORE SHIP’S MAINS. UNPLUG PLTG
+11.4V - +12.6V?
AT THE POWER SUPPLY MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE BETWEEN TP6 AND EARTH
AND TP4 AND EARTH. YES
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
YES IS THE NO
VOLTAGE AT TP4 AT THE TRIGGER PCB
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
+28.5V - +31.5V? UNPLUG PLYA
YES IS THE NO
VOLTAGE AT TP4 AT THE TRIGGER PCB
CHANGE RECEIVER
+28.5V - +31.5V? UNPLUG PLYH
YES IS THE NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB VOLTAGE AT TP4 CHANGE POWER SUPPLY PCB
+28.5V - +31.5V?
65800010B 6-80
FROM FLOWCHART 36
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS THE YES
VOLTAGE AT TP6
CHANGE INPUT PCB.
+11.4V - +12.6V? IF FAULT PERSISTS CHECK WIRING
TRANSCEIVER TO DISPLAY UNIT
NO
AT THE TRIGGER PCB

UNPLUG PLYB
IS THE YES
VOLTAGE AT TP6
CHANGE INPUT PCB.
+11.4V - +12.6V? IF FAULT PERSISTS CHANGE
CHECK WIRING BETWEEN INPUT PCB
NO AND PERFORMANCE MONITOR.
AT THE TRIGGER PCB

UNPLUG PLYA
IS THE YES CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN RECEIVER

VOLTAGE AT TP6 AND TRIGGER PCB
+11.4V - +12.6V?
NO
AT THE TRIGGER PCB

UNPLUG PLYH
IS THE YES
VOLTAGE AT TP6 CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
+11.4V - +12.6V?
NO
CHANGE POWER SUPPLY
6-81 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 33
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT INPUT PCB MEASURE IS THE NO

VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLZB17 VOLTAGE AT PLZB17- CHANGE INPUT PCB
AND PLZB18 PLZB18 2.0V-4.5V?
YES
IS THE
VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLYB17- NO
PLYB18 AT THE TRIGGER
CHANGE CABLE
PCB 2.0V - 4.5V?
YES
IS THE
PLYH12 AT THE TRIGGER CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
PCB APPROX 1.0V?
YES
IS THE
PLYH12 AT THE POWER SUPPLY CHANGE CABLE
PCB APPROX 1.0V?
YES
IS THE
NO
VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLTA4- ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S
PLTA6 115V - 230V? SUPPLY.
YES MAINS FILTER PANEL TO PLTA.
GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 39’ YES ON PSU PCB, NO

ENTRY POINT ‘A’ IS VOLTAGE BETWEEN TP14- CHECK THAT LKB IS FITTED ON POWER
TP2 380VDC - 418V? SUPPLY PCB.
IF LINK IS FITTED CHANGE POWER
SUPPLY PCB.
FROM FLOWCHART 33
ENTRY POINT
‘B’
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S YES

IS THE VOLTAGE CHANGE PSU
115VAC - 240VAC?
COVER.
REMOVE PLTA FROM PSU.
RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY. NO
MEASURE VOLTAGE BETWEEN PLTA4 -
PLTA6.

SUPPLY.
MAINS FILTER PANEL TO PLTA.
65800010B 6-82
FROM FLOWCHART 38
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
! WARNING !
DURING THIS TEST, OUTPUT
AT PSU FIT LKA VOLTAGES WILL BE PRESENT
AT THE POWER SUPPLY WHEN
THE RADAR IS TURNED OFF.
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
POWER SUPPLY PCB OR
4.75V - 5.25V? RECEIVER PCB
NO
IS THE
UNPLUG PLTB AND PLTD CHANGE MODULATOR PCB
POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
NO
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON NO
UNPLUG PLTH UNPLUG PLTG
POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
YES
IS THE
NO VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES
CHANGE PSU POWER SUPPLY PCB CHANGE INPUT PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
IS THE
RECONNECT PLYA, AND AT CHANGE RECEIVER
TRIGGER PCB UNPLUG PLYA POWER SUPPLY PCB
4.75V - 5.25V?
NO
IS THE
VOLTAGE AT TP7 ON YES CHANGE PERFORMANCE
RECONNECT PLYA, AND AT
INPUT PCB UNPLUG PLZD POWER SUPPLY PCB MONITOR
4.75V - 5.25V?
NO
CHANGE INPUT PCB
6-83 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 33
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
! WARNING !
THIS TEST EXPOSES
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
AT THE SCANNER, SET SCANNER
ON/OFF SWITCH TO ‘OFF’ TO PREVENT
ROTATION. YES
RAISE TOP COVER AND ENSURE IS FAULT CLEARED? END
SAFETY LOCK IS ENGAGED.
ON THE PULSE BEARING PCB CHECK
LK1 - IS SET
2 -3 FOR HIGH SPEED TURNING UNITS NO
1 -2 FOR LOW SPEED TURNING UNITS
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S CHECK DATA CABLE FROM DISPLAY
SUPPLY AND EXPOSE TRANSCEIVER. TO TRANSCEIVER.
YES ENSURE THAT BRAIDS ARE
AT THE TRIGGER PCB SET LK5, AND IS FAULT STILL PRESENT?
LK6 TO 2 - 3. PROPERLY BONDED.
AT THE MODULATOR PCB UNPLUG CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB &
PLVB. PULSE BEARING PCB.
CHECK FOR DAMAGED OR MISSING
NO
TEETH ON THE PULSE DISK.
IF FAULT PERSISTS THERE IS A
DISPLAY FAULT.
IS THE YES IS THE YES

VOLTAGE AT PLZE2 ON THE VOLTAGE AT PLRE2 ON PULSE
INPUT PCB 11.2V - 12.5V? BEARING PCB 11.2V - 12.5V?
NO NO
CHANGE CABLE
RESET LK5 ON TRIGGER PCB
TO POSITION 1 -2
PULSE BEARING PCB
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB NO IS THE YES

VOLTAGE AT PLZB9 ON THE
CHECK CABLE FROM TRIGGER PCB INPUT PCB 11.2V - 12.5V? CHANGE INPUT PCB
TO INPUT PCB
IS THE YES
VOLTAGE AT PLZE1 ON THE GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 41’
INPUT PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO
UNPLUG PLZE
IS THE YES
NO
VOLTAGE AT PLZE1 ON THE
CHANGE INPUT PCB INPUT PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? CHANGE PULSE BEARING PCB
65800010B 6-84
FROM FLOWCHART 40
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
THE FAULT IS PROBABLY ON PULSE

BEARING PCB.
ALSO CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUITS
IS THE VOLTAGE AT NO IS THE VOLTAGE AT YES ON:
PLRE4 ON PULSE BEARING PLRE1 ON PULSE BEARING TRIGGER PCB,
PCB APPROX 2.5V? PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? INPUT PCB IN THE TURNING UNIT,
INPUT BOARD IN THE TRANSCEIVER,
YES WHERE THE TRANSCEIVER IS BELOW
NO
DECKS.
CHANGE CABLE
PULSE BEARING PCB

YES NO
IS TRANSCEIVER ALOFT? AT PLZB11 ON INPUT PCB IN CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
TURNING UNIT
APPROX 2.5V?
NO YES

AT TSC11 ON INPUT PCB IN NO
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
TURNING UNIT
APPROX 2.5V?
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE CHECK PULSE DISC FOR DAMAGE.

YES IS THE VOLTAGE NO
AT PLZB11 ON INPUT PCB IN CLEAN OPTO COUPLERS ON THE
AT PLYB11 ON TRIGGER PCB
TRANSCEIVER UNIT PULSE BEARING PCB.
APPROX 2.5V?
APPROX 2.5V?
IF FAULT IS NOT CLEARED CHANGE
NO NO TRIGGER PCB.
CHANGE INPUT PCB IN

TRANSCEIVER
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN TURNING
INPUT PCB AND TRIGGER PCB
UNIT AND TRANSCEIVER.
6-85 65800010B
(‘STBY/TX ERROR SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 32
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
CHECK DATA CABLES BETWEEN

IS ‘STBY/TX’ NO
YES
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN

AND TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘STBY/TX’ NO
YES
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘STBY/TX’ NO
YES
DISPLAY FAULT
65800010B 6-86
(‘SPARK GAP TEST’ FAILURE)
FROM FLOWCHART 55
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, SET SCANNER ! WARNING !

ON/OFF SWITCH TO ‘OFF’. THIS TEST EXPOSES
SUPPLY. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
RAISE SCANNER TOP COVER AND
ENSURE THAT SAFETY LOCK IS
ENGAGED.
EXPOSE THE TRANSCEIVER
(MASTHEAD VERSION).
RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY TO THE
TRANSCEIVER.
MEASURE THE VOLTAGE

BETWEEN TSJ1 - TSJ2
ON THE EHT PCB
IS THE VOLTAGE NO IS THE VOLTAGE YES

BETWEEN TSJ1 - TSJ2 ON BETWEEN PLVD1 - PLVD4 ON CHANGE MODULATOR PCB
EHT PCB >4.7V? MODULATOR PCB >16V?
YES NO
UNPLUG PLVD FROM

CHANGE MAGNETRON
THE MODULATOR PCB
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

BETWEEN PLVD1 - PLVD4 ON CHANGE MODULATOR PCB
THE CABLE >16V?
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
IF THE ABOVE TESTS FAIL

TO LOCATE THE CAUSE OF
THE SPARK GAP TEST FAILURE
FAULT IS ON MODULATOR PCB OR

TRIGGER PCB
6-87 65800010B
(‘MISSING HMKR ERROR’ SHOWN)
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE SCANNER UNIT, SET SCANNER ! WARNING !

ON/OFF SWITCH TO ‘OFF’. THIS TEST EXPOSES
SUPPLY. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES
ENSURE THAT SAFETY LOCK IS
ENGAGED.
AT THE MODULATOR PCB UNPLUG
PLVD.
AT THE TRIGGER PCB, SET LK5 AND

LK6 TO POSITION 2 - 3.
RESTORE POWER TO TRANSCEIVER.
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

NO CHECK DATA CABLE BETWEEN DISPLAY AND TRANSCEIVER, ENSURE THAT
IS FAULT CLEARED?
BRAIDS ARE PROPERLY BONDED.
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB AND TRIGGER PCB.
CHECK BEARING CABLE FROM DISPLAY.
YES IF FAULT PERSISTS TTHERE IS A DISPLAY FAULT
RESET LK5 AND LK6

TO POSITION 1 - 2
IS THE VOLTAGE YES IS THE VOLTAGE NO CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN INPUT

AT PLZE2 ON INPUT PCB AT PLA2 ON BEARING PCB
11.2V - 12.5V?
PCB AND PULSE BEARING PCB
11.2V - 12.5V?
NO YES
IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLZB9 ON INPUT PCB CHANGE INPUT PCB
11.2V - 12.5V?
NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB IS THE VOLTAGE YES

CHECK CABLE FROM TRIGGER PCB AT PLZE1 ON INPUT PCB GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 45’
TO INPUT PCB 4.5V - 5.25V? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
NO
UNPLUG PLZE
NO IS THE VOLTAGE YES

CHANGE INPUT PCB AT PLZE1 ON PLUG ON INPUT PCB CHANGE PULSE BEARING PCB
4.5V - 5.25V?
65800010B 6-88
FROM FLOWCHART 44
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
MONITOR VOLTAGE AT TSC12 ON

THE INPUT PCB WHILE ROTATING CHANGE INPUT PCB.
THE ANTENNA BY HAND THROUGH CHECK CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB
ONE REVOLUTION AND PULSE BEARING PCB
YES
MONITOR VOLTAGE AT PLRE5 ON
DOES THE VOLTAGE NO THE PULSE BEARING PCB WHILE DOES THE VOLTAGE
SWITCH BETWEEN 5V - 0V ONCE ROTATING THE ANENNA BY SWITCH BETWEEN 5V - 0V ONCE
PER REVOLUTION? HAND THROUGH ONE REVOLUTION PER REVOLUTION?
YES
NO
IF FAULT PERSISTS CHECK FOR SHORT
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS ON INPUT BOARD IN TURNING YES IS VOLTAGE AT
FROM SHIP’S SUPPLY UNIT, AND WHEN THE TRANSCEIVER IS
PLRE1 ON PULSE BEARING PCB
BELOW DECKS ON THE INPUT BOARD IN
4.5V - 5.25V?
THE TRANSCEIVER.
IF FAULT IS STILL PRESENT CHANGE
TRIGGER PCB. NO

PULSE BEARING PCB AND
INPUT PCB
YES IS THERE NO
IS TRANSCEIVER ALOFT? CONTINUITY BETWEEN TSC12 AND CHANGE INPUT PCB
PLZB12 TURNING UNIT
INPUT PCB?
NO YES
IS THERE
CONTINUITY BETWEEN NO CHANGE CABLE
TSC12 ON TURNING UNIT INPUT PCB BETWEEN TURNING UNIT
AND TSC12 ON TRANSCEIVER AND TRANSCEIVER
INPUT PCB?
YES
IS THERE NO CHANGE
CONTINUITY BETWEEN TSC12 AND
PLZB12 ON TRANSCEIVER
INPUT PCB?
YES
IS THERE CABLE IS FAULTY

CONTINUITY BETWEEN NO BETWEEN INPUT PCB
PLZB12 ON INPUT PCB AND AND TRIGGER PCB
PLYB12 ON TRIGGER
PCB?
YES
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
6-89 65800010B
(‘TRIGGER ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 32
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
REMOVE COVER FROM

TRANSCEIVER FILTER BOX
IS VOLTAGE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING IS

YES
BETWEEN TSB5 AND TSB6 AT FAULTY:
THE TRANSCEIVER INPUT CABLE BETWEEN INPUT PCB AND
PCB 2.0V - 4.0V? TRIGGER PCB.
INPUT PCB.
NO TRIGGER PCB.
MODULATOR PCB.
DISPLAY UNIT.
AT THE INPUT PCB,
DISCONNECT WIRES TO
TSB5 AND TSB6
RECONNECT WIRES:
AT THE SCANNER, SET THE SCANNER ON/OFF SWITCH TO ‘OFF’.
IS VOLTAGE
NO
BETWEEN
TSB5 AND TSB6 ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S SUPPLY.
2.0V - 4.0V? RAISE SCANNER TOP COVER AND ENSURE THAT SAFETY LOCK
IS ENGAGED.
YES
CHECK DATA CABLE BETWEEN AT THE TRIGGER YES

PCB, IS THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN
CHANGE INPUT PCB.
DISPLAY AND INPUT PCB CHANGE CABLE BETWEEN
PLY20 AND PLYB21
2.0V - 4.0V? INPUT PCB AND TRIGGER PCB
NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
NO
CABLE OK? CHANGE CABLE
YES
DISPLAY FAULT
65800010B 6-90
(‘TX ERROR’/’LOW VIDEO ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 32
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS NORMAL YES GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 50’

BACKGROUND NOISE ENTRY POINT ‘A’
VISIBLE? DISPLAY FAULT
NO
YES
IS AN IS THERE
YES AT THE DISPLAY UNPLUG PLV.
OSCILLOSCOPE APPROX 0.5V PEAK-PEAK
MONITOR THE SIGNAL ON THE CABLE
AVAILABLE? VIDEO NOISE?
TO PLV
NO NO
CHECK VIDEO CABLES FROM SKV AT THE TRANSCEIVER, UNPLUG THE

DISPLAY UNIT TO SKV TRANSCEIVER VIDEO LEAD TO THE DISPLAY.
FOR CONTINUITY AND SHORT MONITOR THE SIGNAL ON THE VIDEO
CIRCUITS OUTPUT TO THE DISPLAY
FAULT IS IN THE CABLE YES IS THERE

BETWEEN THE DISPLAY AND APPROX 0.5V PEAK-PEAK
VIDEO NOISE?
THE TRANSCEIVER
NO
NO IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT:

ARE CABLES OK? REPAIR CABLE AT THE SCANNER, SET SCANNER

YES SUPPLY.
ENSURE SAFETY LOCK IS ENGAGED.
IF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ALOFT: REMOVE THE FILTER BOX COVER AT
CHECK VIDEO COAXIAL CABLES FROM THE TRANSCEIVER.
AT THE SCANNER, SET SCANNER TRANSCEIVER/TURNING UNIT SKV,
ON/OFF SWITCH TO ‘OFF’. RESTORE SHIP’S SUPPLY TO
AND FROM SKZV ON I/P PCB TO SKXV TRANSCEIVER
ON RECEIVER FOR CONTINUITY AND
ISOLATE TRANSCEIVER FROM SHIP’S SHORT CIRCUITS.
SUPPLY. ON THE I/P PCB CHECK FOR
RAISE SCANNER TOP COVER AND CONTINUITY BETWEEN SKV AND
ENSURE SAFETY LOCK IS ENGAGED. SKZV. CHECK THAT SKZV IS NOT
REMOVE THE FILTER BOX COVER AT SHORTED TO EARTH. GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 48’
THE TRANSCEIVER. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
RESTORE SHIP’S SUPPLY TO
TRANSCEIVER
REPAIR CABLE. NO ARE CABLES YES GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 48’

AND SOCKETS OK? ENTRY POINT ‘B’
CHANGE INPUT PCB
6-91 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 47 FROM FLOWCHART 47

ENTRY POINT ENTRY POINT
‘A’ ‘B’
AT THE RECEIVER UNPLUG PLXV.

MONITOR THE SIGNAL A SKXV ON THE
RECEIVER
CHANGE THE INPUT PCB.

CHECK THE VIDEO CABLE BETWEEN
IS THERE APPROX YES THE TRANSCEIVER AND DISPLAY
0.5V PEAK-PEAK UNIT, AND THE VIDEO CABLE
VIDEO NOISE? BETWEEN THE RECEIVER AND THE
INPUT PCB.
NO
MONITOR THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGES

AT PLPB ON THE RECEIVER FILTER
PCB.
PLPB1 -11.2V - -12.6V
PLPB2 11.2V - 12.6V
PLPB3 27.5V - 31.5V DISPLAY FAULT
PLPB4 4.7V - 5.25V
NO
ARE THE YES CHANGE IS THE

VOLTAGES CORRECT? RECEIVER ASSEMBLY FAULT CLEARED?
NO YES
YES CHANGE END

ARE ANY OF THE
VOLTAGES CORRECT? POWER SUPPLY
NO
UNPLUG PLPB AND MONITOR THE

VOLTAGES ON THE SAME PINS ON
PLPB ON THE RECEIVER FILTER PCB
ARE THE YES CHANGE

VOLTAGES CORRECT? RECEIVER ASSEMBLY
NO

AT PLPA ON THE RECEIVER FILTER
PCB. ARE THE YES CHANGE
PLPB1 -11.2V - -12.6V VOLTAGES CORRECT? RECEIVER FILTER PCB
PLPB2 11.2V - 12.6V
PLPB3 27.5V - 31.5V
PLPB4 4.7V - 5.25V
NO
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
65800010B 6-92
ENTRY POINT
‘A’

AT PLTH ON THE POWER SUPPLY PCB.
PLTH9 -11.2V - -12.6V
PLTH4 11.2V - 12.6V
PLTH2 27.5V - 31.5V
PLTH6 4.7V - 5.25V
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

ARE THE YES CHECK CABLE FROM PLTH TO
VOLTAGES CORRECT? TRIGGER PCB.
CHECK CABLE FROM TRIGGER PCB
TO PLPA.
NO
ARE THE YES

UNPLUG PLTG VOLTAGES CORRECT? CHANGE INPUT PCB
AT POWER SUPPLY PCB
NO
UNPLUG PLYB
AT TRIGGER PCB
ARE THE YES CHANGE INPUT PCB, OR

VOLTAGES CORRECT? PERFORMANCE MONITOR, OR INPUT
BOARD IN TRANSCEIVER.
CHECK CABLE FROM INPUT PCB TO
NO
ARE THE YES RECEIVER FILTER PCB

UNPLUG PLYA VOLTAGES CORRECT?
AT TRIGGER PCB IS FAULTY
NO
UNPLUG PLTD
AT POWER SUPPLY PCB
ARE THE YES CHANGE

VOLTAGES CORRECT?
MODULATOR PCB
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
6-93 65800010B
(‘LOW VIDEO ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 47
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
AT THE DISPLAY,
SELECT THE TRANSCEIVER
TEST DATA Tx BIST MENU
IS ‘CHARGE NO
TRIGGER’ CORRECT? CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
YES
IS ‘MODULATOR YES IS ‘MAGNETRON CURRENT YES

TRIGGER CORRECT? ON LP 4A - 7A (10Kw) ENTRY POINT ‘A’
6A - 9.5A (25Kw)?
NO NO

ENSURE SAFETY LOCK IS ENGAGED. GO TO ‘FLOW CHART 51’
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
COVER.
RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY.
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB.

CHANGE MODULATOR.
65800010B 6-94
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
CHANGE
MODULATOR PCB
YES
IS THE VOLTAGE AT NO IS THE VOLTAGE

UNPLUG PLVB BETWEEN PLVB1 AND PLVB4 ON
PLVB1 ON THE MODULATOR FROM THE POWER SUPPLY
PCB -540V - -650V? THE CABLE -540V - -650V?
YES NO
AT THE MODULATOR PCB, MONITOR

THE VOLTAGE AT PLVD1, AND AT CHANGE
PLVD5 POWER SUPPLY PCB
IS VOLTAGE AT YES
PLVD1 16V - 26V
CHANGE
NO
UNPLUG PLVD, MONITOR ON THE

CABLE THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN
PLVD1 - PLVD4, AND PLVD5 TO
GROUND.
IS VOLTAGE AT YES
PLVD1 16V - 26V
CHANGE
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
6-95 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 50
ENTRY POINT
‘A’ END
YES
IF RADAR TUNING YES AT THE DISPLAY, IS RADAR

PROCEDURE IS PERFORMED, SELECT AFC TUNING PICTURE STILL OK?
IS FAULT CLEARED?
NO NO
CHANGE RECEIVER OR,

CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
AT THE DISPLAY, SELECT TX

SETTINGS, COARSE TUNE -
ENTER PASSWORD AND SET TUNING DISPLAY FAULT
CONTROL TO MINIMUM.
NO
IS THE VOLTAGE YES AT THE DISPLAY, SET THE IS THE VOLTAGE

AT PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER TUNING CONTROL TO MAXIMUM AT PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER
PCB < 0.5V? PCB > 4.75V?
NO YES
AT THE DISPLAY, SET THE

TUNING CONTROL TO MAXIMUM


CHECK CABLE TO RECEIVER FILTER SUPPLY.
IS THE VOLTAGE YES
BOARD. RAISE SCANNER TOP COVER AND
AT PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER
CHECK CABLE FROM RECEIVER ENSURE SAFETY LOCK IS ENGAGED
PCB > 4.75V?
FILTER BOARD TO RECEIVER. RECONNECT SHIP’S SUPPLY.
CHANGE RECEIVER FILTER BOARD.
NO CHANGE RECEIVER.
ON THE TRIGGER PCB, DISCONNECT

CABLE TO PLYA AND MEASURE THE GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 53’
VOLTAGE ON PLYA7. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
YES RECONNECT PLYA.

IS THE VOLTAGE DISCONNECT PLYB
> 4.75V?
NO
CHANGE
TRIGGER PCB
CHANGE YES IS THE VOLTAGE AT NO CHANGE

RECEIVER PLYA7 ON THE TRIGGER RECEIVER FILTER PCB
PCB > 4.75V?
65800010B 6-96
FROM FLOWCHART 52
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
IS THE VOLTAGE CHANGE RECEIVER, OR

YES
AT PLYA3 ON THE TRIGGER CHANGE LIMITER, OR
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V? CHANGE MAGNETRON
NO
UNPLUG PLYA AT IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLYA3 ON THE TRIGGER CHANGE RECEIVER
THE TRIGGER PCB
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V?
NO
UNPLUG PLYH AT NO IS THE VOLTAGE YES

AT PLYH2 ON THE TRIGGER CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
THE TRIGGER PCB
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V?
IS THE VOLTAGE YES CHANGE TRIGGER PCB

AT PLYTH2 ON THE POWER SUPPLY
PCB 27.5V - 31.5V?
NO
CHANGE
POWER SUPPLY PCB
6-97 65800010B
(‘TX COMMS ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 32
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
CHECK DATA CABLE BETWEEN

IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
CHECK CABLE BETWEEN

AND TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB
IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
CHANGE
IS ‘Tx COMMS NO
YES
DISPLAY FAULT
SUSPECT DISPLAY INPUT PCB.
65800010B 6-98
(‘TX BIST ERROR’ SHOWN)
FROM FLOWCHART 32
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
SELECT SYSTEM MENU.

SELECT TEST DATA MENU.
SELECT TX BIST MENU.
IS THE MAGNETRON NO GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 43’

CURRENT BETWEEN 6A - 9.5A (25kW) SUSPECT MAGNETRON.
4A - 7A (10kW) ON SUSPECT MODULATOR. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
LONG PULSE?
YES
IS THE MODULATOR NO GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 51’

SUSPECT MODULATOR.
VOLTAGE BETW EEN SUSPECT POWER SUPPLY. ENTRY POINT ‘A’
540V - 640V?
YES

+26 - +36V?
YES

+11 - +13.4V?
YES
DOES NO GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 43’

SPARK GAP PASS? ENTRY POINT ‘A’
YES
ENTRY POINT ‘A’
6-99 65800010B
FROM FLOWCHART 55
ENTRY POINT
‘A’
NO CHECK DATA CABLE FROM DISPLAY. CHANGE TRIGGER BOARD.

DOES DATA PASS? SUSPECT TRIGGER PCB.
SUSPECT INPUT PCB. CHANGE INPUT BOARD.
YES
IS NO CHECK PERFORMANCE MONITOR & GO TO ‘FLOWCHART 44’

HEADING MARKER BEARING CABLE IN BULKHEAD ENTRY POINT ‘A’
CORRECT? SYSTEMS.
SUSPECT PULSE BEARING PCB.
SUSPECT INPUT PCB.
YES
END
YES
DOES NO DOES
CHARGE TRIGGER PASS? CHANGE TRIGGER PCB CHARGE TRIGGER PASS?
YES NO
MODULATOR TRIGGER
FAILURE
DOES NO
CHANGE TRIGGER PCB MODULATOR TRIGGER PASS? CHANGE MODULATOR
YES
END
65800010B 6-100
3 First Line Servicing

!WARNING!
Before removing any component parts,
the equipment must be isolated from the mains supply.
3.1 Display Units

(Including Processor Electronics Units (PEUs) and Control Modules)
3.1.1 Preliminary Notes
1. Isolate the mains supply to the display unit.
2. Before disassembling the Processor Electronics Unit or Monitor
components of the Display Unit, make sure the integrity of the
connections to the units has been checked.
3. All radar user controls, except for monitor brilliance, are routed through
the Display Processor board. Therefore, a display processor fault may
indicate faults on the Display Processor board, the Joystick/Trackerball,
the Memory Card Unit or the Keyboard.
3.1.2 Removal and Replacement of Processor Electronics Unit Sub-
assemblies
Processor Electronics Unit sub-assemblies may include the following units:
• Display Power Supply
• Display/Radar Processor board(s)
• Integral Keyboard (optional)
• Integral Joystick/Trackerball
• Integral Memory Card Unit
• On/Off Switch assembly
The Integral Processor Electronics Unit is mounted underneath the display
monitor. The Kit Processor Electronics Unit is fitted into the pedestal of deck
or console-mounted displays. Refer to Figure 6.1 and Figure 6.2 and the
steps below for access to these units.
Make sure that access is available to the front of the PEU. This is identified
by the location of either the operator controls or the fan. In console displays:
1. Remove the pedestal covers.
2. Unbolt the PEU for access.
3. Unplug the cables connected to the front of the PEU.
To release the outer PEU moulding:
1. Remove the two fixing screws at the front.
2. Pull the moulding forward.
6-101 65800010B
Removing and Replacing the Fan Filter
The fan filter is located in the rectangular filter recess at the front of the
inner moulding for non-keyboard integral displays. It is removable once the
outer moulding has been released.
For an integral keyboard or kit version:
1. Remove the four screws securing the fan grill.
2. Change the filter and refit the grill.
Removing and Replacing the Integral Keyboard (optional)
1. Disconnect the cable from the keyboard and where it plugs into the
inner moulding.
2. Remove the four nuts securing the keyboard into the outer moulding.
3. Reverse the procedure for replacement.
To release the Inner PEU moulding:
1. Undo the fixing screws securing the inner moulding to the PEU main
body.
2. Pull the moulding away from the body.
3. Disconnect all cables to units in the inner moulding at the processor
boards and power supply in the main body of the PEU.
Removing and Replacing the Integral On/Off Switch assembly
1. Remove the switch fixing plate from the inner moulding using a small
M3 spanner
2. Push the switch assembly out of the fixing plate
Removing and Replacing the Integral Joystick/Trackerball and
Memory Card assemblies
1. If a memory card assembly is fitted, disconnect the cable linking it to the
joystick/ trackerball assembly.
2. Loosen the locating screws for the appropriate assembly –
see Figure 6.1
3. Pull the required assembly out from its moulding aperture by pivoting it
on the lower edge of the aperture, and then lifting up.
Removing and Replacing the Power Supply
1. Disconnect the power cable at the front of the power supply.
2. Pull on the strap at the front of the power supply cover and slide the unit
out.
3. Slide the replacement unit back in, ensuring that it is firmly pressed
home.
4. Reconnect the power cable.
65800010B 6-102
Removing and Replacing the Processor Board(s)
In displays with a single Combined Processor board, replace this board if
either radar processor or display processor faults are suspected.
In displays with separate Radar and Display Processor boards, identify the
board to be replaced. The display processor has more connectors on its
edge than the radar processor.
1. Remove any cables still connected to the board.
2. Use the plastic ejection levers at each end of the board to lever the
board out.
3. Pull out the board.
4. Remove all daughter boards from the processor board.
5. Transfer the daughter boards to the replacement board, ensuring
correct orientation and location.
6. Make sure links on the replacement board are set appropriately.
7. Replace the board.
8. Make sure the ejection levers are in their home position when the board
is plugged in.
9. Make sure that the board is firmly pressed home.
10. Reconnect any cables, if appropriate, to other processor boards.
Removing and Replacing the Compass Board
The compass board is a daughter board on the Display Processor board or
Combined Processor board.
1. Use the above procedure for replacing the processor board(s), but in
this case only replace the compass board, with one of the same type.
2. Make sure the links on the replacement board are set appropriately.
Re-assembling the Processor Electronics Unit
1. Reconnect cables from front PEU moulding.
2. Secure the moulding, remembering to re-connect the Keyboard, if
appropriate.
3. Refer to Figure 6.7 and Figure 6.8 when re-connecting cables.
3.1.3 Removal and Replacement of Kit Control Panel Modules
Kit Control Panel modules may include the following modules:
• Keyboard module (optional)
• Joystick/Trackerball module
• Memory Card module
• On/Off Switch module
• Brilliance module
1. Remove the nuts securing each module (underneath the control panel
top surface).
2. Unplug connecting cables to the modules before removing them.
3. Refer to Figure 6.7 and Figure 6.8 when re-connecting cables.
6-103 65800010B
3.1.4 Removal and Replacement of Operator controls on 340 Display Units
For versions with extruded control panel (as shown in Figure 6.2 in this
chapter):
1. Remove the control panel lower cover
2. Proceed as in sub-section 3.1.3.
For versions with the moulded control panel (as shown in the Preamble at
the front of the manual):
1. Release the two securing screws hidden behind the slotted covers on
the underside of the control panel (the control panel will be hinged
down).
2. This will expose the locating screws for the Trackerball/Joystick and
Memory Card assemblies at the back of the unit.
3. Loosen the locating screws for the appropriate assembly
4. Remove the assembly by pivoting it upwards on the front edge of the
moulding aperture.
5. Unplug the interconnecting cables before fully removing the assembly
from the aperture.
3.1.5 Removal of CRT Display Monitor Unit Sub-assemblies
Desk Mounted 180 and 250 Display Monitors
Remove the monitor outer cover as follows:
1. Unscrew the two screws on the top of the cover.
2. Lift the cover up and then forward.
3. Unplug the brilliance control cable at the Brilliance board (mounted on
the bezel moulding).
4. Remove the Brilliance board, if necessary, by unscrewing it from the
bezel moulding.
5. Unplug all cables connected to the monitor, taking note of the location
of the Secondary Viewer cable, if fitted.
6. Unscrew the four screws at the edge of the finned drive board heat sink
(used secure it to the chassis) and hinge it away from the chassis.
7. Using the appropriate monitor block diagram for the particular monitor
display (Figure 6.3 to Figure 6.6, identify the monitor components
contained within the dotted outline in the diagram, these must be
replaced as a group).
8. Make sure that at least 3 minutes has elapsed from switch-off for
the CRT anode voltage to safely discharge.
9. Disconnect the identified interconnected components from the rest of
the unit, leaving the drive board until last
10. Remove the drive board assembly (this includes the finned heat sink)
by unscrewing the hinge arms and board stay from the unit.
65800010B 6-104
340 Deck Mounted Display Monitors
To gain access to the display monitor in the 340 deck-mounted display unit
refer to Figure 6.2.
1. Make sure the display unit is securely fixed to the deck.
2. While supporting the console control panel, release its two captive fixing
screws, and then let it swing down carefully. Note: it may be necessary
to remove the control panel lower cover to access these fixing screws.
3. Release the two captive monitor fixing bolts under the monitor
(accessible from between the control panel and display monitor).
4. Remove the display top handle by undoing its three fixing screws.
5. Undo the four CRT bezel fixings, and guide the top of the monitor
forward into the unit’s service position.
6. Continue as for monitor modules below.
180, 250 and 340 Kit Monitor Modules
1. Unplug all cables connected to the monitor, taking note of the location
of the Secondary Viewer cable, if fitted.
2. Release the two latch levers securing the finned drive-board heat sink
to the chassis, and hinge it away from the chassis.
3. Using the appropriate monitor block diagram for the particular monitor
display (Figure 6.3 to Figure 6.6), identify the monitor components
contained within the dotted outline in the diagram (these must be
replaced as a group).
4. Make sure at least 3 minutes have elapsed since switch-off for the
CRT anode voltage to safely discharge.
5. Disconnect the identified interconnected components from the rest of
the unit as a group, leaving the drive board until last.
6. The drive board (this includes the finned heat sink) can be removed as
follows:
a. Detach the earth braid connection to the chassis at the drive board.
b. Release the board stay if fitted.
c. Slide the drive board hinges apart.
3.1.6 Replacing and Setting-up of CRT Display Monitor Unit Sub-assemblies
Replace the boards using the appropriate board set as shown in Section 4.1
of this chapter. To fit the board sets:
1. Use the reverse of the removal procedure.
2. After reconnecting the external monitor cables, connect the internal
brilliance control up (if applicable)
3. Leave the drive board in its hinged down position to facilitate
adjustments during the setting up procedure below.
Note – If an RGB output board is fitted to the drive board that is being
replaced, this must be transferred to the drive board in the
replacement board set. Two screws on the drive board heatsink
secure it. Its ribbon cable plugs into the drive board.
6-105 65800010B
4. After checking that the display boards are fully reconnected, power up
the radar display.
5. Check that the fan (if fitted) is operating.
6. Refer to ‘Monitor Test Mode’ section in Chapter 5 for the following
adjustments:
a. Adjust the brilliance control to a normal level.
b. Access the monitor test mode, and select Test Pattern 1.
c. Identify the location of the focus and screen (Grid 2) controls. If
they are not situated on the LOPT, they will be found on the
adjoining dual focus module.
d. Adjust the focus control(s) for the sharpest white grid lines.
Geometry
Using the Monitor Test menu on the screen:
1. Adjust (if necessary) the geometrical parameters in the left hand column
of the menu to produce the closest match to Test Pattern 1 as shown in
the manual.
2. If necessary, adjust the horizontal linearity inductor L1 to match the
width of the left hand squares to the other squares.
3. Adjust the pattern size to fill the screen with its white border fully visible.
Colour Level Adjustment
This must be carried out under the minimum operating ambient light level
conditions:
1. Select Test Pattern 2
2. Adjust the display brilliance control to maximum.
3. Adjust the present brightness parameter (Monitor Test menu) so that
the pattern is just visible.
4. Select Test Pattern 3 (which shows a solid white rectangle).
5. Adjust the display brilliance control, black level (red) and black level
(blue) so that the white rectangle is just visible and a good white.
6. Adjust the display brilliance, and red and blue gain controls to give the
brightest picture without any signs of video overload (streaking), and a
white rectangle with a hint of blue. If necessary, the green gain can
also be adjusted.
7. Repeat the colour level adjustment procedure until no further
adjustments are required.
If any problems are encountered regarding insufficient control range on any
of the controls, adjust the screen (G2) control on the drive board as follows:
1. Using a DVM, measure the voltages on TP26, 27 and 28 on the drive
board (on external connectors edge of board) with respect to the
chassis.
2. Adjust the screen control so that the three voltages measured are in the
range 65 to 95V.
3. Carry out the colour level adjustment procedure again.
65800010B 6-106
Final check
4. Set the display brilliance to maximum.
5. Adjust the preset contrast control to give the brightest picture without
video overload.
6. Switch off and complete the re-assembly of the display monitor.
7. If the picture size was adjusted without the CRT bezel fitted, re-adjust
the picture size so that the white border of Test Pattern 1 is fully visible.
3.1.7 Removal and Replacement of Flat Panel Monitors
There are no user serviceable parts for Flat Panel Monitors, the only service
replacement is the whole unit.
Desk Mounted 180 and 250 Flat Panel Monitors
1. Remove the four screws securing the monitor to the PEU.
2. Disconnect the connecting cables at the PEU.
Desk Mounted 340 Flat Panel Monitor
1. Undo the five screws holding the bezel to the cover, two at the sides
and three at the top.
2. Remove the eight screws securing the monitor to the chassis.
3. Disconnect the connecting cables and power cables.
Deck Mounted 340 Flat Panel Monitor
1. Remove the four screws securing the monitor to the chassis.
Kit 180, 250 and 340 Flat Panel Monitors
Final check
Refer to Chapter 5, Section 4 for full details of setting up. The only
parameter they may require setting after a change of Flat Panel Monitor is
the phase parameter.
6-107 65800010B
Figure 6.1. Processor Electronics Unit – Disassembly
65800010B 6-108
Figure 6.2. Split Cabinet Console – Monitor Access
6-109 65800010B
Figure 6.3. Block Diagram – 180 Monitor (14” High Resolution)
65800010B 6-110
Figure 6.4. Block Diagram – 250 Monitor (21” Medium Resolution)
6-111 65800010B
Figure 6.5. Block Diagram – 250 Monitor (21” High Resolution)
65800010B 6-112
Figure 6.6. Block Diagram – 340 Monitor (29” Medium Resolution)
6-113 65800010B
MONITOR REMOTE VIDEO COMPASS SERIAL
VIDEO POINTER I/P I/P I/P 1 TRACK
LOG I/P TABLE O/P
MONITOR MIST MIST TXRX INTER- & SERIAL SERIAL MAINS
O/Ps 1 & 2 OR I/F UNIT INPUT
POWER I/P O/P SIGNALS SWITCH I/P 2
SKS SKR PLN SKM SKV SKX TSA TSB TSC TSD TSE TSF SKY TSP
15w 9w 9w COAX COAX COAX 8w 7w 10w 13w 3w 3w 25w 4w
DC 2w
AC 3w 96w
LNE SKBA
LNE PLBA
96w POSITIONING OF PROCESSOR BOARDS
BOARD SLOT
SYSTEM TYPE TOP BOTTOM
EPA, ATA or ARPA 65800811 65800812/814/815
BACKPLANE
EPA(L) 65800839
65800819
65800515 (AC)
or 65800516 (DC)
RADAR PROC. 65800812/814 or 815

96w 96w 24w 24w 68w
PLEH PLEF PLEL PLEM PLEB
SKFL SKFM
96w 96w 24w 24w 65800521
96w 96w 96w 16 BIT FLASH
SKCB SKBC 32FACnnn
or 32FAAnnn
PLCB PLCC PLDE PLDD PLDB
12w PSU 96w 96w 96w 68w* COMPONENTS NOT
65800823 AC DISPLAY PROC. 65800811 or COMBINED PROC 65800839 AFFECTED BY
6w or 65800822 DC 68w* 10w* 32w 32w 26w 24w 16w 20w 8w 2w*
PLCD PLDC PLDX PLDN PLDP PLDL PLDM PLDF PLDS PLDR SKDV LOCATION OF MAIN
SKCD SKDN SKDP SKFL SKFM SKDS SKDR USER CONTROLS
65800613
FAN
32w 32w 26w 24w
32 BIT FLASH 16 BIT FLASH
20w 8w
COMPASS I/F
2w
DONGLE
(ALL OPTIONS SHOWN)
32FABnnn 32FADnnn STANDARD 65800831 32SDAnnn
or 32FACnnn SYNCHRO 65800832
PLSD
SKSD SKDC 65800519 SKDF

65800518 no keyboard
65800520
65800536 + keyboard
SKJC SKJB SKKD SKKC SKKB SKKF PLLF
PLJC PLJB PLKD PLKC PLKB PLKF SKLF COMPONENTS REQUIRED
68w
MEMORY
6w
SWITCH
6w 6w 6w 10w 65800522
PLLF
WHEN MAIN USER
SWITCH SWITCH POINTER I/F TRACKERBALL
CARD 65800842 65800841 65800841 65800817 MA00008185 SKLF
CONTROLS ARE INTEGRAL
65800816
PCMCIA
(left) (right) 12w
PLKA
4w 4w
JP1(X) JP1(Y)
9w WITH PROCESSOR
KEYBOARD
PLJA JOYSTICK SKKA OR SKKA JS1(X) JS1(Y) 65800825 ELECTRONICS UNIT
MEMORYCARD 65800608
65800538 KEYBOARD (ALL OPTIONS SHOWN)
SWITCH MODULE POINTER MODULE MODULE
65800607 65800602 JOYSTICK 65800606, TRACKERBALL 65800603 65845600
SKSD SKDC SKDX SKDF

65800540 65800520 65800539
SKJC SKJX
PLJC PLJX
68w 10w
BUFFER 65800837
COMPONENTS REQUIRED
100w 65800537 WHEN MAIN USER
SKSD PLJD PLKF PLLF
CONTROLS ARE SEPARATE
PLSD
65826504
SKJD
65826503
65826513
SKKF
65826502
SKLF
65826501
FROM PROCESSOR
SKSD SKJE PLJG SKKG PLKF PLLF ELECTRONICS UNIT
PLSD PLJE SKJG PLKG SKKF SKLF (ALL OPTIONS SHOWN)
9w 100w 9w 9w 65826512 9w 9w
BUFFER 65826508 65800825
SWITCH KEYBOARD
65800845 SKKD SKKC SKKB SKKF
65826656
PLJG 65826514 PLKD PLKC PLKB PLKF KEYBOARD
6w 6w 6w 10w 65845600
SKJG TRACKERBALL
SWITCH SWITCH POINTER I/F
65800520 65800841 65800841 65800817 MA00008185 KEYBOARD KIT
SKJC SKJB 12w 4w 4w 65845A
(left) (right)
PLJC PLJB PLKA JP1(X) JP1(Y)
68w 6w JS1(X) JS1(Y)
MEMORY SWITCH JOYSTICK SKKA OR SKKA
CARD 65800842 65800608
65800816 MEMORY- 65800538
CARD I/F JOYSTICK 65800606, TRACKERBALL 65800603 File Ref. PROSCHM.DWG
PLJA
65821622 JOYSTICK 65821620, TRACKERBALL 65821623 Issue D 17/MAR/05
MEMORYCARD 65821619
PROCESSOR ELECTRONICS UNIT

AND USER CONTROLS - CABLE CONNECTIONS
Figure 6.7. Interconnection Diagram – Processor Electronics Unit
65800010B 6-114
MONITOR REMOTE VIDEO MIST MIST TXRX 2 COMPASS SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL POWER
VIDEO POINTER I/P 2 I/P 2 O/P SIGNALS I/P I/P 1 I/P 3 I/P 5 TRACK NOT & RELAY
LOG I/P TABLE USED O/PS AC
MONITOR MIST MIST VIDEO TXRX INTER- & SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL & SERIAL NOT MAINS
POWER I/P O/P 2 I/P SIGNALS SWITCH O/Ps 1 & 2 I/P 2 I/P 4 O/Ps 3,4 & 5 USED INPUT
SKS SKR PLN SKM SKV SKX SKM2 SKV2 SKX2 TSA TSZ TSB TSC TSD TSE TSF TSJ TSH TSG TSK TST SKW TSL TSP
15w 9w 9w COAX COAX COAX COAX COAX COAX 8w 8w 7w 10w 13w 3w 3w 3w 3w 3w 15w 8w 15w 13w 4w
3w 160w I/O PANEL 65818818

LNE SKBA
LNE PLBA
160w POSITIONING OF PROCESSOR BOARDS
SYSTEM (TOP) BOARD SLOT (BOTTOM)
96w 160w TYPE 1 2 3 4 5
65818ZAS*
- - 65818811 65818814 65818814
65818ZAW*
PLEB
RADAR PROC. 65818814 68w
BACKPLANE 96w 96w 24w 24w 50w
65818819 PLEH PLEF PLEL PLEM PLEC
65800515 SKFL SKFM
96w 96w 24w 24w 65818524
96w 96w 16 BIT FLASH
32FACnnn
PLEC
RADAR PROC. 6581814 50w
96w 96w 24w 24w 68w
PLEH PLEF PLEL PLEM PLEB 65818523
SKFL SKFM
96w 96w 24w 24w
96w 96w 96w 16 BIT FLASH
SKCB SKBC 32FACnnn
PLCB PLCC PLDE PLDD PLDB
12w PSU 96w 96w 96w 68w COMPONENTS NOT
65800823 DISPLAY PROC. 65818811 AFFECTED BY
6w 68w 10w 32w 32w 26w 24w 16w 20w 8w 2w
PLCD PLDC PLDX PLDN PLDP PLDL PLDM PLDF PLDS PLDR SKDV LOCATION OF MAIN
SKCD SKDN SKDP SKFL SKFM SKDS SKDR USER CONTROLS
65818613
FAN
32w 32w 26w 24w
32 BIT FLASH 16 BIT FLASH
20w 8w
COMPASS I/F
2w
DONGLE
(ALL OPTIONS SHOWN)
32FABnnn 32FADnnn STANDARD 65800831 32SDAnnn
SYNCHRO 65800832
PLSD
SKSD SKDC 65800519 SKDF

65800518 no keyboard
65800520
65800536 + keyboard
SKJC SKJB SKKD SKKC SKKB SKKF PLLF
PLJC PLJB PLKD PLKC PLKB PLKF SKLF COMPONENTS REQUIRED
68w
MEMORY
6w
SWITCH
6w 6w 6w 10w 65800522
PLLF
WHEN MAIN USER
SWITCH SWITCH POINTER I/F TRACKERBALL
CARD 65800842 65800841 65800841 65800817 MA00008185 SKLF
CONTROLS ARE INTEGRAL
65800816
PCMCIA
(left) (right) 12w
PLKA
4w 4w
JP1(X) JP1(Y)
9w WITH PROCESSOR
KEYBOARD
PLJA JOYSTICK SKKA OR SKKA JS1(X) JS1(Y) 65800825 ELECTRONICS UNIT
MEMORYCARD 65800608
65800538 KEYBOARD (ALL OPTIONS SHOWN)
SWITCH MODULE POINTER MODULE MODULE
65800607 65800602 JOYSTICK 65800606, TRACKERBALL 65800603 65845600
SKSD SKDC SKDX SKDF

65800540 65800520 65800539
SKJC SKJX
PLJC PLJX
68w 10w
BUFFER 65800837
COMPONENTS REQUIRED
100w 65800537 WHEN MAIN USER
SKSD PLJD PLKF PLLF
CONTROLS ARE SEPARATE
PLSD
65826504
SKJD
65826503
65826513
SKKF
65826502
SKLF
65826501
FROM PROCESSOR
SKSD SKJE PLJG SKKG PLKF PLLF ELECTRONICS UNIT
PLSD PLJE SKJG PLKG SKKF SKLF (ALL OPTIONS SHOWN)
9w 100w 9w 9w 65826512 9w 9w
BUFFER 65826508 65800825
SWITCH KEYBOARD
65800845 SKKD SKKC SKKB SKKF
65826656
PLJG 65826514 PLKD PLKC PLKB PLKF KEYBOARD
6w 6w 6w 10w 65845600
SKJG SWITCH SWITCH POINTER I/F TRACKERBALL
65800520 65800841 65800841 65800817 MA00008185 KEYBOARD KIT
SKJC SKJB 12w 4w 4w 65845A
(left) (right)
PLJC PLJB PLKA JP1(X) JP1(Y)
68w 6w
MEMORY SWITCH JOYSTICK SKKA OR SKKA JS1(X) JS1(Y)
CARD 65800842 65800608
65800816 MEMORY- 65800538
CARD I/F JOYSTICK 65800606, TRACKERBALL 65800603 File Ref. PROSCHME.DWG
PLJA
65821622 JOYSTICK 65821620, TRACKERBALL 65821623 Issue A 17/MAR/05
MEMORYCARD 65821619
EXTENDED PROCESSOR ELECTRONICS UNIT

AND USER CONTROLS - CABLE CONNECTIONS
Figure 6.8. Interconnection Diagram – Extended Processor Electronics Unit
6-115 65800010B
3.2 S-Band Scanner Unit

3.2.1 Magnetron Replacement
(Scanner Unit – Masthead Transceiver)
1. At the Scanner Control Unit set the isolating switch to the ‘OFF’ position
and lock it.
2. Rotate the antenna until the front face is pointing away from the
transceiver.
3. Isolate the radar from the ship’s mains supply using the isolating switch
provided.
4. Refer to Figure 6.9, and remove the transceiver cover from the scanner
unit.
5. Refer to Figure 6.14, and follow the procedure for removing and
replacing the magnetron.
Magnetron Current (Scanner Unit with Integral Transceiver)
When a Magnetron is replaced, the magnetron current must be set as
follows:
1. On the Trigger PCB set links LK5 and LK6 to position 2-3.
2. Reconnect the ship’s mains supply, and switch the radar ON.
3. Wait 3 minutes for the magnetron time delay to expire, and select long
pulse.
4. Set the magnetron current as detailed in 0.
provided.
6. Reset LK5 and LK6 to position 1-2.
7. Replace the transceiver cover.
3.2.2 Magnetron Replacement (Bulkhead Transceiver)
provided.
2. Refer to Figure 6.10, and remove the transceiver cover.
3. Refer to Figure 6.14, and follow the procedure for removing and
replacing the magnetron.
Magnetron Current (Bulkhead Transceiver)
When a magnetron is replaced, the magnetron current must be set as
follows:
1. Reconnect the ship’s mains supply, and switch the radar ON.
2. Wait 3 minutes for the magnetron time delay to expire, and select long
pulse.
3. Set the magnetron current as details in 0.
provided.
5. Replace the transceiver cover.
65800010B 6-116
3.2.3 Bearing and Heading Marker PCB – Replacement
1. At the Scanner Control Unit set the isolating switch to the ‘OFF’ position
and lock it.
2. Rotate the antenna until the front face is pointing away from the
transceiver.
provided.
4. Refer to Figure 6.24, and remove the Performance Monitor cover.
5. The location of the Pulse Bearing PCB is shown in Figure 6.25.
6. Remove the two securing screws and remove the PCB.
7. Replace the PCB and secure with the two screws (two dowels of
different diameters locate the PCB in the correct orientation).
3.2.4 Heading Marker Alignment
Alignment of the Heading Marker is achieved via the Initialisation menu at
the Display Unit.
6-117 65800010B
Figure 6.9. Access to Transceiver (Turning Unit with Integral Transceiver)
65800010B 6-118
D AN G ER !
LETH AL VO LTAG ES AR E EX PO S ED
W HE N C O VER S A R E R E M O VED .
E N SU R E TH A T TR AN SC EIV ER IS
ISO LA TE D FRO M SH IP'S SU PP LY
B EFO R E R E M O VIN G C O VE RS.
To rem ove Transceiver cover

unscrew four M 6 captive screw s.
To rem ove filter box cover

unscrew two M 6 captive screw s.
Figure 6.10. Access to Transceiver (Bulkhead Transceiver)
6-119 65800010B
Figure 6.11. Location of Major Parts
65800010B 6-120
DANGER!
LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED
WHEN COVERS ARE REMOVED.
ENSURE TRANSCEIVER IS ISOLATED
FROM SHIP'S SUPPLY BEFORE
REMOVING TRANSCEIVER
Figure 6.12. Removing Transceiver from Turning Unit
6-121 65800010B
DANGER!
LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED
WHEN THE COVERS ARE REMOVED.
ENSURE TRANSCEIVER IS ISOLATED
FROM THE SHIP'S MAINS SUPPLY
BEFORE REMOVING COVERS.
Figure 6.13. Removing Transceiver Assembly 65830630 (Bulkhead Transceiver)
65800010B 6-122
Figure 6.14. Magnetron Replacement
6-123 65800010B
Figure 6.15. Setting Magnetron Current
65800010B 6-124
Figure 6.16. Replacing Trigger PCB
6-125 65800010B
Figure 6.17. Link Settings Trigger PCB
65800010B 6-126
Figure 6.18. Replacing Modulator PCB
6-127 65800010B
Figure 6.19. Link Settings – Modulator PCB
65800010B 6-128
Figure 6.20. Replacing Power Supply PCB
6-129 65800010B
Figure 6.21. Link Settings – Power Supply PCB
65800010B 6-130
Figure 6.22. (Sheet 1 of 2) – Replacement of Receiver Assembly 65830616
6-131 65800010B
Figure 6.23. (Sheet 2 of 2) – Replacement of Receiver Assembly 65830616
65800010B 6-132
Figure 6.24. Access to Performance Monitor and Bearing and Heading Marker PCB
6-133 65800010B
Figure 6.25. Replacing Bearing and Heading PCB
65800010B 6-134
Figure 6.26. Replacing Performance Monitor
6-135 65800010B
Figure 6.27. Replacement of Fan Assembly
65800010B 6-136
Figure 6.28. S-Band Turning Unit Schematic
6-137 65800010B
Figure 6.29. S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Schematic
6-139 65800010B
3.3 X-Band Scanner Unit

3.3.1 Access to Masthead Transceiver
1. Set Transceiver Unit to Standby.
2. Switch off the Display Unit from the front panel.
3. Isolate and remove both Ship’s Switch Fuses in DC systems.
4. Isolate the radar from the ship’s mains supply using the Isolating Switch
provided for AC systems.
5. Turn the antenna into the service position, i.e. across the Transceiver
axis, clear of any obstructions.
6. Undo the four captive bolts on the underside of each the upper casting
(these secure the upper casting to the base casting).
7. Raise the upper casting into the upright position and make sure the
support stay engages in the locked position.
8. On earlier units the sliding locking bolt should be pushed to the
bottom of the slot in the stay to prevent inadvertent release of the
upper casting. Refer to Figure 6.30.
3.3.2 Access to Bulkhead Transceiver
1. Set Transceiver Unit to Standby.
2. Switch off the Display unit from the front panel.
3. Isolate and remove both Ship’s Switch Fuses in DC systems.
4. Isolate the radar from the ship’s mains supply using the Isolating Switch
provided for AC systems.
5. Undo the four screws that retain the upper cover to the lower chassis
and lift clear.
3.3.3 Removing and Replacing the Transceiver from Masthead Turning Unit
1. Refer to sub-section 3.3.1 (Access to Masthead Transceiver), paying
attention to all safety aspects.
2. Check that the transceiver is fully isolated from the ship’s supply.
Note – The Masthead and Bulkhead Transceiver Units are identical and
only minor differences exist in terms of fixtures.
3. Disconnect the cables from the following sockets:
SKV Video co-axial cable to receiver assembly.
PLYB Ribbon cable to Trigger PCB.
PLTK Cable from PSU to Motor Drive PCB.
PLTA Cable from PSU to Input Filter PCB (mains
supply).
PLTG Cable from PSU to Input PCB.
4. Refer to Figure 6.32.
5. Release the four M6 captive screws that hold the microwave assembly
to the waveguide transition (around the base of the Circulator plate).
6. Remove the three screws that hold the Modulator heat sink to the
chassis.
7. Slacken the two large bolts that hold the PSU heat sink to the chassis.
6-141 65800010B
8. Before sliding up and removing the Transceiver, make sure that no

cables are caught on any of the metalwork to avoid damage.
9. The PSU heat sink has slotted holes: slide upwards (towards the
microwave output transition) and remove without fully removing the two
bolts.
Replacement
The replacement sequence is as follows:
1. Place the Transceiver approximately onto the upper casting using the
two large slotted holes in the PSU heat sink.
2. Slacken the two screws that hold the PSU chassis plate to the
Modulator chassis plate, see Figure 6.32.
3. Slacken the screw that holds the Circulator mounting plate to the PSU
chassis plate.
4. Fit and only partially tighten the three screws in the Modulator heat
sink.
5. Fully tighten the four M6 microwave assembly-retaining screws.
6. Fully tighten the three screws in the Modulator heatsink.
7. Fully tighten the two large bolts in the slotted holes in the PSU heat
sink.
8. Fully tighten the two screws that hold the PSU chassis plate to the
Modulator chassis plate.
9. Fully tighten the screw that holds the circular mounting plate to the PSU
chassis.
Note – This sequence is important to make sure the microwave alignment
takes priority in terms of mechanical tolerances.
10. Replace all cables removed earlier.
3.3.4 Removing and Replacing the Transceiver from Bulkhead Transceiver
Chassis
1. Refer to sub-section 3.3.2 (Access to Bulkhead Transceiver), paying
2. Check that the Transceiver is fully isolated from the ship’s supply.
Note – The Masthead and Bulkhead Transceiver Units are identical and
only minor differences exist in terms of fixtures.
3. Disconnect the cables from the following sockets:
SKV Video co-axial cable to receiver assembly.
PLYB Ribbon cable to Trigger PCB.
PLTK Cable from PSU to Input PCB (motor supply).
PLTA Cable from PSU to Input Filter PCB (mains
supply).
PLTG Cable from PSU to Input PCB.
4. Refer to Figure 6.32 and Figure 6.37.
5. Release the four M6 captive screws that hold the microwave assembly
to the waveguide transition (around the base of the Circulator plate).
65800010B 6-142
6. Remove the three screws that hold the Modulator heat sink to the
chassis.
7. Slacken the two large bolts that hold the PSU heat sink to the chassis.
8. Before sliding up and removing the Transceiver, make sure that no
cables are caught on any of the metalwork to avoid damage.
9. The PSU heat sink has slotted holes: slide upwards (towards the
microwave output transition) and remove without fully removing the two
bolts.
Note – On Bulkhead Transceivers, a small clip is fitted to the chassis to
retain the lower edge of the Modulator PCB and support plate. This
is purely a slide-in fixture and does not require undoing.
Replacement
1. Locate the Transceiver approximately onto the chassis using the two
large slotted holes in the PSU heatsink.
2. Make sure the small clip fitted to the chassis engages the lower edge of
the Modulator PCB and support plate during the replacement process.
3. Slacken the two screws that hold the PSU chassis plate to the
Modulator chassis plate, refer to Figure 6.37.
4. Fit and partially tighten the three screws in the Modulator heat.
5. Fully tighten the four M6 microwave assembly-retaining.
6. Fully tighten the three screws in the Modulator heat sink.
7. Fully tighten the two large bolts in the slotted holes in the PSU heat
sink.
Note – This sequence is important to make sure the microwave alignment
takes priority in terms of mechanical tolerances.
8. Replace all cables removed earlier.
3.3.5 Magnetron Replacement – Masthead and Bulkhead Transceivers
4. Disconnect the two EHT leads from the Modulator PCB terminal block.
5. Remove the four screws holding the Magnetron to the Circulator plate.
Replacement
1. Replacement is the reverse of the removal process.
2. Make sure the polarity of the EHT leads is correct. The PCB is marked
‘Y’ for yellow and ‘G’ for green.
3. Make sure any earth bonding leads to the Magnetron are refitted.
After replacement the magnetron current must be set up as in the
following sub-section.
6-143 65800010B
3.3.6 Setting the Magnetron Current

1. Refer to Figure 6.39 for the necessary procedure for setting Magnetron
current.
3.3.7 Trigger PCB – Replacement
3. Refer to Figure 6.40 for the necessary procedure for replacing the
Trigger PCB.
3.3.8 Trigger PCB – Link Settings
1. Refer to Figure 6.41 for the necessary procedure for setting the link
settings on the Trigger PCB.
3.3.9 Modulator PCB – Replacement
3. Refer to Figure 6.42 for the necessary procedure for replacing the
Modulator PCB.
3.3.10 Modulator PCB – Link Settings
settings on the Modulator PCB.
3.3.11 PSU PCB – Replacement
3. Refer to Figure 6.44 for the necessary procedure for replacing the PSU
PCB.
3.3.12 PSU PCB – Link Settings
settings on the PSU PCB.
65800010B 6-144
3.3.13 Bearing and Heading Marker PCB – Replacement

1. Refer to section 3.3.1 (Access to Masthead Transceiver), paying
4. The PCB is attached to a support casting and should be removed as a
combined assembly as follows:
a. Slacken the two screws retaining the support casting.
b. Slide it towards the outside of the upper casting to clear the screws.
5. Unplug the cable from the PLRE.
6. Remove the PCB and support casting.
Note – When refitting the PCB to the support casting there are dowel pegs
of different diameters used to locate the PCB in the correct
orientation.
7. Before refitting the assembly, check that the link LK1 is set for either
Normal Speed (pins 1-2) 28 RPM or High Speed (pins 2-3) 45 RPM.
8. For PCB assembly 65801826 see Chapter 9.
3.3.14 Heading Marker Alignment
1. Alignment of the Heading Marker is achieved via the Initialisation menu
at the Display Unit.
3.3.15 Receiver Assembly – Replacement (Masthead)
3. Remove the Transceiver Assembly as described at sub-section 3.3.3.
4. Unplug the ribbon cable from the Receiver to the Receiver Filter PCB.
5. Unplug the ribbon cable from the Receiver Filter PCB to the Trigger
PCB.
6. Refer to Figure 6.32 for location of the screws securing the Low Noise
Front End (LNFE) to the Limiter.
Note – The replacement Receiver is supplied with the LNFE already fitted.
7. Remove the four screws that hold the LNFE to the Limiter.
8. Remove the bracket that secures the Receiver to the microwave
assembly at the Receiver end.
9. Remove the whole Receiver assembly.
10. Before fitting the replacement assembly, remove the Receiver Filter
PCB from the old unit, and fit it to replacement unit.
6-145 65800010B
3.3.16 Receiver Assembly – Replacement (Bulkhead)

1. Refer to sub-section 3.3.2 (Access to Bulkhead Transceiver), paying
3. Refer to Figure 6.32, Figure 6.37 and Figure 6.38.
4. Unplug the ribbon cable from the Receiver to the Receiver Filter PCB.
5. Unplug the ribbon cable from the Receiver Filter PCB to the Trigger
PCB.
6. Unplug the video co-axial cable from the Receiver.
7. Refer to Figure 6.32 for the location of screws securing the Low Noise
Front End (LNFE) to the Limiter.
Note – The replacement Receiver is supplied with the LNFE already fitted.
8. Remove the four screws that hold the LNFE to the Limiter and remove
the whole assembly.
9. Before fitting the replacement assembly, remove the Receiver Filter
PCB from the old unit, and fit it to replacement unit.
3.3.17 Performance Monitor – Replacement
3. Remove the two retaining screws that hold the Performance Monitor to
the upper casting (see Figure 6.32) and withdraw the unit.
4. Un-screw the bar that retains the RF absorber to the body of the
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable to the Performance Monitor.
7. Make sure the ribbon cable is reconnected to the Performance Monitor,
the RF absorber is refitted.
After replacement, the Performance Monitor must be set up as
detailed in Chapter 4 under ‘Selecting the Performance Monitor’
Facility.
65800010B 6-146
3.3.18 Motor Drive Board – Replacement

3. Unplug the three cable assemblies from the Motor Drive PCB.
4. Remove the three screws (refer to Figure 6.33).
5. Slide the PCB out of the retaining clip at the opposite end of the PCB.
6. Before fitting the replacement PCB, make sure the speed setting
link LK1 is correctly set for the intended operational speed.
• Position 1 & 2 marked ‘LO’ is for 28 RPM operation.
• Position 2 & 3 marked ‘HI’ is for 45 RPM operation.
7. If in doubt, compare the setting with the old PCB.
8. For PCB Assembly 65801827 see Chapter 9.
10. Make sure all three cable-assemblies are reconnected to the PCB.
3.3.19 Motor and Gearbox Assembly – Replacement
3. Refer to Figure 6.33 for the location of the three screws that retain the
motor support casting to the upper casting.
4. Remove the screws.
5. Withdraw the motor support casting complete with Motor Drive PCB
from the belt drive.
6. Remove the four screws that retain the motor and gearbox assembly to
the support casting.
Note – These four countersink screws are fitted with screw retaining fluid.
When fitting the new motor, these screws should be refitted using
‘Loctite Screwlock 222’ low breaking strength fluid.
7. Remove the impeller from the old motor
8. Fit the replacement impeller.
9. Replacement is the reverse of the removal process, taking care to
engage the motor pulley into the drive belt.
6-147 65800010B
3.3.20 Drive Belt – Replacement

3. Remove the Transceiver as detailed at sub-section 3.3.3.
4. Remove the motor support casting and motor assembly as detailed in
sub section 3.3.19.
5. Refer toFigure 6.33.
6. Remove the three bolts (as shown in Figure 6.31) that retain the
waveguide transition support casting to the rotating joint.
Note – Since the waveguide transition support casting has two sleeve
inserts to aid accuracy in alignment, some resistance may be felt
when removing it.
7. Care should be exercised when removing the casing to avoid damage
to the assembly or to the brass microwave probe at the centre of the
hub.
8. Fit the replacement drive belt.
9. Re-assembly is the reverse of the removal process.
10. Care should be exercised to avoid damage to the brass microwave
probe at the centre of the hub during re-insertion into the transition.
11. Make sure the motor pulley is correctly engaged into the belt.
65800010B 6-148
Figure 6.30. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – Internal view showing Transceiver
6-149 65800010B
Figure 6.31. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – View showing Main Assemblies
65800010B 6-150
Figure 6.32. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – Fitment of Main Assemblies
6-151 65800010B
Figure 6.33. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – View inside upper casting with Transceiver
removed
65800010B 6-152
Figure 6.34. X-Band Masthead Turning Unit – Side view showing Motor Drive Board
retaining screws
6-153 65800010B
Figure 6.35. X-Band Bulkhead Turning Unit – View showing Main Assemblies
65800010B 6-154
Figure 6.36. X-Band Bulkhead Turning Unit – View showing assemblies fitted to lower
casting
6-155 65800010B
Figure 6.37. Bulkhead Transceiver – View with Cover Removed (earlier version)
65800010B 6-156
POWER SUPPLY PCB
2 SLOTTED HOLES
(TRANSCEIVER REMOVAL)
MAINS FUSE
MAINS INPUT FILTER COVER
4 CAPTIVE SCREWS
MICROWAVE ASSEMBLY
(TRANSCEIVER REMOVAL)
MAGNETRON THREE SCREWS (SLACKEN DURING

TRANSCEIVER REPLACEMENT)
TRIGGER PCB
MODULATOR PCB
RECEIVER
INPUT PCB COVER

(REMOVE 6 SCREWS
FOR ACCESS)
MODULATOR PCB
LOCATOR
THREE SCREWS
(TRANSCEIVER REPLACEMENT)
WAVEGUIDE OUTLET
Figure 6.38. Bulkhead Transceiver – View with Cover Removed
6-157 65800010B
Figure 6.39. Setting Magnetron Current
65800010B 6-158
Figure 6.40. Replacing Trigger PCB
6-159 65800010B
Figure 6.41. Link Settings – Trigger PCB
65800010B 6-160
Figure 6.42. Replacing Modulator PCB
6-161 65800010B
Figure 6.43. Link Settings – Modulator PCB
65800010B 6-162
Figure 6.44. Replacing PSU PCB
6-163 65800010B
Figure 6.45. Link Settings – PSU PCB
65800010B 6-164
Figure 6.46. X-Band Turning Unit (Aloft) Schematic
65800010B 6-165
Figure 6.47. X-Band Transceiver Schematic
65800010B 6-167
Figure 6.48. X-Band Turning Unit (Bulkhead) Schematic
65800010B 6-169
3.4 2-Way Interswitch 65842A

Refer to next section for actual spares order code.
First Line Servicing for this unit is limited to field replacement of the following
item.
Assembly Part Number
PCB ASSEMBLY 65842800

item.
BYPASS PCB ASSEMBLY 65846801
3.6 Interface Unit 65847A
item.
65800010B 6-171
4 Limited Spares List for Field Replacement

4.1 CRT Monitors
Part Numbers
Assembly Type 180 250 Med Res. 250 High Res. 340
CRT 3025845 MA00010231 MA00011866 N/A
Degauss Coil 91003688 91003689 91003689 91003608
CRT Board Set* T65814611 T65820611 T65821611 T65826611
consisting of:- consisting of:- consisting of:- consisting of:- consisting of:-
Drive PCB 65814882 65820882 65821882 65826882
Base PCB 65814883 65820883 65821883 65826883
Controller PCB 65800881 65800881 65800881 65800881
Brilliance PCB T65800885 (desk mounting displays ONLY)
Fan 65826612
Video O/P T65800884
(Optional)
*Note that all three CRT PCBs must be ordered and changed as a complete matched set.
4.2 FPD Monitors

FPD Assembly Type Part Number
180 DESKTOP 65815C
180 KIT (AC) 65815A
180 KIT (DC) 65815D
250 DESKTOP 65817C
250 KIT (AC-18.1”) 65817A
250 KIT (AC-19.0”) 65817G
250 KIT (AC-20.1”) 65819A
250 KIT (DC-18.1”) 65817D
250 KIT (AC-19.0”) 65817H
250 KIT (AC-20.1”) 65819D
340 DESKTOP 91003790
340 KIT 91003791
340 DECKSTAND 91003799

PCB ASSEMBLY T65842800
BYPASS PCB ASSEMBLY T65846801
4.5 Interface Unit 65847A
6-172 65800010B
4.6 Spares for Transceivers and Turning Units

The tables below list the spares for standard transceivers and turning units.
For units fitted with additional features options see Chapter 9.
In the tables below replace “xx” with 10 or 25 as appropriate. (e.g 658xxA
becomes 65825A or 65810A), and ”yy” with suffix as explained in Chapter 2
(e.g 65825WAR is a 25KW Turning Unit without biased limiter, with
performance monitor , and AC mains input)
4.6.1 S-Band Turning Units (Masthead and Bulkhead)
TRIGGER PCB ASSEMBLY T65801801
INPUT PCB ASSEMBLY (MASTHEAD TRANSCEIVER) T65801804 or
T65801813*
INPUT PCB ASSEMBLY (BULKHEAD TRANSCEIVER) T65801814
POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY T65801809
BEARING AND HEADING MARKER PCB ASSEMBLY T65801805
RECEIVER FILTER PCB ASSEMBLY T65801818
RECEIVER ASSEMBLY T65830616
MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY T65830812
LIMITER ASSEMBLY T91005224
MAGNETRON T91005225
CIRCULATOR T91005223
PERFORMANCE MONITOR T91003746
MOTOR 110/120V AND 220/240V Normal Speed T91003757
MOTOR 110/120V AND 220/240V High Speed T91003759
MOTOR 220/240V AND 380/440 3PH Normal Speed T91003751
MOTOR 110/220V 3PH Normal Speed T91003752
MOTOR 220/240V AND 380/440V 3PH High Speed T91003753
MOTOR 110/220V 3PH High Speed T91003754
MAINS FILTER PCB ASSEMBLY T91005228
FUSE MA00007245
FAN – AXIAL 80x80x25 24VDC (MASTHEAD Tx/Rx) T65830656
THERMAL SWITCH (FOR FAN – MASTHEAD Tx/Rx) MA00007765
* 65801804 can be replaced with T65801813
65801813 must be replaced with T65801813
65800010B 6-173
4.6.2 Standard X-Band Turning Units and Transceivers

65825A, 65825G, 65825H, 65825P, 65825W, 65825Lyy, 65825Myy,
65825Pyy, 65825Wyy,
65810A, 65810G, 65810H, 65810P, 65810W, 65810Myy, 65810Pyy,
65810Wyy
TRIGGER PCB ASSEMBLY (STANDARD) T65801801
TRIGGER PCB ASSEMBLY (FOR UNITS T65801822
PART No. 658xxP, 658xxG, 658xxPyy)
INPUT PCB ASSEMBLY (TURNING UNIT) T65801813
INPUT PCB ASSEMBLY (TURNING UNIT) (FOR TURNING UNIT T65801819
PART No.65825Lyy)
INPUT PCB ASSEMBLY (FOR BULKEAD TRANSCEIVERS PART T65801814
No. 658xxH, 658xxG)
INPUT PCB ASSEMBLY (FOR BULKHEAD TRANSCEIVERS T65801820
PART No. 658xxA, 658xxP, 658xxW)
POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY AC MAINS INPUT T65825816
POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY DC MAINS INPUT T65810816
BEARING AND HEADING MARKER PCB ASSEMBLY T65801805
RECEIVER FILTER PCB ASSEMBLY T65801818
RECEIVER ASSEMBLY T65801616
MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY T65810812
LIMITER ASSEMBLY (10kW) (NITS FOR UNITS PNo 65810A, T91005221
65810P, 65810G, 65810Myy, 65810Pyy, 65810SDy,
LIMITER (10KW) (FOR UNITS PNo. 65810W, 65810H, 65810Wyy T91003241
LIMITER ASSEMBLY (25KW) FOR UNITS PNo. 65825A, 65825G, T91005226
65825Lyy, 65825Myy, 65825Pyy,
LIMITER 25KW FOR UNITS PNo. 65825H, 65825W, 65825Wyy T91005210
MAGNETRON (10kW) T91003582
MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY (25kW) (STANDARD) T65825812
MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY (25Kw HIGH PRF) FOR UNITS T65825813
PNo. 65825P, 65825Pyy.
MAGNETRON (25kW) T91003496
CIRCULATOR T91005227
PERFORMANCE MONITOR T91005220
MOTOR DRIVE & DYNAMIC BRAKE PCB ASSEMBLY T65801811
MOTOR & GEARBOX ASSEMBLY T91003765
IMPELLER 65801136
MAINS FILTER PCB ASSEMBLY T65825601
FUSE MA00007245
BELT DRIVE (40W) MA00008979
FAN – AXIAL 80x80x25 24VDC (BULKHEAD Tx/Rx) T65830656
THERMAL SWITCH (FOR FAN – BULKHEAD Tx/Rx) MA00007765
CABLE ASSY – SCANNER ON/OFF (INC SWITCH) T65801506
6-174 65800010B
4.7 Processor Electronics Unit

DISPLAY PROCESSOR PCB T65800811
RADAR PROCESSOR PCB (ATA/ARPA + VISION) T65800812
RADAR PROCESSOR PCB (ATA/ARPA) T65800814
RADAR PROCESSOR PCB (EPA) T65800815
COMBINED PROCESSOR PCB (EPA(L)) T65800839
STANDARD COMPASS PCB T65800831
SPECIAL COMPASS PCB T65800832
AC INPUT/OUTPUT PANEL PCB T65800818
DC INPUT/OUTPUT PANEL PCB T65800821
BACKPLANE PCB T65800819
AC POWER SUPPLY PCB T65800823
DC POWER SUPPLY PCB T65800822
JOYSTICK ASSEMBLY T65800606
TRACKERBALL ASSEMBLY T65800603
MEMORY CARD ASSEMBLY T65800602
MEMORY CARD BUFFER PCB (for KIT versions) T65800837
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY T65845600
ON/OFF SWITCH ASSEMBLY T65800607
FAN ASSEMBLY T65800613
AIR FILTER (STANDARD) 65800111
AIR FILTER (INTEGRAL KEYBOARD OPTION) 65800214
4.8 Extended Processor Electronics Unit

DISPLAY PROCESSOR PCB T65818811
RADAR PROCESSOR PCB (ATA/ARPA) T65818814
STANDARD COMPASS PCB T65800831
SPECIAL COMPASS PCB T65800832
AC INPUT/OUTPUT PANEL PCB T65818818
BACKPLANE PCB T65818819
AC POWER SUPPLY PCB T65800823
MEMORY CARD ASSEMBLY T65800602
MEMORY CARD BUFFER PCB (for KIT versions) T65800837
FAN ASSEMBLY T65818613
AIR FILTER (STANDARD) 65800111
AIR FILTER (INTEGRAL KEYBOARD OPTION) 65800214
65800010B 6-175
4.9 Kit Control Panel Modules

Module Width (mm) Part Number
JOYSTICK 154 T65826658 or T65800606
170 T65821620 or T65800606
TRACKERBALL 154 T65826654 or T65800603
170 T65821623 or T65800603
MEMORY CARD 154 T65826655
170 T65821619
KEYBOARD 312 T65845600
ON/OFF SWITCH 73 T65826656
BRILLIANCE 163 T65826657
73 T65821621
Note – To replace the joystick or trackerball, it is possible to just replace the
internal assembly.
4.10 Deck Mounting 340 Display Control Panel
Note – For units fitted with extruded panel (as shown at Figure 6.2 in this
chapter), refer to Section 4.9.
MEMORYCARD ASSEMBLY T65800602
MEMORY CARD BUFFER PCB T65800845
BRILLIANCE PCB T65800885
6-176 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Routine Maintenance
CHAPTER 7
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................3
2 Maintenance Plan................................................................................................4
65800010B 7-1
Routine Maintenance Ship’s Manual

intentionally
7-2 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Routine Maintenance
1 Introduction
The BridgeMaster E Radar System is designed to function reliably for many
years. To make sure of the best possible performance, you must complete
specific maintenance tasks at regular intervals. This chapter has details of the
recommended maintenance plan.
65800010B 7-3
Routine Maintenance Ship’s Manual
2 Maintenance Plan
!WARNING!
Lethal voltage hazard
Before the following maintenance tasks are started (except the fan operation
check), the equipment must be isolated from the mains supply. In addition to
this, no components or assemblies should be touched for at least five minutes.
This is to make sure any high voltage capacitors have discharged.
Interval Action Notes
3 Monthly Check the screen of the Display for Use a soft cloth to clean the screen. If
dirt. available, use an anti-static spray.
Solvents must not be used as a cleaning
agent.
3 Monthly Check that the Processor To ensure good reliability, it is essential that
Electronics Unit fan is working (with the circulating air within the unit is
unit switched ON). maintained. Refer to Figure 6.1 (Chapter 6)
to remove any dust build up on the air
If practicable, check that the CRT intake filters at the front of the unit. If
Monitor fan is working (with unit necessary, wash or replace the filter.
switched on)
3 Monthly Plug rechargeable memory cards Rechargeable memory cards have no

into a powered-up display for at removable batteries.
least one hour.
6 Monthly Check the window of the Antenna Excessive dirt or carbon deposits from the
for excessive dirt. ship’s funnels may cause reduced radar
performance. Use hot soapy water to clean
the antenna window.
Never use solvents.
6 Monthly Check all external nuts, bolts and The nuts, bolts and washers must be
washers on the Scanner Unit, for replaced if they are heavily corroded, and
corrosion and for correct tightness. suitable anti-corrosion compound applied.
6 Monthly In the S-band Scanner unit check If leaks are detected, refer to Service
for oil leaks in the gearbox. Engineer.
In the X-band Scanner unit check

for condition of the drive belt.
2 Yearly Replace the primary battery on non- Change battery while card is plugged into a
rechargeable memory cards. (Memory powered-up display.
card battery replacement kit Part No
65600712)
Note – If damage to any of the items being checked during routine maintenance
is observed, call for a service repair.
7-4 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Modifications
CHAPTER 8
MODIFICATIONS
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................3
65800010B 8-1
Modifications Ship’s Manual

intentionally
8-2 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Modifications
1 Introduction
This chapter will be used for recording system and equipment modifications
(including the issue of Modification Leaflets), and for conveying information
released after publication.
65800010B 8-3
Modifications Ship’s Manual

intentionally
8-4 65800010B
Ship’s Manual Additional Features
CHAPTER 9
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Contents
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................3
2 Technical Specification ......................................................................................4
2.1 General .....................................................................................................................4
2.2 Isolated Ship’s Heading Marker Output ....................................................................4
2.3 Pulse Bearing Output................................................................................................4
2.4 Synchro and Resolver Bearing Output .....................................................................5
2.5 Pre-trigger Output .....................................................................................................5
2.6 Radar Silence Input ..................................................................................................6
2.7 External Trigger Input ...............................................................................................6
2.8 Forced Antenna Rotation in Standby Input. (later X-Band units only).......................7
2.9 Antenna Speed Selection Input (later X-Band units only) .........................................7
3 Installation and Interconnections ......................................................................8

3.1 General .....................................................................................................................8
3.2 Interconnections........................................................................................................8
3.3 Configuring Printed Circuit Boards..........................................................................13
3.3.1 Input PCB Assembly 65801815 ...............................................................................13
3.3.4 Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801826 ................................................................21
3.3.5 Motor Drive Board 65801827...................................................................................22
4 Spares List for Field Replacement Modules...................................................23

4.1 X-Band Turning Unit (Masthead Transceiver).........................................................23
4.2 S-Band Turning Unit (Masthead Transceiver).........................................................23
4.3 X-Band Turning Unit (for use with Bulkhead Transceiver) ......................................23
4.4 S-Band Turning Unit (for use with Bulkhead Transceiver) ......................................23
4.5 X-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Units Type 65810F, 65810L, 65825F, 65825L.......24
4.6 X-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Units Type 65810B, 65810T, 65825B, 65825T .....24
4.7 S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Units 65831B..........................................................24
5 Circuit Diagrams. ..............................................................................................25
65800010B 9-1
Additional Features Ship’s Manual
List of Figures
Figure 9.1. X-Band Turning Unit Cable Entry Installation Drawing ........................ 11
Figure 9.2. S-Band Turning Unit Cable Entry Installation Drawing ........................ 12
Figure 9.3. Input PCB Assembly 65801815........................................................... 13
Figure 9.6. Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801826 ............................................ 21
Figure 9.7. Motor Drive PCB Assembly 65801827 ................................................ 22
Figure 9.8. Circuit Diagram Input PCB 65801819 ................................................. 27
Figure 9.9. Circuit Diagram Input PCB 65801815 ................................................. 29
Figure 9.10. Circuit Diagram Input PCB 65801821 .............................................. 31
9-2 65800010B
1 Introduction
This chapter contains the additional information required to cover the installation
and operation of radar systems equipped with the Additional Features option.
The additional features are as follows:-
Isolated Ship’s Heading Marker output, RS422, and uncommitted relay contacts
4096 Pulse Bearing Data output, RS422, and open drain FET output
External Triggering input
Pre-trigger output
Radar Silence input i.e.( transmission inhibit control . Selectable for RS422,
RS423 voltage levels, and on later units closing contact input.
Antenna Rotation in Standby Input (X-Band only)
On later X-Band units remote selection of high and normal rotation rates for
antenna. (not available on early units that have high PRF option fitted)
Optional synchro or resolver bearing output.
Note – Some options are mutually exclusive.
65800010B 9-3
2 Technical Specification
2.1 General
This section only gives details of the technical specification for the additional
features, for all other parameters see Chapter 1.
Except where indicated, the following specification applies equally to X-Band
and S-Band Transceivers, and Turning Units.
2.2 Isolated Ship’s Heading Marker Output
Output 1
Parameter Value
Output Type Uncommited contact ( solid state relay)
Voltage Rating 24V dc maximum
Current Rating 0.7A maximum
Closure Duration 20° approx
Adjustment Range ±10° approx wrt true heading
Adjustment Increment 0.088°
Reference Leading edge
Sense Selectable to be rising or falling edge
Output 2
Parameter Value
Output Type RS422 (differential)
Output Drive To drive 120ohm twisted pair
Vout high 2.0V min Isource -20mA
Vout low 0.5V max Isink 20mA
Closure Duration 20° approx
Adjustment Range ±10° approx wrt true heading
Adjustment Increment 0.088°
Reference Leading edge
Sense Selectable to be rising or falling edge
2.3 Pulse Bearing Output
Output 1
Parameter Value
Output Type Open drain FET (referenced to 0V)
Pulses per Revolution 4096
Voltage Rating 25V dc maximum
Current Rating 100mA maximum
Mark Space Ratio <1.5:1
Output 2
Parameter Value
Output Type RS422 (differential)
Pulses per Revolution 4096
Output Drive To drive 120ohm twisted pair
Vout high 2.0V min Isource -20mA
Vout low 0.5V max Isink 20mA
Mark Space Ratio <1.5:1
9-4 65800010B
2.4 Synchro and Resolver Bearing Output
The turning unit may be fitted with one size 11 synchro or resolver. This is
not aligned, any alignment must be made externally.
Control transmitter (CX) or control differential transmitter (CDX) synchro
options are available.
The reference supply is assumed to be from an external source.
Standard synchros available are:
11CX4c
Parameter Value
Type Control transmitter
Ratio 1:1
Reference Voltage 115V rms
Output Voltage 90V rms line to line
Frequency 400Hz
11CDX4b
Parameter Value
Type Differential control transmitter
Ratio 1:1
Input Voltage 78V rms line to line
Output Voltage 90V rms line to line
Frequency 400Hz
Standard resolver available is:

11M6P1
Parameter Value
Type Data transmission
Ratio 1:1
Input Voltage 26V rms line to line
Output Voltage 11.8V rms line to line
Frequency 400Hz
2.5 Pre-trigger Output

Parameter Value
Amplitude 8V min 15V max
Duration 1.0 µs nominal
Polarity Positive
Rise Time (10% - 90%) <100ns
Time wrt Magnetron Output -11µs typical
Drive Capability 75 ohms
65800010B 9-5
2.6 Radar Silence Input

RS422
Parameter Value
InputType RS422 (differential)
Response Time Within 1 PRI
Input Impedance 120 ohms
Closing Contact (later units only)

Parameter Value
Input Type Uncommitted closing contact
Voltage on Open Conatct 6V max
Sink Current Through Closed Contact 4mA max
Sense Selectable
RS423
Parameter Value
Input Type RS423 bipolar
Minimum Differential Input Voltage +/-2V
Input Voltage +/-7V max
Input Current .<-10mA for Vin -7V other input at 0V
Sense Selectable
2.7 External Trigger Input

Parameter Value
Amplitude 4.0V min 40.0V max
Duration 0.2µs min 40µs max
Polarity Positive
Rise Time (10% - 90%) <50ns
Delay to Magnetron Output 11µs approx.
Input PRF 5.5kHz max 200Hz min
(Output PRF limited within the TxRx)
Input Impedance 75 ohms
Average Input Power* 0.4W max
Trigger pulse amplitude, duration and PRF must be considered in limiting the input power.
The presence of a signal at the external trigger input will automatically select
external trigger operation.
9-6 65800010B
2.8 Forced Antenna Rotation in Standby Input. (later X-Band

units only)
An isolated closing contact can be connected to X-band turning unit to force
the antenna to rotate when in the standby mode. Rotation is forced when the
contact is closed.
Note – This function cannot be used in conjunction with the remote speed
change option. i.e. they are mutually exclusive.
Parameter Value
Input Type Uncommitted closing contact
Voltage Applied to Open Conatct 5.5V max
Sink Current Through Closed Contact* 1mA max
Sense Rotation enabled when contact is closed
*The switch or contacts should be specified for switching low currents.
2.9 Antenna Speed Selection Input (later X-Band units only)

An isolated closing contact can be connected to the X-band turning unit to
enable remote selection between normal and high speed antenna rotation.
In the absence of the closing contacts links allow the rotation speed to be
preset to normal or high speed.
Notes: This function cannot be used in conjunction with the Forced
Antenna Rotation in Standby feature. i.e. they are mutually
exclusive.
This feature is not available on early units fitted with the high PRF
option.
For 10KW dc systems high speed operation should only be used

where a 1.2m (4ft) antenna is fitted to the turning unit. For 1.8m
(6ft) and 2.4m (8ft) antennas the antenna rotation speed must be
preset to the Normal setting.
Parameter Value
Antenna Speed Normal 28 rpm nom.
Antenna Speed High 45 rpm nom
Control Signal Type Uncommitted closing contact
Signal Sense Closed contacts select
28rpmOpen contacts select 45rpm
Voltage Applied to Open Contact < 5.5V DC
Sink Current Through Closed Contact <500uA
65800010B 9-7
3 Installation and Interconnections

3.1 General
To make use of the additional features requires the fitting of extra cables to
the turning unit or transceiver.
To facilitate the fitting of the extra cables the turning units are supplied with
additional cable glands fitted.
For details see Figure 9.1 and Figure 9.2.
3.2 Interconnections
Only the extra connections required for the additional features are listed in
this section, for all other connections see Chapter 2.
X and S Band Turning Unit Connections
Cable No: EMC CAT — Cable Type: PT1YM (75ohm coax)
From Turning Unit To:
Unit Connector No: SKH Unit Connector:
Cable Connector Type: L734PNI Cable Connector Type:
Manufacturer; Belling Lee Manufacturer:
Line Function Pin No. Colour Pin No. Remarks
No.
1 PRE-TRIGGER O/P PIN INNER PIN Masthead transceiver
2 SCREEN OUTER BRAID OUTER only

To: Turning Unit From:
Unit Connector No: SKJ Unit Connector:
No.
1 EXT-TRIGGER I/P PIN INNER PIN Masthead transceiver
2 SCREEN OUTER BRAID OUTER only
Cable No: EMC CAT — Cable Type: 16 - 2 - 6C

From: Turning Unit To:
Unit Connector No: TSD Unit Connector No:
Cable Connector Type: 159749 BL3.5/15 Cable Connector Type:
Manufacturer: Weidmuller Manufacturer: Connector:
Line Function Pin Colour Pin No. Remarks
No. No.
1 SYNCHRO S1 1 R
2 SYNCHRO S2 2 B
3 SYNCHRO S3 3 G
4 SYNCHRO R1 ( Ref) 4 Y
5 SYNCHRO R2 (Ref Ret) 5 W
6 SYNCHRO R3 6 BK
7 SCREEN ETAG BRAID
9-8 65800010B
Cable No: EMC CAT — Cable Type: 16 - 2 - 6C
No. No.
1 RESOLVER S1 1 R
2 RESOLVER S2 2 B
3 RESOLVER S3 3 G
4 RESOLVER R1 4 Y
5 RESOLVER S4 5 W
6 RESOLVER R3 6 BK
7 SCREEN ETAG BRAID
Cable No: EMC CAT — Cable Type:*

Manufacturer: Weidmuller Manufacture:
Line Function Pin No. Colour. Pin No. Remarks
No.
1 ISOLATED HMKR 7
2 ISOLATED HMKR RET 8
3 PULSE BEARING 4096 9
4 RADAR SILENCE 10 Masthead transceiver
5 RADAR SILENCE RET 11 only
6 HEADING MKR+ 12 Twisted Pair
(RS422)
7 HEADING MKR- 13
(RS422)
8 PULSE BEARING+ 14 Twisted Pair
(RS422)
9 PULSE BEARING- 15
(RS422)
Unit Connector No: TSK Unit Connector No:
Manufacturer: Weidmuller Manufacture:
Line Function Pin No. Colour. Pin No. Remarks
No.
10 SPEED SELECT/ 1 X-Band only
MOTOR START Function depends on
11 SPEED SELECT RET/ 2 link settings
MOTOR START RET
12 SCREEN E/TAG Braid
*Cable gland is designed to fit 8-core cable type 6224C (MA00007419). Any alternative
cable should have similar dimensions to 6224C.
65800010B 9-9
X and S Band Transceiver Connections

From Transceiver Unit To:
Unit Connector No: SKH Unit Connector:
No.
1 PRE-TRIGGER O/P PIN INNER PIN
2 SCREEN OUTER BRAID OUTER

To: Transceiver Unit From:
Unit Connector No: SKJ Unit Connector:
No.
1 EXT-TRIGGER I/P PIN INNER PIN
2 SCREEN OUTER BRAID OUTER
Cable No: EMC CAT — Cable Type: 16 - 2 - 2C or 6224C

To: Transceiver Unit From:
No. No.
1 RADAR SILENCE 1 If RS422 use twisted
2 RADAR SILENCE RET 2 pair
3 SCREEN ETAG BRAID
9-10 65800010B
NOTE:
This drawing is to be used in conjunction with drawings:
65801050/1, 65801050/2, 65801050/3 contained in
Despatch Kit 65801660.
65800010B
See ship's manual for details of assembling cables into
cable glands.
Ship’s Manual
Figure 9.1.
Cable Gland Useage

Cable gland No. Turning Unit Without Integral Transceiver Turning Unit With Integral Transceiver
Function Cable Type Sealing Pin Function Cable Type Sealing Pin
Cable Gland 1 Motor Supply 37-3-2R (TP3149) Mains Input 37-3-2R
Cable Gland 2 PM - Trigger Coaxial (PT1YM) 6mm (MA00009738) Ext - Trigger Coaxial (PT1YM) 6mm (MA00009738)
Cable Gland 2 TU Enable 16-2-2C (TP3141) 7mm (MA00009662) Pre - Trigger Coaxial (PT1YM) 6mm (MA00009738)
Cable Gland 2 Isolated HMkr, Azimuth, 6224C (Black) 8mm (MA00012039) Isolated HMkr, Azimuth 6224C (Black) 8mm (MA00012039)
Antenna Speed Select (4 twisted pairs) Radar Silence, Antenna (4 twisted pairs) APP'D LJE TITLE APP
Speed Select CABLE INSTALLATION DRAWING LJE
Cable Gland 2 Synchro 16-2-6C (TP3144) 8mm (MA00012039) Synchro 16-2-6C (TP3144) 8mm (MA00012039)
DATE 03/02/00
FOR TURNING UNIT WITH
X-Band Turning Unit Cable Entry Installation Drawing

DU Data, TX Data, 6224C (Black) APP'D MW DATE
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Cable Gland 3 PM Control +/-12V 16-2-12C (TP3145) Trigger (4 twisted pairs)
Cable Gland 3 Not Used 16-2-2C (TP3141) 7mm (MA00009662) DATE 03/02/00
Cable Gland 3 Video Coaxial (PT1YM) DRN. LJE DRG. No. REV
Seal unused cable entries in the glands with the sealing pins supplied. Seal unused cable entries in the glands with the sealing pins supplied. DATE 03/02/00 A3/ 65801050/4-1 B
THIS DRAWING IS NORTHROP GRUMMAN SPERRY MARINE B.V. PROPERTY. IT MAY NOT BE COPIED OR EXHIBITED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION A/CAD FILE:- 65801050sht4.dwg
Additional Features
Chapter 9
9-11
9-12
3RD ANGLE PROJECTION NOTE:
This drawing is to be used in conjunction with drawings:
65830050/1, 65830050/2, 65830050/3, 65830050/4
contained in Despatch Kit 65830660.
Chapter 9
CABLE
GLAND
BODY
EMC GASKET
CABLE (CLAMPS ONTO
APERTURES CABLE BRAID)
EMC GASKET
Figure 9.2.
WATERPROOF
SEAL
Additional Features
TO INSTALL THE CABLES
FOR THE MULTICORE CABLES
FOR THE COAXIAL CABLES
ASSEMBLY INTO TURNING UNIT
Turning Unit Without Integral Transceiver Turning Unit With Integral Transceiver
Cable gland No.
Function Cable Type Sealing Pin Function Cable Type Sealing Pin
Cable Gland 1 Mains Input 37-3-2R (TP3149)
Cable Gland 2 PM - Trigger Coaxial (PT1YM) 6mm (MA00009738) Ext - Trigger Coaxial (PT1YM) 6mm (MA00009738)
Cable Gland 2 Not Used 16-2-2C (TP3141) 7mm (MA00009662) Pre - Trigger Coaxial (PT1YM) 6mm (MA00009738) UNUSED CABLES
Cable Gland 2 Isolated HMkr, Azimuth, 6224C (Black) 8mm (MA00012039) Isolated HMkr, Azimuth 6224C (Black) 8mm (MA00012039)
(4 twisted pairs) Radar Silence (4 twisted pairs)
Cable Gland 2 Synchro 16-2-6C (TP3144) 8mm (MA00012039) Synchro 16-2-6C (TP3144) 8mm (MA00012039)
Cable Gland 3 PM Control +/-12V 16-2-12C (TP3145) DU Data, TX Data, 6224C (Black)
Trigger (4 twisted pairs)
Cable Gland 3 TU Enable 16-2-2C (TP3141) 7mm (MA00009662)
Cable Gland 3 Video Coaxial (PT1YM)
Cable Gland Useage

APP'D LJE TITLE APP
S-Band Turning Unit Cable Entry Installation Drawing

LJE
DATE
APP'D MW DATE
WEIGHT :- COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES :- WHEN MOUNTING UNIT, ENSURE ADEQUATE DATE
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES STANDARD :- CLEARANCE FOR SERVICE ACCESS. DRN. L.J.E DRG. No. REV
CENTRE OF GRAVITY POSITION SHOWN THUS STEERING :- DATE 21/01/00 A3/
THIS DRAWING IS NORTHROP GRUMMAN SPERRY MARINE B.V. PROPERTY. IT MAY NOT BE COPIED OR EXHIBITED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION A/CAD FILE:- 65830050_6.DWG
Ship’s Manual
65800010B
3.3 Configuring Printed Circuit Boards.
3.3.1 Input PCB Assembly 65801815
(Used in S Band and X Band bulkhead transceiver types 65810F, 65810L,
65825F, 65825L, 65831B )
LK7 LK6
LK1 LK2 LK3
Figure 9.3. Input PCB Assembly 65801815
Default Settings
Unit Type LK1 LK2 LK3 LK6 LK7
65810F 65825F 1-2 2 -3 2 -3 1-2 Parked
65810L 65825L 1-2 2 -3 2 -3 1-2 Parked
65831B 1-2 2 -3 2 -3 1-2 Parked
65800010B 9-13
LK1, LK6 and LK7 :-Radar Silence
These links allow the radar silence input to be configured for different signal
types.
The closing contact option is only available on later units, that have LK6 on
the Input PCB, and Trigger PCB type 65801806 fitted in the transceiver.
When LK6 is fitted in position 2 – 3 a 120 ohm terminating resistor is
connected across the input. If a termination is not required (e.g. for daisy
chained inputs) fit the link in position 1 – 2.
Input Type
RS422
LK1 not fitted or parked on pin 1 ( i.e. not linking two pins. )
LK6 fitted 2 – 3
LK7 not fitted (park on pin 1)
Transmission is inhibited when the input at TSD1 is positive wrt that at
TSD2
To change the sense of operation of the input reverse the connections to
TSD1 and 2
RS423
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK7 fitted 1 – 2
Connect the input to TSD1
Transmission is inhibited when the voltage at TSD1 is positive.
To change the sense of operation of the input:
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK7 fitted 2 – 3
Connect the input to TSD2.
Transmission is inhibited when the voltage at TSD2 is negative.
Closing Contact or No Input (default setting)
Closing contact option not available on early units fitted with Trigger PCB
65801803
LK1 fitted 1 – 2
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
Connect input to TSD2
Transmission is inhibited when TSD2 is shorted to 0V. (TSC8)
LK1 fitted 2 – 3
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
Transmission is enabled when TSD1 is shorted to 0V. (TSC8)
9-14 65800010B
(Used in S and X Band Turning Units)
1
1
1
1
1
Default Settings
The default setting for Turning Units 65801Cxx, 65825Nxx, 65825Txx,
65810Nxx, 65810Txx is for high speed rotation.
To select normal speed rotation link TSK1 to TSK2.
Unit Type LK1 LK2 LK5 LK6 LK8 LK9
65801CAx x 2-3 2-3 x 1-2 2-3
65810Nxx 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2 2-3
65810Txx 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2 2-3
65825NAx 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2 2-3
65825TAx 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2 2-3
65830Cxx x 2-3 2-3 x 1-2 parked
65830Nxx 1-2 2-3 2-3 1 1-2 parked
65830Txx 1-2 2-3 2-3 1 1-2 parked
65825Lxx x x x x 1-2 1-2
‘x’ Don’t care for this unit.
*LK6 is not fitted to earlier issue printed boards.
LK8 and LK9 are not fitted to earlier issues of the printed circuit board, units
fitted with the earlier issue boards do not have the remote speed selection
option.
Remote selection of antenna rotation speed is not available on turning unit
type: 65825Lxx, 65830Cxx, 65830Nxx.
65800010B 9-15
LK1, LK6 and LK 8: Radar Silence
(only applicable to Turning Unit Types 65810Nxx, 65810Txx 65825Nxx,
65825Txx, and 65830Nxx, 65830Txx)
These links let the radar silence input be configured for different signal
types. The closing contact option is only available on later units, that have
LK6 on the Input PCB, and Trigger PCB 65801806 fitted in the transceiver.
When LK6 is fitted in position 2 – 3 a 120ohm terminating-resistor is
connected across the input. If a termination is not required (e.g. for daisy-
Input Type
RS422
LK6 fitted 2 – 3
LK8 fitted 1 – 2
Transmission is inhibited when the input at TSD10 is positive wrt TSD11
To change the sense of operation of the input, reverse the connections to
TSD10 and TSD11.
RS423
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK8 fitted 1 – 2
Link TSD11 to 0V on TSC8
LK1 not fitted or parked on pin 1 (i.e. not linking two pins.)
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK8 fitted 1 – 2
Link TSD10 to 0V on TSC8.
No closing contact option available on units with Trigger PCB 65801803
LK1 fitted 1 – 2
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK8 fitted 1 – 2
Transmission is inhibited when TSD11 is shorted to 0V (TSC8)
LK1 fitted 2 – 3
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK8 fitted 1 – 2
Transmission is enabled when TSD10 is shorted to 0V (TSC8)
9-16 65800010B
LK2: Heading Marker Polarity Selection.
Heading Marker Polarity Normal
LK2 fitted 2 – 3
Defined as valid on falling edge of signal on TSD12 and rising edge of
signal on TSD13 or, contact closure between TSD5 and TSD7.
Heading Marker Polarity Inverted
LK2 fitted 1 – 2
Defined as valid on rising edge of signal on TSD12 and falling edge of
signal on TSD13 or, contact opening between TSD5 and TSD7.
LK5: Fixed/Adjustable Heading Marker Selection.
This link allows selection between an adjustable heading marker that can
be preset to lead or lag the true heading, or a fixed heading marker.
Usually the link will be set to the adjustable heading maker position.
The standard heading marker output (on TSC12) occurs approximately 10°
before ship’s head. The timing of the isolated heading marker output can be
delayed in increments of 0.088° from this, covering an approximate range of
±10° about ship’s head. Adjustment is effected by setting DIL switch SA in a
binary sequence. Switch 1 sets the least significant bit. When all switches
are set to OFF (binary 00000000) the output is set to approximately 10°
before ship’s head. When all switches are set to ON (binary 11111111) the
heading marker is delayed to approximately 10° after ship’s head. A binary
setting of 10000000 (when only switch 8 is ON) equates approximately to
ship’s head (0°).
Fixed Heading Marker Position
LK5 fitted 1 – 2
The fixed Heading marker precedes true heading by approximately 10°
The fixed heading marker output is only available in RS422 format.
Adjustable Heading Marker Position
LK5 fitted 2 – 3
Heading marker can be preset to lead the or lag the true heading.
65800010B 9-17
LK9
This link is used to select one of two options. Remote selection of antenna
rotation speed, or forced antenna rotation.
The two functions are mutually exclusive.
LK9: Remote Speed Selection LK9
(only applicable to later versions of X-Band Turning Unit types 65801Cxx,
65810Nxx, 65810Txx, 658825Nxx, 65825Txx)
This link has to be set in conjunction with LK1 on the Pulse Bearing PCB
(65801826), and LK1 on the Motor Drive PCB (65801827).
When LK9 is set to enable remote selection of antenna rotation speed a
short circuit between TSK1 and TSK2 selects normal speed, and an open
circuit selects high speed.
Remote Speed Selection Enabled
LK9 fitted 2 – 3
Remote Speed Selection Disabled
LK9 not fitted or parked on pin1 ( i.e. not linking two pins)
LK9: Forced Antenna Rotation
(only applicable to Turning Unit Type 65825LAR, 65801Cxx, 65810Nxx,
65810Txx, 65825Nxx, 65825Txx)
This link allows an external switch to override the internal control logic to
force the antenna to rotate when it would normally be inhibited, for example
when the transceiver is switched to standby.
The function can only be used if the Remotely Selectable Antenna Speed
facility is not required.
Forced Rotation Enabled
LK9 fitted 1 – 2
Forced Rotation Disabled
LK9 fitted 2 –3 or parked on pin1( i.e. not linking two pins)
If TSK1 is shorted to TSK2 the antenna will rotate and override the internal
control logic.
9-18 65800010B

(Used in X Band bulkhead transceiver types 65810B, 65810T, 65825B,
65825T)
LK6 LK7 LK1
LK3
LK2
Default Settings
Unit Type LK1 LK2 LK3 LK6 LK7
65810B 65825B 1-2 2 -3 2 -3 1-2 Parked
65810T 65825T 1-2 2 -3 2 -3 1-2 Parked
65800010B 9-19
LK1, LK6 and LK7: Radar Silence
These links allow the radar silence input to be configured for different signal
types.
The closing contact option is only available on later units, that have LK6 on
the Input PCB, and Trigger PCB type 65801806 fitted in the transceiver.
When LK6 is fitted in position 2 – 3 a 120 ohm terminating resistor is
connected across the input. If a termination is not required (e.g. for daisy
Input Type
RS422
LK6 fitted 2 – 3
Transmission is inhibited when the input at TSD1 is positive wrt that at
TSD2
To change the sense of operation of the input reverse the connections to
TSD1 and 2
RS423
LK1 fitted 2 – 3
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK7 fitted 1 – 2
LK1 fitted 1 – 2
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
LK7 fitted 2 – 3
Closing contact option not available on units fitted
LK1 fitted 1 – 2
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
Transmission is inhibited when TSD2 is shorted to 0V. (TSC8)
LK1 fitted 2 – 3
LK6 fitted 1 – 2
Transmission is enabled when TSD1 is shorted to 0V. (TSC8)
9-20 65800010B
3.3.4 Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801826
(fitted to later versions of X-Band Turning Unit types 65801Cxx, 65810Nxx,
65810Txx, 658825Nxx, 65825Txx)
Earlier units were fitted with standard Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly
65801805.
LK1
Shown fitted 2 - 3
1 LK1
file ref: 65801805.dwg
Figure 9.6. Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801826
LK1: Speed Select

Normal Speed Selected
LK1 fitted 1 – 2
High Speed Selected
LK1 not fitted or parked on pin1 (i.e. not linking two pins)
Selectable Speed Selected
LK1 fitted 2 – 3
65800010B 9-21
3.3.5 Motor Drive Board 65801827
(fitted to later versions of X-Band Turning Unit types 65801Cxx, 65810Nxx,
65810Txx, 658825Nxx, 65825Txx)
Earlier units were fitted with standard Motor Drive PCB Assembly 65801811
LK1 shown fitted 2 - 3
LO
1
LK1
HI
file ref:65801811.dwg
Figure 9.7. Motor Drive PCB Assembly 65801827
LK1: Speed Select

Normal Speed Selected
LK1 fitted 1 – 2
High Speed Selected
LK1 not fitted or parked on pin1 (i.e. not linking two pins)
Selectable Speed Selected
LK1 fitted 2 – 3
9-22 65800010B
4 Spares List for Field Replacement Modules

Standard PCBs are replaced by Additional Features variants in systems with
additional features. The following list shows the boards that are different in the
Additional Features systems. During the life of the equipment there has been
some rationalisation and modifications to some of the PCB’s. As a general rule
the PCB’s fitted to later units can used as replacements for those used in earlier
units.
Input PCB T65801819 can be used to replace Input PCB T65801804
Pulse Bearing PCB T65801826 can be used to replace Pulse Bearing PCB
T65801805
Motor Drive PCB T65801827 can be used to replace Motor Drive PCB
T65801811
Trigger PCB T65801806 can be used to replace Trigger PCB T65801803, but if
the radar silence input is being used with the RS422 format it will be necessary to
connect a 120ohm resistor between input terminals on the tagstrip.
4.1 X-Band Turning Unit (Masthead Transceiver)
Description Spare Part Number
Turning Unit Type **65810Nxx, 65825Nxx, **65810Txx, 65825Lxx
65825Txx
Trigger Board* T65801803 or T65801806 T65801825 T65801801
Input Board T65801819 T65801819 T65801819
Pulse Bearing PC T65801826 T65801826 T65801805
Motor Drive PCB T65801827 T65801827 T65801811
*T65801806 can be used to replace T65801803 fitted to earlier units, but if the radar
silence input is being used with the RS422 format it will be necessary to connect a
120ohm resistor between TSD10 and TSD11
** Early units do not have selectable speed option so standard Pulse Bearing and Motor
DrivePCB’s are fitted
4.2 S-Band Turning Unit (Masthead Transceiver)

Trigger Board* T65801803 or T65801806
Input Board T65801819
* T65801806 can be used to replace T65801803, but if the radar silence input is being
used with the RS422 format it will be necessary to connect a 120ohm resistor between
TSD1 and TSD2.
4.3 X-Band Turning Unit (for use with Bulkhead Transceiver)

Input PCB T65801819
Pulse Bearing PCB T65801826
Motor Drive PCB T65801827
4.4 S-Band Turning Unit (for use with Bulkhead Transceiver)
65800010B 9-23
4.5 X-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Units Type 65810F, 65810L,
65825F, 65825L
Transceiver Type 65810F, 65825F 65810L, 65825L
Trigger Board* T65801803 or T65801806 T65801825
Input Board T65801815 T65801815
TSD1 and TSD2.
4.6 X-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Units Type 65810B, 65810T,

65825B, 65825T
Transceiver Type 65810B, 65825B 65810T, 65825T
Trigger Board* T65801803 or T65801806 T65801825
Input Board T65801821 T65801821
TSD1 and TSD2.
4.7 S-Band Bulkhead Transceiver Units 65831B

Trigger Board* T65801803, T65801806
TSD1 and TSD2.
9-24 65800010B
5 Circuit Diagrams.
This sections includes circuit diagrams for the Input PCB’s, for the main unit
schematic diagrams see Chapter 6.
65800010B 9-25

intentionally
9-26 65800010B
Figure 9.8. Circuit Diagram Input PCB 65801819
65800010B 9-27
65800010B 9-29
65800010B 9-31

65800010B-4 - Rev - A Ships Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

65800010B-4 - Rev - A Ships Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

65800010B-4 - Rev - A Ships Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ship’s Manual

Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

118 Burlington Road, New Malden, Surrey, KT3 4NR England

Part Number: 65800010B-4 Printed in England March 2005

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The Radar features, functionality and capability

WARNING: Lethal Voltage Hazard

WARNING: Health Hazard

WARNING: Radiation Hazard

Never look directly into an open waveguide.

CAUTION: Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSDs)

Revision No Issue Date Date Incorporated

BridgeMaster E:- S-band Scanner Unit (with Integral Transceiver)

BridgeMaster E:- X-band Scanner Unit (with Integral or Bulkhead Transceiver)

BridgeMaster E:- S-band Bulkhead Transceiver

BridgeMaster E:- X-band Bulkhead Transceiver

BridgeMaster E:- Desk Mounted 180 Display Unit

BridgeMaster E:- Flat Panel Monitors

BridgeMaster E:- Deck Mounted 340 Display Unit

BridgeMaster E:- Kit and Extended Kit Processor Units

Memory Card Interface Trackerball

BridgeMaster E:- Kit Radar Display Modules

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

• Chapter 1 - Technical Specification. This chapter gives a full specification of the

• Chapter 2 - System Configurations. This chapter details the system configurations

• Chapter 3 - Installation. This chapter gives notes on installation with installation

• Chapter 7 - Routine Maintenance. This chapter gives procedures for routine

BridgeMaster E Radar Series

Related Documents ...................................................................................................... Preamble

Glossary of Terms ........................................................................................................ Preamble

Software Licence Agreement........................................................................................ Preamble

Declaration of Conformity Certificate ............................................................................ Preamble

Technical Specification................................................................................................. Chapter 1

System Configurations ................................................................................................. Chapter 2

Installation .................................................................................................................... Chapter 3

Initialisation and Commissioning .................................................................................. Chapter 4

Operator Tests.............................................................................................................. Chapter 5

Fault Reporting and First Line Servicing....................................................................... Chapter 6

Routine Maintenance.................................................................................................... Chapter 7

Additional Features....................................................................................................... Chapter 9

Other documents in the series:

• Bridge Card...........................................................................(Publications Ref 65800008)

• Bridge Card for Dual Channel Radars ..................................(Publications Ref 65818007)

• User Guide......................................................................... (Publications Ref 65800010A)

• Technical Manual..................................................................(Publications Ref 65800011)

• Ancillary Units & Radar Systems Manual..............................(Publications Ref 65800012)

• BridgeMaster II S-band Supplement .....................................(Publications Ref 65601012)

• BridgeMaster II X-band Supplement .....................................(Publications Ref 65601013)

Antenna............................. Slotted waveguide array for transmitting and receiving microwave

BIST .................................. Built in Self-Test

CRT................................... Cathode Ray Tube

EMC .................................. Electromagnetic Compatibility

ft ........................................ foot or feet

GMT .................................. Greenwich Mean Time

Hz...................................... Hertz (unit of Frequency)

I/O ..................................... Input/Output

LCD ................................... Liquid Crystal Display

NMEA ................................ National Marine Electronic Association

PCB ................................... Printed Circuit Board